JP2020037035A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can restrain deterioration in interest in games.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of executing a game using a game medium comprises: special lottery means which can execute a special lottery on the basis of establishment of a predetermined condition; performance execution means which can execute a performance on the basis of a lottery result of the special lottery; and operation means which can receive an operation input by a player. The performance execution means has mode change means which changes a mode of the operation means to a specific mode different from a normal mode when the operation means can receive the operation input.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that includes operation means (operation buttons) that can be operated by a player, receives an operation input by the player, and performs an effect by the operation means itself (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2005-54225

  However, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is little mention of the effect of the effect due to the relationship between the effect of the operation means itself and the change display of the special symbol. The relevance between the stop timing of the variable display and the mode of the operation means has a great influence on the staging effect given to the player, and there is a concern that a mistake in the association may reduce the interest of the game.

  The problem to be solved by the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.

  In a representative embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game using a game medium, a special lottery means capable of executing a special lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special lottery means based on a lottery result of the special lottery. And an operation means capable of receiving an operation input by a player, wherein the effect execution means is provided when the operation means becomes receivable. It has a mode changing means for changing the mode to a specific mode different from the normal mode, and when the lottery result of the special lottery is a specific result, the operating means set to the specific mode by the mode changing means is When the operation input is received by the first operation mode, the operation means is changed to the normal mode. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special lottery does not become a specific result, the mode is changed by the mode changing means. When an operation input is received for the operation means set as the specific mode, the operation means is changed to the normal mode by a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, and the first operation mode and The second operation mode includes a common operation mode for causing the operation means to perform a common operation.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to solve the above-described problem and suppress a decrease in interest in a game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which removed the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the upper hinge member is attached to the main body side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit from the back. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit taken apart from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from behind with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame from the right front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the left front. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the lower left rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and looked from behind. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of a portion of the lower plate in a state where the lower plate cover is removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a different ball guiding portion than (a). FIG. 4C is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a different ball guiding portion is further provided. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is an explanatory view in which (c) is a schematic perspective view of the lower plate of (b). (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extended. FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.48 (b). 48A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 48B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit and looked from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the effect operation unit and looked from behind. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in FIG. 51. (A) is a view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, showing a portion where the operation button is partially cut away to be hidden by a first button decoration portion, a button frame, or the like of the operation button. It is an explanatory view showing, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a part which is going to be hidden by a first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a production operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit in a perspective view as viewed from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (A) is a front view of the second effect operation unit different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the back. It is the explanation drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 64 (a) cut along a line GG. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 64 (b) taken along line HH. (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd effect operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extended, with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub-screen of the screen unit. It is the explanatory view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button extended in the state turned to the front. 74A is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74B. (A) is to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, and the like in a view when the main screen is directed forward and the second operation operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which exists, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) is to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like in a view of the operation button with the sub-screen facing forward, viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which exists, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) is a front view of the third effect operation unit different from the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77 in the embodiment, and (b) is a right side view of the third effect operation unit. is there. It is a rear view of the third effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd production operation unit from the back. It is the explanation drawing which looked at the 3rd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 78 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 3rd effect operation unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 3rd effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the 3rd base unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operating unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a front view of the third effect operation unit showing the second decoration surface portion of the decoration rotator unit facing forward, and (b) is a direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends in (a). FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 1st decoration surface part in the state which turned the 1st decoration surface part forward in the 3rd production operation unit, and (b) is a 3rd production operation unit which makes the 2nd decoration surface part front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation of the 2nd decorative surface part in the state turned toward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable effect which rotates a decoration rotating body unit in a 3rd effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable effect which rotates a decoration rotating body unit in the state which rotated the 1st decoration surface part and the 2nd decoration surface part in a 3rd effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the air by rotation of a 2nd decoration surface part in a 3rd effect operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame left side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. FIG. 93 is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 93 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame right side unit viewed from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line in FIG. 97 (a). 97A is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 97A, and FIG. 97B is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in FIG. 97A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back. It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked from behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the RR line in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from the disassembly before. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from back and disassembled. (A) is a front view of a payout apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by SS line in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the dispensing device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower full tank path unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit from behind and disassembled. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel opaque. 129 is a perspective view of the gaming board in the state of FIG. 129 as viewed from the front right. 129 is a perspective view of the gaming board in the state of FIG. 129 as viewed from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. FIG. 129 is a cross-sectional view taken along line TT in FIG. 129. 129 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line U-U in FIG. 129. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front unit in the game board in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel transparent. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit, the side unit, the side slope, and the attacker unit in the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which cut | disconnected the attacker unit in the front unit in the substantially center of the front-back direction in the game area, and showed it from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the center role in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center role as viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and looked at after. (A) is a front view of the back decoration unit in the back unit, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view cut along line VV in (a) and enlarged. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper movable rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper movable rendering unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable production knit mainly for every structural unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper movable effect unit for every main structural unit, and was seen from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit viewed from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back upper first decorative body unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper first decorative body unit and looked from behind. (A) is an explanatory view showing a drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and (b) is a drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the open position from the front. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper second decoration body unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper second decoration body unit and looked from behind. (A) is an explanatory view showing a drive system when the back upper second decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and (b) is a drive system when the back upper second decorative body unit is in the open position from the front. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper third decoration body unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper third decoration body unit and looked from behind. (A) is an explanatory view showing from the front the drive system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the closed position, and (b) is the drive system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the open position from the front. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit in the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back upper rotation base unit from disassembly. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back upper rotation base unit from the disassembly. It is explanatory drawing which shows the gear structure in a back upper rotation base unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the operating lever in the back upper rotating base unit in the operating position from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the state of the operating lever in the non-operating position from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back raising / lowering unit in the back upper movable effecting unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back lifting / lowering unit from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the back elevation unit, which is disassembled into a movable unit and a fixed unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the apparatus viewed from behind. FIG. 2A is an exploded perspective view of the movable unit of the back elevating unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the fixed side unit of the back raising / lowering unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fixed side unit of the back raising / lowering unit and was seen from behind. (A) is an explanatory view showing from the front the drive system when the movable unit of the back elevating unit is in the ascending position, and (b) is the driving system when the movable unit of the back elevating unit is in the lowered position. It is explanatory drawing shown from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the movable side unit of a back raising / lowering unit is a raise position in a back upper movable effecting unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the movable side unit of a back raising / lowering unit in a back upper movable effecting unit is a descent position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of an operation lever in an operation position, when a movable side unit is a down position and a back upper rotation base unit is a horizontal position in a back upper movable effect unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state where an operation lever is in a non-operation position when a movable side unit is a down position and a back upper rotation base unit is a horizontal position in a back upper movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back upper rotation base unit when a movable side unit is a lowered position and a back upper rotation base unit is a horizontal position in a back upper movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back-upside rotation base unit when a movable side unit in a back-upside movable effect unit rotates 45 degrees clockwise from a horizontal position at a lower position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back upper rotary base unit when a movable side unit is a down position and a back upper rotary base unit is a vertical position in a back upper movable effect unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation lever is in the non-operation position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotating base unit is in the vertical position in the back upper movable effect unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state where an operation lever regulates rotation at an operation position when a movable side unit is a down position and an upper back rotation base unit is a vertical position in a back upper movable effect unit. When the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotating base unit is in the vertical position in the back upper movable effecting unit, the operation lever is in the operation position in the back upper first decorative body unit, the upper back second decorative body unit, and the upper back second decorative body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which acts on three decoration body units. (A) is a front view of the underside movable production unit of the back unit, (b) is a back view of the underside movable production unit, and (c) is the underside movable decorative unit in the underside movable production unit. It is a rear view shown in the state where it raised. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back middle left decorative body and the back middle right decorative body of the back middle movable production unit in the back unit to the appearance position on the center side. After moving the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the back left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit in the back unit to the appearance position closer to the center, with each first decorative surface facing forward It is a front view of the game board shown. FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board in which the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit are rotated from the state of FIG. 186 so that the respective second decorative surfaces face forward. . FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board in which the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable rendering unit and the back right movable rendering unit are rotated from the state of FIG. 186 so that the respective third decorative surfaces face forward. . The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the first upper decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable of the second upper decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit After setting the decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit in the closed position, respectively, the back upper first decorative body unit and the back upper second decoration It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the body unit and the back upper rotation base unit to the lowering position, keeping the state of the horizontal position so that the back upper third decoration body unit may be arranged horizontally. From the state of FIG. 189, the back upper rotating base unit is rotated 45 degrees in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front so that the back upper first decorative body unit, the upper back second decorative body unit, and the upper back third decorative body unit are inclined. It is a front view of the game board shown in a lined state. From the state of FIG. 190, the back upper rotating base unit is further rotated 45 degrees in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, so that the back upper first decorative body unit, the back upper second decorative body unit, and the back upper third It is a front view of the game board which shows the decoration body unit in the state which was lined up vertically. From the state of FIG. 177, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit, and With the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit in the open position, respectively, the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which made it visually recognizable. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the lower back movable decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit in the back unit was moved to the first ascending position. FIG. 192 is a front view of the game board in a state where the lower back movable decorative body unit is further raised from the state of FIG. 193 and moved to a second raised position. As another embodiment of the game board, an explanatory diagram showing an example in which an LED for making a light emitting decoration of the center lens on the back of the back of the back unit is provided on the movable production unit on the back of the back unit. It is. In the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board, the back upper rotating base unit is in a vertical position, and the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the first upper decorative body unit, The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the upper second decorative body unit, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the upper third decorative body unit in the open position, respectively. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens as being visible. A third production operation unit 400B is attached to the dish unit 320 in place of the production operation unit 400, and the first decoration surface of the decoration rotator unit is directed forward, and the game board is displayed in a normal state. It is a front view. In FIG. 197, after the second decoration surface portion of the decoration rotating body unit is directed forward, the back rotation base unit is set to the vertical position in the back movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board. A first left movable decorative lens and a first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, a second left movable decorative lens and a second right movable decorative lens of the second upper decorative body unit, and a back upper third With the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the decorative body unit in the open position, respectively, the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens were made visible. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in a state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special figure pre-reading effect control processing in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the look-ahead effect including a button movable body effect. It is a flow chart which shows an example of button production setting processing in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of button operation production processing in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining a button movable body effect by operation input of a player. It is a figure explaining a button movable body effect during a change, and a mode change of a button movable body.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the device as viewed from behind after being disassembled.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a player that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is connected to lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are openably and closably mounted by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular shape having a vertically extending outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating front and rear, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. And a dish unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the front face, and a player attached to the center of the dish unit 320 according to a game state that changes when a game ball is driven into the game area 5a. An effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 540, a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 540. And a door frame top unit 570 mounted above the door frame right side unit 550 and above the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main frame base 600, which is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are rotatably attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, respectively, and the upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are rotatable. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, the reinforcing frame 660 mounted on the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the main body frame base 600 And a ball launching device 680 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the body frame mounted on the right side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. 4, And a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L-shape which is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view and pays out game balls to the player side. Payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 which is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left in a front view. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 in front view for guiding game balls from the tank rail 803 in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820 Game balls that are detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 at the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 The payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 accommodated in the payout control board box 950, and the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward. An upper full tank path unit 850 that guides and discharges game balls from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e in accordance with the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320; A normal guide path 861 and a full guide path that guide the game balls discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guide the game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861 The game ball released from the tongue discharge port 850 e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full tank receiving port 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. Speaker unit 920 having a power supply board 921, a power supply board box 930 that is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and houses a power supply board therein, An interface control board box 940 accommodating an interface control board therein, and a payout control board 951 mounted on the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. And a payout control board box 950. .

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and places the game ball fired from the ball firing device 680 on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guides the player, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the game balls are rotated by the ball firing device 680 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the interest of the player can be increased by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the players can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembly. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated from each other and extends left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. , And a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that extend to the right. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Also, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same. Have been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably mounted.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 having both ends attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position closer to the left from the left and right center, A right sliding member 82 in the form of a flat plate attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, or the like), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. , Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, or the like). The upper frame member 10 has an engagement notch 11 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 11, an upper left and right fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. In addition, the upper frame member 10 includes, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view, a mounting step portion 12 that is recessed from the general surface. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 has the same length as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10 and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10. Is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 21, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and a lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D of the connecting member 85 described below are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 has a front end notch portion 22 that is recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same size as the front-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal member such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetric shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are depressed inward on the lateral side outside in the left-right direction from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end. It has recesses 31 and 41 and projections 32 and 42 which bulge out from the side surface opposite to the recesses 31 and 41 and have an internal cavity. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 described later are inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on the surface. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility such as a game hall or transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by fingers and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is opened. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape large enough to allow a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51, An upright wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and bulging forward from near the upper end of the upright wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go rearward as it goes toward.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, which will be described later, when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state where it is assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  The upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined such that the front end side is lower. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting a right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a lattice shape, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown, the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 has an upper fixing portion 61 having a rectangular shape and a quadrangular outer shape, and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A front extending portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the right and left center of the front extending portion 62 from the right end of the front extending portion 62 to the front, and vertically penetrating, and an upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A horizontal fixing portion 64 having a flat plate shape extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end portion extending from the left end to the front end of the front extension portion 62 to a portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). I have. The front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. The horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state where the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the concave portion 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 allows the main frame 4 to cooperate with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66 a extending right and left with a predetermined width on the left and right, and an operation unit protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then extending diagonally left forward, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is mounted at a position behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. In a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the 60 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  The distal end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a, in which a main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 described later can be accommodated.

  By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper main frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands up horizontally from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. An upright flat rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a vertically penetrating horizontal portion 71 allowing only one game ball to pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is provided. Are fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 in front of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) of the main frame 4 at the main frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 74 coincide with the left discharge holes 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and it is possible to discharge from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connection member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connection member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connection member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. 86, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided to be separated from each other in the front and rear directions. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of contacting the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and are fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front sides of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is screwed into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. By this, it is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is lower than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower left and right fixing members 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. You.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 show a lock mechanism of the main frame 4 to the main frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main frame is detached from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member was attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation of the lock member on the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the distal end of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a U-shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 according to the present embodiment includes the front end of the lock body 66a in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. Of the lock body 66a (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65). In the normal shaft support state (not shown), the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in a diagonal direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal pivoting state, since the hinge pin 622 on the body frame that supports the heavy body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin on the body frame is There is almost no load on the front end face of the lock body 66a from 622. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end face of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operation part 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. I have. In the figure, the center of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is pulled out along the inclination of the U-shaped bearing groove 63 and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F, a component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame and the front end face of the arc shape; And the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the one side inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (the mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment for rotating the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging part 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame moves the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is subjected to the normal pin support state or the action force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. This prevents the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and prevents the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from dropping out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move rightward, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the hanging portion 65 and Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  In addition, even if the shape of the front end face of the lock body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the above-described component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 is directed outward of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) of the lock member 66 at a position where a rotational moment for rotating the lock member 66 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is opposed to the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a, which has closed the bearing groove 63, retreats and the bearing groove 63 is opened, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is urged by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves rightward, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame is accommodated in a space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked).

  When removing the upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. Thus, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a ball security for preventing a game ball from being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1. The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to a left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (the pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear. In addition, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when an invalid tool that has contacted the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the invalid tool to be bent. Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, in the case where the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game sphere is placed on the outer frame side while the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not ejected rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 May be trapped between On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which game balls can pass and a left discharge hole 52. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between them.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and the outer frame 2 is not closed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like, the door frame 3 is attached to a square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a lower right front corner of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a plate unit 320 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320 A door frame left side unit 540 attached to the front left portion of the door frame 100; a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320; Door frame top mounted on the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 It is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later. And a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and mounted on upper and lower ends on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 when viewed from the front, and mounted rotatably on the body frame 4 with hinges. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the gap, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a ball attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 And a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been fired by the firing device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and discharges the ball to the lower plate 322.

  As will be described later in detail, the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to rotate the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with different strength.

  The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later in detail, but is attached to a portion below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface swells forward, The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 or the foul cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball pull-out button 327 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the cash and the prepaid card remaining in the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and a cash input to the ball lending machine Ball return display section 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards and the like, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 capable of accepting a player's operation at the time of effect presentation, and a lower plate. Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and allows the player to perform a pressing operation and presents an effect image to the player. Is what you can do. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by a player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display an effect image. And a display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper left side of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and the through-hole 111 ( It decorates the left outside of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 540 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be illuminated and decorated.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, as will be described in detail later. The right outside of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 projects farther forward than the door frame left side unit 540, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a front end. And a right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is mounted above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570 has a pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, a top decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front, and left and right sides of the top decoration member 576, which will be described in detail later. A decorative top left decorative lens member 579 and a decorative top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can make the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 emit light.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) such that the left side of the front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 300 at a lower front corner, a plate unit 320 to which a staging operation unit 400 is attached at a lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 540 at a left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is mounted on the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating forward and backward as shown in FIGS. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, which project forward from the door frame base 110 to form the body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640; A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 mounted rotatably on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front lower right corner of the front of the door frame base 110 in front view, and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111; a security cover 200 that covers a lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190; and an open / close cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , An upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying connection between the body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through-hole 111 which penetrates in the front-rear direction, and whose inner peripheral shape in a front view is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. In the through hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Accordingly, the entire door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape by the through-holes 111 penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 whose left end is inclined slightly forward from the right end, a handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. Between the front and rear sides of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210, the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached. The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth from the center in the left-right direction of the door frame base 110 and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passage opening 116 and the through-hole passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 face forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-hole 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in a front view. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through hole 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both right and left sides of the door frame base 110. And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along an upper side of a rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcing member attached to a lower side of the through-hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in front view of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The locking unit 135 includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and that locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, both left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to respective upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to a right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a cutout portion 132a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The parts enhance the strength and rigidity, and also prevent unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is provided on the door frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a vertically separated from each other. The door frame hinge hinge bracket 141 has a pair of protrusions, and the door frame hinge hinge bracket 141 has a pair of protrusions. And a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. And a disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the two and a door frame hinge pin 142 interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. And a lock spring 144 that urges the upper hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and has a shape that is open forward when viewed from the side. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece for connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on a rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion projecting below the lower projecting piece 141a bent horizontally. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower projecting piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted. The upper end of the lock spring 144 contacts the flange member 143, and the lower end of the lock spring 144 contacts the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward through the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and a horizontally bent portion at a lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is a lower projecting portion. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is provided when the operator holds a horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, and the door frame The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can insert or pull out the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620. Can be. By inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 as viewed from the front is obtained. The hinge can be rotatably supported on the body frame 4.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is configured such that a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 which is supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. And a column-shaped door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extension piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) that extends upward from the rear end of the flat extending piece 151a that extends horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L-shape. In the hinge bracket 151 below the door frame, a mounting piece (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  The hinge pin 152 below the door frame has a lower end formed in a truncated cone shape that tapers downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is disposed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 in a front view. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view to a height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. Decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame, and lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extending up and down from the lower position of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to almost the same height as the lower end of the passage 117 for the upper plate. And a substrate 162.

  The upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 162 on the left side of the door frame of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a on the front surface, respectively, which can emit light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind a door frame left side unit 540 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a, 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 540 can be illuminated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for removably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disc-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes from the base 171 in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, so that the protruding portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. In this state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the projection 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 to restrict the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

  Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protruding portion 172. . Thus, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the state is stabilized in a state where the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position where it protrudes downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the protruding portion 172. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated such that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171 so that the protrusion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182, and a plurality of annular flange portions 182 protruding into the tubular portion 181 and extending over the entire length of the tubular portion 181 in the axial direction and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 ( In this example, three) are provided with ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181. .

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where the handle unit 300 is similarly tilted so that the axis of 181 extends rightward and forward.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. 191 attached to two transparent glass plates 192. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward from a position lower than the upper left and right upper corners in a flat plate shape, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from behind the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. Is attached to the door frame base 110 by making contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 190 is detachable from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 has a flat main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201, and is spaced apart in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body 201 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

  Note that the rear protruding piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the gaming board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state where it is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, game balls passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (game balls fired by the ball firing device 680) do not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200, and the game ball 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball being driven into the game.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts on the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and projects from the lower side of the main body 201 to the rear. The removed rear protruding piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state where the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extends forward and backward, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting the key lock 710 to the key cylinder 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (the reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, it can be either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Accordingly, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape projecting forward in plan view. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate parts 213c extending in a plate shape in a direction away from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate parts 213b. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 from the rear at a position substantially at the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is mounted on the rear surface of the front plate 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are such that the left mounting plate portion 213c in the front view is mounted on the right end of the middle reinforcing plate 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the right mounting plate portion 213c is the reinforcing unit 130 in the front view. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thus, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate part 213a and the pair of side plate parts 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are housed in a box-shaped cylinder mounting part 113 which is inserted through the front side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes rearward. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feed unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the front with the ball feeding unit exploded, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launching device 680 one by one, and also converts the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 into the upper plate balls. The lower tray can be pulled out by operating the pull button 327.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110, and penetrate in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b opening below the entrance 251a, and a box-shaped front cover 251 having a rear end opened, and a box having a front end opened and a rear end closed. A rear cover 252 having a hit ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launching device 680, and the rear cover 252 and the front cover. The partition 253 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and a partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b behind the front cover 251. And the game balls on the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and are vertically moved between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. The ball feeding member 254 rotatably supported around the extended axis and the ball feeding solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feeding member 254 are provided.

  In the ball feeding unit 250, as shown in the drawing, a ball feeding member 254 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 251a in a front view, and a ball punching member 253 is provided on the left side of the ball feeding member 254. A ball feeding solenoid 255 is disposed on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 includes an arc-shaped slit 251c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball-pulling member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251b in a front view. The operation rod 253c of the ball-pulling member 253 described later extends forward. The front cover 251 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is located upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball empty guide path 323f of the plate unit base 323. It is formed so as to close the part opened rearward on the end side from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 253 has a partition part 253a below the entrance 251a, between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, and an upper surface which becomes lower toward the ball feed member 254, and a ball of the partition part 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and bends in a V-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and the lower end turns around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotatable rod 253b movably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 253c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 253b, and a lower side than the operating rod 253c from the side of the rotating rod 253b. And a weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 253c is in contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that is operated by pressing the upper tray ball removing button 327 of the tray unit 320 through the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a blocking portion 254a having a fan shape in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the entrance 251a and the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253, and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a. And a ball holding portion 254b which is depressed in an arc shape toward the rotation axis side, and a rod-shaped rod portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 rotates around the rotation axis when the rod 254c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255.

  The ball feeding member 254 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the partitioning portion 253a and a ball holding portion 254b in a direction communicating with the hit ball supply port 252a, and a ball holding portion 254b in the direction of the partitioning portion 253a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position facing the side. When the ball feeding member 254 is at the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680, and enters the partition 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the movement to the ball holding unit 254b (ball hit supply port 252a) side is blocked by the blocking unit 254a, and the ball stays on the partition unit 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the rod portion 254c side closes the hit ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

  The ball feed unit 250 is moved forward and backward by the ball feed operation rod 256 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energization) of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed action rod 256 that swings up and down. And a ball feed crank 257 for rotating the ball feed member 254 about an axis extending in the vertical direction while rotating about an axis extending in the direction. The ball-feeding crank 257 is configured to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball-feeding operation rod 256 and extend in the left-right direction, and a side of the engaging part 257a that engages with the ball-feeding operation rod 256. A shaft portion 257b disposed on the opposite side and rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and extending upward from the shaft portion 257b to feed the ball; And a transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the member 254.

  The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed operation rod 256 that swings by driving the ball feed solenoid 255 that moves up and down by the ball feed operation rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257, thereby causing the ball feed member 254 to move. Can be rotated. When the ball-feeding solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball-feeding operation rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 255 and its tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball-feeding member 254 is in the supply position. It is in the state located at. When the ball-feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball-feeding operation rod 256 is sucked by the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 255 so that the tip is positioned upward, and the ball-feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released (OFF state). Can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by a firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 682.

  Further, the rotatable ball removing member 253 of the ball feed unit 250 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise in front view by the weight portion 253d, but projects forward. The rotation of the operating rod 253c is restricted by the contact of the operating rod 253c with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate removing button 327 of the plate unit 320, so that the ball removing member 253 is normally used. Is partitioned between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  Then, when the player pushes down the upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b slides down together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, and the operation transmitting portion 327a moves downward. As a result, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partitioning portion 253a is released. Is done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  In addition, since the upper counter-ball-pulling slider 327b in which the operation transmission part 327a with which the operating rod 253c of the ball-pulling member 253 contacts is formed, it is urged upward by the upper counter-ball-pulling spring 327c. Even if the game ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the upper countersunk ball removing spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removing member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 253a.

  The ball feed unit 250 has a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. A fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feed unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

  The anti-fraud member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape when viewed from the front extends left and right, and is separated vertically from the right side to the left at a predetermined distance from the upper portion 261 at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction. A lower part 262 and an inclined part 263 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper part 261 and the lower part 262 are provided. . The upper piece 261 of the anti-fraud member 260 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 260. The lower piece 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. Thus, in a plan view, the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 form a V-shaped groove that spreads rightward.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment concave portion 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 260, a fraudulent game ball to which a string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 680 from the upper plate 321 via the ball feed unit 250, and is attached to the fraudulent game ball. When a string is manipulated to perform an illegal act of causing an unauthorized game ball to be taken in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like, an unauthorized game ball fired (hit) by the ball launching device 680 generates an illegal action. After the string attached to the game ball is inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, the V-shaped narrowing formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 is performed. It is possible to cut by a part, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball attached with a string.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in a front view, and penetrates the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 323a of the tray unit 320. A full tank receiving port 274 that opens rearward at the lower right side of the passage 273 and the through-ball path 273 when viewed from the front and is capable of communicating with the full guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And

  Further, foul cover unit 270 opens upward on the right side in front view of full tank receiving port 274 and does not reach game area 5a despite being fired by ball firing device 680 of main body frame 4. Ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (a foul ball), and a game ball received in the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 which opens forward near the lower right corner in front view. And a ball discharge port 276 communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full ball reception port 274 and the foul ball reception port 275 and the ball discharge port 276 by the unit body 271 and the cover member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A large-sized storage passage 277, a flat movable piece 278 which forms a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and has a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, A full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 for urging the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  When the inside of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 becomes full of game balls and the game balls are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, a certain number of the foul cover units 270 are stored in the storage passage 277. Game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 277 against the urging force of the spring 280 due to the weight of the game ball. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. This makes it possible to determine that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, so that when the full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, further payout of game balls is stopped, and That fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and can be prompted to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 322.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through ball passage 273, and a guideway opening / closing door of a lower full tank path unit 860 in a payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. 863 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 281 to which the operation projection 863e can contact (see FIG. 127). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 863 e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact. When the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 turns, and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. FIG. 40 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by a player so that a game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 at the rear side of the handle 302, and a handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 to the outer periphery. A shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306, the handle base 301 and the inner A handle rotation detection sensor 307 held between the base and the base.

  Further, the handle unit 300 has one end attached to the handle base 301 and the other end attached to the handle 302 such that the handle 302 is returned to an initial rotation position (a counterclockwise rotation end in front view). One end is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307 a of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise in front view through the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 urged in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side is outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 301 when viewed from the front. The handle is protruding and the base end is behind the inner base 304. A single-shot button 311 attached to the base 301 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 attached to the handle base 301 by detecting a pressing operation of the single-shot button 311. I have.

  The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 has a cylindrical base 301a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 301b protruding in a radial direction from the front end of the base 301a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 301a. And three grooves 301c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. The three groove portions 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Accordingly, the base portion 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three ridges 183, and the ridges 183 are respectively formed in the three groove portions 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d that protrude outward away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, and the other end of the handle return spring 308 is locked. Locking protrusion 302f.

  The four first projections 302a, the second projections 302b, the third projections 302c, and the fourth projections 302d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a is formed such that a side surface in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 bulges outward, and the first protrusion 302a is located on the opposite side. Side is concave (gouge) so as to curve inward. The second protrusion 302b is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 302a by a clockwise rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and It protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 302b has a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the most protruding portion bulging outward, and the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

  The third protrusion 302c is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b by a clockwise rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 302a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surface of the third protrusion 302c is substantially linearly inclined on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is more gentlely inclined than the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction. The fourth protrusion 302d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in a clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 302d are substantially linearly inclined, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The handle cover 303 has three mounting bosses 303a which are rounded at the center of the front surface and bulged forward and project rearward. The three mounting bosses 303a pass through the slit 302e of the handle 302 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 300 that is attached via the outside also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, the tip of the handle unit 300 inclines so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. This makes it easy for the player to grasp the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and allows the player to perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor. When the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball firing device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is hit into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are plated with a conductive material, and when the player comes into contact with the handle 302 or the like, the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact. When the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in any way without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven, and the player can hit the game ball. I cannot do it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single button 311 while the player rotates the handle 302, the single button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single button 311, and the handle control unit of the payout control board 951 (see FIG. ), The rotation drive of the firing solenoid 682 is stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, and the pressing before the operation of the single-shot button 311 is performed by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 311. The game ball can be driven into the game area 5a again with the strength.

  Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and rotates the handle 302 most clockwise in a front view. Then, when the game ball is most strongly driven into the game area 5a (so-called "right-hit"), the fourth protrusion 302d is positioned at the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated. By changing the handle 302 with the fourth projection 302d as the first projection 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 at the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state, It is possible to reduce a feeling of fatigue of the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41A is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front left. FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. The plate unit 320 is attached to a portion below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320.

  The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 or the foul cover unit 270. And a lower plate 322 that can be stored.

  The plate unit 320 has a flat plate unit base 323 mounted on the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is mounted on the upper front surface of the plate unit base 323, and the left side is largely swelled forward from the left and right center. An upper plate main body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and a lower plate main body 325 which is attached to the lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 323 from the left and right center and swells greatly to form the lower plate 322. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325.

  The dish unit 320 has an upper dish ball removing button 327 attached to the upper plate 321 on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 so as to be operable to be pressed from above on the right side of the upper dish 321 and a front view of the upper dish ball removing button 327. A ball lending button 328 mounted on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 mounted on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side in front view of the ball lending button 328, and a ball lending button 328 A ball return display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and a plate front upper decorative portion 326b in front of the upper plate 321 and in front of the plate unit cover 326. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 and the front of the lower plate 322 project forward from the front of the plate unit cover 326. And has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side bulges forward more than the left and right center in front view, and is formed in a container shape opened upward. Have been. In the upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324), a portion that is about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. The upper plate 321 has a front end receding rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and has a guide passage portion 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. I have. The upper plate 321 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 321a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a in front view is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323 a of the plate unit base 323 to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323 d. Are inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. Thereby, the game balls discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321 and the received game balls can be stored in the upper plate from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feed port 323d.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface of the guide passage portion 321a in which the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower becomes lower downward. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 projects from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is mounted. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  The guide passage 321a is provided with a metal grounding member 321b, which is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and is contacted (rolled) by the game ball to form the game ball. It can remove charged static electricity.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 322 is disposed below the upper plate 321 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to a lower plate ball hole 322a which penetrates vertically through the bottom wall portion 325a and is capable of discharging game balls, and a plate unit cover 326. And a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the provided effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner is concave in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower plate 322 includes a lower plate main body 325 having an open upper portion and a rearward portion, a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers an upper portion from the left end side of the lower plate main portion 325, and an opening of the lower plate main portion 325. And a lower plate cover 340 that covers a portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a trapezoidal shape in which the outer peripheral shape in a plan view is a quadrangular shape extending left and right, and the front side of the quadrilateral is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. , And the trapezoid is curved so that the obliquely extending left and right sides of the trapezoid are recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in plan view.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate main body 325 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall portion 325a excluding a rear end side, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. And a lower dish hole 322a penetrating up and down as much as possible. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a has a quadrangular shape extending left and right, and a front side of the quadrilateral whose bottom side is shorter than the bottom side is disposed on the front side, and the left and right sides that are obliquely extended are curved so as to be recessed rearward. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid and a trapezoid. (The upper surface of) the bottom wall portion 325a is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower countersunk hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower plate hole 322a is formed at a position closer to the right than the center in the left-right direction of the lower plate main body 325 (bottom wall 325a). In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portions at the front right corner of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b correspond to the relief portion 322b.

  The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the right half above the lower plate main body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate cover 340 includes a cover standing wall portion 340a that rises upward from an upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, and a substantially lower portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a. And a ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 from a part on the front side to a rear end on the right side. When the lower plate cover 340 is assembled to the plate unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323. The front end (left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover 326k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, a curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and a portion that extends obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. I have.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (production operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end in front view of a portion extending short to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of the production operation unit 400 in front view. Is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half goes around the effect operation unit 400. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes a lower plate first area A1 (a cross hatched area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326 described later. The lower plate second region A2 (hatched in FIG. 45) located on the right side of the opening 326d (behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340). Region). In other words, the lower plate 322 has at least half of a storage area (equivalent to a storage area in a plan view and a combined area of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) in which game balls can be stored, It is located behind the rendering operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the area indicated by the dotted line is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326.

  In the lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323 c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall is opened to the right of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the lower plate 322 is connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326 (the right outside of the lower plate opening 326d), and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. It is arranged in the lower plate second area A2, which is on the rear side. Thus, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower counter ball supply port 323c is not visible from the player side through the lower tray opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to go down from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side of the plate unit 320 (plate unit cover 326) bulging forward toward the rear of the rendering operation unit 400, The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range seen from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the lower plate second region A2 is larger than the lower plate first region A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (the player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

  As shown in FIG. 41A, the lower plate 322 is such that the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second area A2) has the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326 as shown in FIG. ), The lower plate cover 340 covers an upper side of a portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate hole 322a vertically penetrating in front of the lower plate supply port 323c in the lower plate second area A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower plate hole 322a. The lower plate ball removing hole 322 a of the lower plate 322 is closed by a lid member 334 that is operated by a pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333 so as to be openable and closable. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, so that game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322. When the lid member 334 is opened by depressing the lower bowl removing button 333, the game balls in the lower bowl 322 can be discharged from the lower bowl removing hole 322a to below the bowl unit 320.

  The lower plate hole 322 a of the lower plate 322 is disposed in front of (directly in front of) the lower plate supply port 323 c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower plate 322. Therefore, in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, the lower plate hole 322 a is located on the right side of the lower plate opening 326 d of the plate unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the rendering operation unit 400. It is invisible from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 has an outer peripheral shape formed by combining a trapezoid with a narrowed front side on the front side of a square extending left and right, and a bottom plate having a lower plate hole 322a. It is inclined to become lower toward. Therefore, in a state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower bowl ejection hole 322a is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower bowl supply port 323c into the lower bowl 322 is placed directly in front of the lower bowl supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward through the opened lower dish hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower bowl ejection hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower bowl supply port 323c, when the lower bowl extraction hole 322a is open, the lower bowl supply hole 322a is open. The game balls supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 do not directly flow to the area on the left side of the lower plate hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and are discharged from the lower plate hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower bowl input hole 322c is located to the left of the right end of the lower bowl supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower bowl 322 from near the right end of the lower bowl supply port 323c. The ball comes into contact with a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. Since the right standing wall of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate supply port 323c receives the game ball. When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower hole 322a without going to the left side of the lower hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower ball supply port 323c to the lower plate hole 322a, the lower plate hole 322a. Is opened, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c do not enter the area on the left side of the lower dish ball ejection hole 322a in the lower dish 322, but immediately from the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, when the lower bowl removing hole 322a is kept open, the game balls flowing on the lower bowl 322 cannot be seen from the player side, and the ball is paid out from the upper bowl 321 or the payout device 830. An illusion that a game ball or the like is directly discharged to a dollar box can be given as an illusion, and by making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoying passing through the lower plate 322, the player can play a game (playing a game ball). And effect images, etc.) to suppress the decrease in interest.

  The lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall 325b. Even if the game ball supplied to the inside of the lower plate 322 jumps and jumps, the game ball can be prevented from intruding from the lower plate 322 to the mounting space 326j side, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) from contacting the rear side. Therefore, the game balls supplied into the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are prevented from contacting or pressing the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). This can prevent the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from being damaged by the game ball.

  Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate 322 is released from the lower plate supply hole 323c when the lower plate hole 322a is open. Since the played game balls can be directly entered into the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game balls to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Can be. In addition, since the bottom wall 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls released from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 contact the lower dish covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and break them. Can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower countersunk hole 322a may be linked to the upper countersunk button 327. As a result, when the upper plate ball removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower plate ball removing hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. The paper is discharged from the hole 322a to the dollar box below. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong illusion to the player that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described operation and effect can be further exerted. The simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are separately disassembled, but the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Also, an example in which the cover standing wall 340a of the lower plate cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main plate standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 has been described. The cover standing wall portion 340a may rise. In addition, although an example in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is connected to the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from an upper end.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the example in which the relief portion 322b for avoiding the contact of the lower plate 322 with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is provided, but the relief portion 322b is not provided. The lower plate 322 may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the like) has a uniform planar shape without a through hole, but a plurality of through holes through which a game ball cannot pass. It may be one having a hole formed. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall 325a, the main body standing wall 325b, the cover standing wall 340a, the ceiling 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It may be formed in a shape or a net. In addition, a light-emitting body such as an LED may be disposed in the plate unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j), and the inside of the lower plate 322 may be illuminated (light-emitting decoration) through a fence-like or mesh-like gap of the lower plate 322. .

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) formed separately. However, these four members may be integrated in an appropriate combination to form the lower plate 322. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate main body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate unit cover 326 are integrated. An integrated one, a lower plate cover 340 and a plate unit base 323 integrated, a lower plate main body 325 and a plate unit base 323 integrated, a plate unit base 323 and a plate unit cover 326; Are integrated, the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guiding part of lower plate]
An embodiment in which the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 includes a ball guiding portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. . FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding section, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a different ball guiding section than (a). FIG. 8C is an explanatory view schematically showing an example provided with a further different ball guiding section. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the example of the lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 46A, the diameter of the lower plate hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 between the lower plate supply hole 323c and the lower hole 322a. It has a pair of ball guiding portions 322c that are arranged left and right at a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c is formed in a rail shape (projection) extending forward and backward while protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the lower plate 322 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 322a. Accordingly, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are guided by the pair of ball guiding sections 322c into the lower dish ball extracting hole 322a without going over the ball guiding section 322c. It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  Similarly, the lower plate 322 of this example has a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball in the rear (lower plate second area A2) to the right of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326, as described above. The holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removing hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the lower dish cover 340. It is invisible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower dish 322 of the present example is provided with the pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c in a state where the lower dish hole 322a is open. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish hole 322a without entering the lower dish 322 on the left side of the lower dish hole 322a. Since the player cannot see the game balls flowing on the lower plate 322, the illusion that the game balls and the like dispensed from the upper plate 321 and the dispensing device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the player to feel annoying the game balls passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game balls and the effect images) to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be.

  In the example of FIG. 46 (a), a rail-shaped ball guiding portion 322c is shown. However, the ball guiding portion 322c is not limited to this. What is necessary is just to be able to be guided to the countersunk hole 322a.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (b), the game ball discharged diagonally forward right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c passes through the right wall of the lower plate hole 322a in the lower plate 322. The ball is formed in such a shape as to reflect in the direction of the lower bowl removing hole 322a, and a buffer 322d is provided at a position where the game ball contacts. The buffer 322d is formed of rubber, foam, or the like.

  Similarly, the lower plate 322 of this example has a lower plate hole 322a in front of the lower plate supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game ball discharged straight forward from the lower bowl feeding port 323c is directly discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower bowl removing hole 322a. On the other hand, the game ball discharged to the right front from the lower bowl feeding port 323c is reflected by the buffer 322d in the direction of the lower bowl extracting hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower bowl extracting hole 322a. Is done. At this time, since the game ball comes into contact with the buffer 322d and is reflected, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Further, in this example, the lower plate 322 is also in the same manner as described above, and the effect operation unit 400 on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (the effect operation unit 400 and the lower plate unit cover 326). It is disposed behind the covering wall such as the unit mounting portion 326a and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and is not visible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present example includes the buffer portion 322d on the wall that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c, The buffer portion 322d allows the sound to be reflected in the direction of the lower bowl drain hole 322a without sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls and the like dispensed from the upper plate 321 and the dispensing device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls from the lower plate 322 is not heard, so that the ball is directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image) to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be done.

  Subsequently, the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46C is a portion of the bottom surface (bottom wall 325a) of the lower plate 322 opposite to the lower plate supply port 323c with the lower plate hole 322a therebetween. And a return portion 322e that reflects the game ball, which protrudes upward from the lower ball drain hole 322a and jumps over the lower ball drain hole 322a, toward the lower ball drain hole 322a. The return portion 322e may be made of the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322, or may be made of a cushioning material such as rubber or foam, which alleviates a collision sound at the time of reflection. Further, the return portion 322e may not constitute the side wall of the lower plate 322 or may constitute a part of the side wall of the lower plate 322 (the main body standing wall portion 325b).

  In this lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c, a lower plate ball hole 322a, and a return portion 322e are arranged linearly in order from the rear to the front, and the lower plate 326 of the plate unit cover 326 is arranged. To the rear of the opening 326d on the right side (behind the effect operation unit 400, which is the lower plate second area A2, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front wall of the lower plate cover 340, etc.). It is arranged and cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if a game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball hole 322a jumps over the lower ball hole 322a, the return portion 322e forms the lower ball hole 322a. And can be discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower countersunk hole 322a. Therefore, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ball guiding section 322c and the buffer section 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate which can be divided, and FIG. 47 (b) schematically shows a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) by a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at a dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2. In FIG. 47, the area indicated by the dotted hatching indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

  First, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47A constitutes a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate ball hole 322a. It has a main body 325A and a first extension 325B attached to the right side of the main body 325A and constituting the remaining area of the lower second plate area A2. The first additional portion 325B is further provided with the remaining space of the mounting space 326j in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is accommodated (the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A). (Space behind). As shown, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. In addition, the first extension portion 325B has a relief portion 322b at the right front corner for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A.

  Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the rendering operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and thus is lower than the example of FIG. 47 (a). The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is large. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) has a lower plate first region A1 and a part of the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate hole 322a and a main body 325A. A second extension 325C, which is attached to the right side of the portion 325A and constitutes the remaining region of the lower plate second region A2, is larger than the first extension 325B. As shown in the drawing, the second extension 325C has a constant width in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger storage area for game balls than the first extension 325B. The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C (see FIG. 47C).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C to the main body 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (communicated), and the storage area of the game balls is provided. Expands. The boundary between the main body 325A and the first extension 325B or the second extension 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C of the lower plate main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (between the mounting space 326j) between the effect operation unit 400 and the rear surface of the second effect operation unit 400A. (Space).

  As described above, in the above example, the lower plate main body 325 (the lower plate 322) is configured to be dividable, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable. The storage area can be made larger or smaller as needed. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be dividable, it projects to the rear (in the mounting space 326j) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. An extension portion (first extension portion 325B or second extension portion 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second area A2 behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). It may be arranged on the boundary between the first dish area A1 and the second dish area A2, or may be arranged in the first dish area A1.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball hole 322a in the main body 325A. However, the first additional portion 325B and the second additional portion 325C are not provided. A lower countersunk hole 322a may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are mounted on the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325. You may make it attach a flat-plate-shaped closing member which does not have a storage area.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described. However, the lower plate cover 340 can be divided similarly to the lower plate main body 325, and the first additional portion 325B and the second additional portion The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 323 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit base 323 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111, and extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear portion is open). (Shallow box shape).

  The dish unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in a front view and extends rearward in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 323a. A speaker slit 323b formed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating forward and backward at a lower portion closer to the left from the left and right center in front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; An upper dish ball feed port 323d penetrating back and forth at the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in front view and extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper dish body 324.

  The dish unit base 323 includes a ball feed guide path 323e that guides the game ball sent to the rear side of the dish unit base 323 through the upper dish ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250; After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guide path 323e, it extends in a substantially L-shape so as to become lower toward the right side of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in a cylindrical front view, and extends from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. A ball-pulling guide path 323f for guiding the released game balls to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, a lower end of the ball-feeding guide path 323e and a lower end of the ball-feeding guide path 323e and a lower end of the ball-feeding guide path 323f. And an operation transmitting portion 327a which is in contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball feed unit 250 and is operated by the upper countersunk button 327 projects backward so as to face rearward. And it includes an opening 323 g, a. The downstream end of the ball guide path 323f is open in a cylindrical portion of the lower counter ball supply port 323c.

  Further, the plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view, and has a handle insertion opening 323h through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. And a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 has a front end opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 321 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end has an upper plate passage port for the door frame base 110. 117 penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. Thereby, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

  When the lower tray ball supply port 323c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 322, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the lower tray passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. And is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, game balls flowing in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower dish ball supply port 323c is disposed behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside the lower dish opening 326d) in the dish unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower dish cover 340, and the like. When viewed from the front, the door frame 3 is invisible from the player through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit cover 326 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325. The plate unit cover 326 has a center in the left-right direction that swells forward, and has a large opening forward in the center in the left-right direction. An upper plate front decorative portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and a lower plate front decorative portion 326c formed below each of the left and right upper plate front decorative portions 326b. I have.

  The effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed so that the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the total width of the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the up-down direction is substantially the same as the height of the plate unit 320 in the up-down direction. It is formed at the height. The effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined such that the front end moves rearward as it goes upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The plate front upper decorative portion 326b has its front surface moved rearward from the left-right center to the left-right end of the plate unit cover 326, and the left-right center end and the left-right center end of the plate unit cover 326. An intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape slightly swelling forward with respect to a plane connecting the end portions. Further, the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined such that the lower end moves upward from the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the center of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction ( It is formed so that the vertical direction is narrowed from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side) to both left and right sides. In the plate unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the upper plate decoration portion 326b on the left side when viewed from the front.

  The front lower portion 326c of the dish unit 326c moves rearward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and right ends of the dish unit cover 326, and the left and right ends of the center of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface so as to be depressed rearward with respect to a plane connecting the ends of the first and second portions.

  A lower plate opening 326d penetrating front and rear is formed in the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, the lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate opening 326d. A lower speaker opening 326e made of punched metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side when viewed from the front. The lower speaker opening 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the plate unit base 323 when assembled to the plate unit 320.

  A handle insertion opening 326f, which penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view and through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, is provided in the lower right front dish counterpart 326c in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 326g, which penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion opening 326f near the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323. It covers the upper right side. The top plate portion 326h is provided with a top ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending return display portion 330.

  The plate unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the plate lower decorative portion 326c to the front surface of the plate unit base 323. The bottom of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape such that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed upward from below, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to that portion. In the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole vertically penetrating is formed at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a mounting space 326j that opens forward at the portion of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a and into which the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the plate unit cover 326 extends rearward from the left and upper sides of the lower plate opening 326d in a flat plate shape, and includes a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower plate cover portion 326k is configured such that the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 contacts the left end, and the left end of the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 contacts the right end. I have.

[3-3e. Button for removing the upper plate ball]
The upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper plate 321 when viewed from the front, and by pressing the game ball in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate removing button 327 is not illustrated in detail, but the rear end side is below the top plate 326h by a ball removing button holder attached below the top plate 326h of the plate unit cover 326. Is mounted so as to be rotatable around an axis extending therethrough. The upper ball removing button 327 has an upper end of a vertically extending ball removing lever in contact with the lower surface of the front end thereof. The ball-pull lever is mounted to be vertically slidable by a ball-pull base attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 below the plate-pull button 327.

  The ball-pulling lever, whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the ball-pulling button 327, comes into contact with the upper part of the ball-pulling slider 327b, which is slidable up and down by the plate unit base 323, from above. ing. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b includes an operation transmitting portion 327a projecting rearward from the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmitting portion 327a is moved from the opening 323g in the plate unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feed unit 250. The slider 327b is urged upward by a spring 327c, and the biasing force of the spring 327c causes the slider 327b and the lever to remove the ball. The upper bowl removing button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Accordingly, when the upper counter ball removing button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper counter ball removing spring 327c, the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper counter ball removing slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmitting portion 327a is moved. Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 which is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, so that they are in communication with each other. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and discharged to the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. (Supply).

  Note that, when the upper bowl removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower bowl removing hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with it. As a result, when the upper plate ball removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower plate ball removing hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. The paper is discharged from the hole 322a to the dollar box below. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong illusion to the player that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by focusing the player on the game (such as a game ball hitting operation and effect image). The simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball lending button, return button, and ball lending return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display section 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. As illustrated, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display unit 330 are inside a circular decoration on the right side of the top plate ball removal button 327 on the top plate 326h of the plate unit cover 326 when viewed from the front. Mounted on

  The ball lending button 328 is used to push a cash or prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and press the ball lending machine to play a predetermined number of game balls. It is lent (paid out) to the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed while the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or the prepaid card is returned after deducting the lending game ball.

  Although illustration is omitted, a three-digit seven-segment LED is arranged below the transparent surface of the ball lending display unit 330, and the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or An error code when the ball rental machine breaks down is displayed.

[3-3 g. Direction Selection Left Button and Direction Selection Right Button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached near the right end near the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a in the dish upper decoration portion 326b on the left side of the plate unit cover 326 when viewed from the front. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed leftward. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed rightward to the right of the effect selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided to the player on the game board side effect display device 1600 or the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. When an effect image for prompting selection is displayed, a pressing operation can be accepted, and the desired option is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time. .

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower tray ball removal button 333 of the tray unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view below the lower plate opening 326d in the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322. By pressing the lower bowl removing button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower bowl removing hole 322a of the lower bowl 322 can be rotated. The lower plate hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320.

  The lower plate removing button 333 is slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower plate removing base 335 (see FIG. 42 (b)) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 below the lower plate main body 325. Mounted on The lower bowl removing button 333 is disposed on the left side of the lower bowl removing hole 322a of the lower bowl 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The base plate 335 of the plate unit cover 326 is provided on the base plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 so as to be accommodated in a portion formed below the lower plate 322 in a stepped shape so as to be recessed upward from below. It is attached to the part 326i. An outlet 335a, which has the same size as the lower ball drain hole 322a and penetrates vertically, is formed at a position directly below the lower hole 322a. . Although not shown in detail, the cover member 334 is disposed between the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate ball removing base 335. Thus, when the lid member 334 closing the lower plate hole 322a for the lower plate 322 is opened, the outlet 335a of the lower plate hole 335a is also opened, and the lower hole 322a and the outlet 335a are opened. Are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the cover member 334 is attached to the lower bowl removing base 335 so as to be rotatable about a position to the left of the lower bowl removing button 333 in plan view. The lower ball removing button 333 is connected to a portion between a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower ball removing hole 322 a and a portion rotatably mounted by the lower ball removing base 335. Thereby, when the lower countersunk ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically, and the lower countersunk ball extraction hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the holding device for holding the lower plate ball release button 333 when the lower plate ball release button 333 is pressed and moved backward, and a lower plate ball release button And a lower countersunk ball release spring that urges 333 forward. In a state in which the lower ball pull-out button 333 is projected forward and the lower ball pull-out hole 322 a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower ball pull-out button 333 is pressed and moved rearward, the lid member 334 rotates. As a result, the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the lower tray ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device, so that the lower tray ball removal button 333 remains moved rearward. In this state, even if the button 333 is released, the button 333 does not move forward, and the hole 322a for opening the ball 322 is kept open. The game balls in 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, in a state where the lower countersunk ball removing button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower countersunk ball removing hole 322a is open, when the lower countersunk ball removing button 333 is pressed backward, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, when the button 333 is released, the button 333 is moved forward by the urging force of the spring, and returns to the protruding state, and the cover 334 is turned. Then, the lower countersunk hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thus, game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  Note that, apart from the pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball discharging hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is also movable by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 327. The lower bowl removing hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when the player wants to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, only by operating the upper plate ball removal button 327, the dollar box can be moved through the lower plate 322. And the trouble associated with emptying the ball can be simplified. The simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 51 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction, and allows the player to perform a pressing operation and present a rendering image to the player. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, a central side excluding an outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and the operation button 410 is capable of being pressed by a player, and an effect operation unit of a plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 mounted on the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation buttons 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front surface, and mounted on the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image, Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from behind. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is transparent at the center excluding the outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center swells forward, and a front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is mounted, and a cylindrical button base 413 is mounted on the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a member that does not easily transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. In addition, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a row extending within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction, extending on the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed in a circular arc cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decoration part 411a. And a plurality of (six) second button decorations 411b provided.

  As illustrated, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group of left and right sides is a group of upper and lower sides. It extends longer toward the center than it does.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and is formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorations 411b are formed so as to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front surface is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light at the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b due to the W-shaped or arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly seen.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality of (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from a front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detecting pieces 413d projecting rearward in a strip shape and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a predetermined length along the outer periphery, penetrating the flange portion 413b back and forth outside the main body portion 413a. A base opening 413e extending in the circumferential direction and having a plurality of (six) formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners at the top, bottom, left and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide bosses 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detecting pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

  The six base openings 413e are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and a part of the inner extension 413f are depressed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inside extension 413f has an inside diameter of the front end narrowed inward substantially matching the inside diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed transparent, and a door frame side effect display device 460 arranged on the rear side. Can be visually recognized from the front. The operation button 410 includes an operation button spring 438 having four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430 and being inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Is urged forward. The operation button 410 is further restricted from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 when the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. , The rear end moves backward until the rear end contacts the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. By the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440, the operation button 410 is operated.

  Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side of the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a can make it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation buttons of the base unit 430.

  Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion that can be viewed from the rear is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation buttons of the base unit 430.

  When the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (the main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is higher than the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It becomes a state protruding backward. Thereby, the light emitted forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is It is possible to prevent the base unit 413 from leaking from the outside to the inside, and at the same time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner part of the base unit 430. Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative board 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside of the button base 413 to the outside. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430 It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being illuminated and decorated other than the part targeted for luminous decoration, and to perform luminous decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape conforming to the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side to the rear, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. I have.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates forward and backward, and penetrates forward and backward on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a and has a central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is provided. The center opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the diameter of the operation button 410 on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. Thus, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be brought into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

  The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, respectively, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-back direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. In a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d includes the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420, respectively. And partitions between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward at upper portions on both right and left sides of the outer periphery and are mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c are attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 has a metal covering substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a therebetween. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416, three from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface with no irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The outer shape of the frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. In the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a are provided in the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted on the frame top lens 418 can emit light. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit, as viewed from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. The vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 has an inner peripheral side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer peripheral side larger than the outer diameter of the flange part 413b of the button base 413. Further, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421, and an inner peripheral surface of the substrate base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decoration board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and an inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are white.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  In the state where the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Accordingly, the decoration board unit 420 causes only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. At the same time, the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b allows only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 to emit light.

  In addition, the decoration substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire production operation unit 400.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the rendering operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view showing the base unit of the effect operation unit in a disassembled state as viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the staging operation unit viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the staging operation unit 400 has the operation buttons 410 attached so as to be able to move forward and backward, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415.

  The base unit 430 has four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and extending vertically in the center and penetrating in a substantially rectangular shape, and blind holes opened forward outside the through holes 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a light-transmissive operation button decoration member 432 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431 so as to cover the through hole 431a, and extending short and longitudinally in a tubular manner; The operation button left inner decoration board 433 and the operation button right inner decoration board 434 and the operation button inner decoration board 434 attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431 a in the front of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432, respectively. At the rear, the operation attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431. A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  The base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into four holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. The three pressing detection sensors 440 respectively attached to the 439 and detecting the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. And a relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and has a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through-hole 431a has a size that fits inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed in a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the four corners of the operation button 410 outside the through hole 431a. The holding hole 431b has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss 413c, and the guide boss 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b extends from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. The upper right holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). Is formed at a position rotated by about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b, respectively. .

  The unit base 431 has a light-shielding wall portion 431c which protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from a portion on the upper front surface between a portion where the inner decorative board 435 on the operation button is mounted and a portion where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is mounted. It has. With this light shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 437.

  The decoration member 432 inside the operation button is formed in a curved surface shape such that a substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending short in the front-rear direction and a front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c extending vertically through the front plate portion 432b, a flange portion 432d extending outward from a rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e that protrude rearward from the unit base 431 and are mounted on the unit base 431.

  The outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the in-operation button decoration member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the decoration member 432 for operation buttons, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed as smooth surfaces without irregularities.

  The in-operation button decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is concave in an arc shape, extends in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of first button in-button decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulging in an arc shape, extending in an octagonal shape with the center of the front plate portion 432b as the center, and concentric with the center of the front plate portion 432b as the center. 432g (see FIG. 63). The second in-button decorative portion 432g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432c.

  The operation button interior decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The interior of the operation button decorating member 432 is made invisible behind clearly by the lens effect of the first button decorating portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button decorating portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. By emitting light, the decoration member 432 in the operation button can be made to emit light. By making the decoration member 432 inside the operation button emit light, the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be made light emission decoration.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437, and the LEDs can emit light, so that the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can emit light.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are full color LEDs, respectively. It has been. The front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are white. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 has a rear end in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431 b and a front end protruding rearward from the main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 in a state where the operation button spring 438 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation buttons 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, on the front surface of the unit base 431, three pressing detection sensors 440 are provided, one at the lower left of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other at the lower right of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other at the lower left. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b through sensor holders 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

  The production operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, to the left of the through hole 431a in rear view (right side in front view). The effect operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, decoration board 436 under the operation button, frame top lens decoration board 437, pressure detection sensor 440, and door frame side effect display device 460, and connection with door main body relay board (not shown) of door frame base unit 100 Is for relaying.

  The relay board cover 442 extends leftward in a front view from the lower end of a portion that covers the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441, and includes a leg 442a attached to a lower rear part of the unit base 431. When assembled to the door frame 3, the leg 442 a of the relay board cover 442 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally, and a leg 442 a between the leg 442 a and the bottom plate 326 i that forms the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. To form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Thus, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed down or hit, the frame unit 415 is not moved until the lower surface of the leg 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the attachment portion 416e and the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted downward, and the effect operation unit attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit cover 326. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the 326a and the like, thereby preventing their breakage.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432 c of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430. The display screen can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface and the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 in the shape of a bottomed rectangular tube. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer circumference of the mounting bracket 462 is formed in the same shape as the outer circumference of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is mounted such that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape is in contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  In a state where the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 passes through the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decoration member 432. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the in-operation button decoration member 432, and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 on the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effects of the production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in FIG. 51. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, in which a part of the operation button is cut away and the first button decoration portion of the operation button, a button frame or the like attempts to hide the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part which it is going to hide with the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of an effect operation unit. FIG. 63A is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory diagram of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The rendering operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can display a rendering image to a player according to a game state that is changed by a game ball being driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and operate the player. By operating the button 410, the player can participate in the effect presented to the player and entertain it.

  The effect operation unit 400 has an overall height substantially equal to the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. The effect operation unit 400 is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than １ ／ of the entire width of the door frame 3. The rendering operation unit 400 is disposed below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the state in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Are formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part with respect to the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Installed as Thus, the rendering operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is disposed above the plate unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the user can visually recognize the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation buttons 410 in a good state.

  The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413 c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the base unit 430, respectively, and is urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In a normal state (a state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be moved by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The rear surface of the frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a.

  In the effect operation unit 400, in the normal state, the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 from near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 projects forward from the center opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. I have. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412. , Protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the frame unit It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the center axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted, and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center portion is pressed. Likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in a conventional pachinko machine are mounted so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. Since the center axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above similarly to the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by a white arrow in FIG. A part of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the pressed portion is made a flat surface However, if a part deviating from the center of the operation button is pressed, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a position distant from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. Can be. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can smoothly retreat without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to enjoy the operation to be operated sufficiently.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is panned so that the effect operation unit 400 is suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424 because the vibration is generated by the vibration motor 424 because the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part, since it is mounted on the production operation unit mounting part 326a of the unit cover 326. In addition, the whole of the effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the effect operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively easily perform the pressing operation (the position indicated by the white arrow in FIG. 61), the player who is pressing the operation button 410 can be operated. Strong vibration can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by the downward bending of the attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the rendering portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the plate unit cover 326 are attached. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 is pressed or struck with a strong force, for example, when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it hard to be damaged. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape protruding forward (a part of a substantially spherical surface), the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. As compared with the case, the strength and rigidity are higher, and even if the player is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button are composed of transparent members. The decoration by the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the first button decoration part 432f, the second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side). ). In addition, since light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the rear side is difficult to visually recognize through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated. This makes it hard to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rearward in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 A gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the outer peripheral surface of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is located from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. This makes it possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the in-operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the in-operation button decoration member 432 within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and the button frame 412 form the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative board unit 420, and the like, which are further outside and on the rear side (rear side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the cross-hatched area surrounded by a dashed line is not seen from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the inside decoration member 432 of the operation button are hidden and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation buttons 410 and, consequently, the overall effect operation unit 400.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411 a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the center axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second in-button decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the in-operation button decoration member 432 disposed inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape with the center axis CL as the center. As shown in FIG. 63, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the uneven line of the second button internal decorative portion 432g intersect with each other, as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction (the direction in which the center axis CL extends), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other. With the second button interior decoration section 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction, when the position of the eyes of the player moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a is increased. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g is changed, the player can see the moving decoration and entertain the player.

  In this manner, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since the player can show the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the interest of the player strongly and has a high appeal.

  The effect operation unit 400 includes an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button right inner decoration board 432 inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432. An upper inner decorative board 435 and an operating button lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, the operating button inner decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. In other words, the operation buttons 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation buttons 410 are arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  The effect operation unit 400 is provided behind the second button decoration part 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 of the decoration substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated. Can be. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board. 423 second LEDs 423b are arranged, and by illuminating the second LEDs 422b and 423b, the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission. The second LED 422 b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423 b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416 d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated. .

  In the effect operation unit 400, a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. By making the LED emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. From the lower side of the base unit 431 of the unit base 431 of the unit base 431 where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward to near the lower rear end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the top lens decorative board 437 does not leak to the operation buttons 410 and the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

[3-4 g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Production Operation Unit]
Next, a second effect operation unit 400A as a second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. FIG. 64A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and FIG. 64B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the center axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. FIG. 69A is a cross-sectional view taken along a line II in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 69B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. The second effect operation unit 400A, like the effect operation unit 400, allows the player to perform a pressing operation and can present an effect image to the player. In the following, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as in the effect operation unit 400 are denoted by the same reference numerals and described.

  The second production operation unit 400A has an operation button 410 whose outer shape is circular and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparent, and which can be pressed by the player, and an effect of a plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame unit 415 having a frame shape attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, a decoration substrate unit 420 arranged rearward of the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission. A second base unit 450 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 attached to the front surface, and a second base unit 450 that can be visually recognized from the player through the operation button 410. The second effect table on the door frame side that is attached to and can display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is configured such that the second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the front surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in a front view are arranged. And a relay board cover 516 attached to the right side of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in front view so as to cover the same. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A when viewed from the front.

  The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a press detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, And relaying the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is transparent at the center excluding the outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side swells forward, and an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 are provided. The configuration is substantially the same as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

  A specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 have a pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and a guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex at the center of the button lens 411 at a position in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. The button lens 411 in a truss-like pattern and a truss-like pattern in which a plurality of triangles directed toward one another and a triangle with one vertex directed to the opposite side of the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction in a plurality of rows. , A right-angled triangular pattern composed of a bottom extending toward the center of the button lens 411 from both ends of the bottom, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the bottom. From the hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, the side extending longer than the right triangle pattern from the center of the bottom of the truss pattern triangle to the center of the button lens 411, and the tip of the side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration unit 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although not shown, each triangle forming the first button decoration portion 411a has a polyhedral shape with its respective surfaces facing different directions. Thereby, while the front side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, the back side is formed in a polyhedral shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so that the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. In the part, the thickness of the button lens 411 is complicatedly changed, and light passing through this part is irregularly refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and is held inside the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Are slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached to the guide boss portion 413c so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape conforming to the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, is given the same reference numeral, and a detailed description is omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71, and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. And the second effect operation unit 400A.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, is given the same reference numeral, and a detailed description is omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 mounted so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side is mounted, and is mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is something that can be done.

  The second base unit 450 has a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and projects rearward from the front surface of the unit base 451 into four cylindrical guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. And four button shafts 452 each having a cylindrical shape inserted slidably therefrom, and an operation button spring through which each of the four button shafts 452 is inserted to urge the rear end of the guide boss 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (Not shown), and three pressing detection sensors 454 attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detecting three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, respectively.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b projecting hemispherically rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a vertical direction with respect to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that extends vertically when viewed and extends through the cover 451b in the front-rear direction, four holding holes 451d that are recessed rearward from the front of the main body 451a, and a main body 451a. An upper bearing portion 451e recessed in a semicircle (U-shape) from the front to the rear at the upper portion of the upper portion, and a semicircular shape coaxial with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front to the rear at the lower portion of the main body 451a. A (U-shaped) lower bearing portion 451f and a left and right side of an upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a, and the rotation of the screen unit 470. And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner periphery and an outer periphery formed to have substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A rotatably mounted by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f rotates. I have. The through-hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side to pass from behind.

  The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at four upper, lower, left, and right corners of the front surface of the main body 451a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. These holding holes 451d have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, so that the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. A button shaft 452 is mounted in the four holding holes 451d coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. When the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d is inserted into the cylindrical guide boss 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is attached via the guide boss 413c so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. Can be.

  The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. The upper right holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). Is formed at a position rotated by about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, of the four holding holes 451d, two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d, respectively. .

  Further, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively. When the front ends of these operation button springs abut against the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c, the operation button springs are inserted through the guide boss portion 413c. 410 is biased forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape that is open at the front and extends rearward. In the upper bearing 451e and the lower bearing 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular arc are located coaxially. The upper bearing part 451e and the lower bearing part 451f are provided with the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A inserted from the front, and the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be rotatably supported.

  As for a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451, the front surfaces of the respective front portions pass through the central axes of the semicircular portions of the upper bearing portion 451e whose U-shaped recessed portions are recessed rearward. And are separated from each other in the circumferential direction at a predetermined angle about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g restrict the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by being brought into contact with the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. I have. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to a 90-degree angle range by the pair of rotation restriction parts 451g.

  Although not shown, a magnet is buried in each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and is magnetically attached to the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b, so as to contact the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is hard to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, in the screen unit 470, the first position in which the main screen 471 is directed forward or the second position in which the sub-screen 472 is directed forward in the screen unit 470 by the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the screen unit 470 is prevented from rotating by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like, and the door frame side is controlled. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three pressing detection sensors 454 are mounted on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, three pressing detection sensors 454 are provided, one at the lower left of the upper left holding hole 451d, and the other at the lower right of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side is attached to the second base unit 450, and can display an effect image to a player through a transparent portion of the operation button 410. The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side includes a screen unit 470 attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f, and a second base unit. An upper bearing member 480 mounted on the upper front of the unit 450 and rotatably mounting the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and mounted on the lower front of the second base unit 450 And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably mounts the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  In addition, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side includes a rotation drive unit 490 mounted on the upper portion of the second base unit 450 by rotating the screen unit 470 and a cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 which is arranged and capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and a rear surface of the unit base 451 which is mounted with the projector 500 and covers the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. A box-shaped projector mounting member 505 having an open front and a mounting gear member 475 of a screen unit 470 on the left side of the rotary drive unit 490 in the upper part of the second base unit 450 when viewed from the front. Upper cover 506 and the upper And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 about an axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500, The effect image can be displayed (projected and displayed) so as to be visible to the player.

  The screen unit 470 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape and has a milky white translucent main screen 471, a disk-shaped part having one end in the axial direction of the main screen 471 as a part of the outer periphery, and a central part having an axis. A sub-screen 472 which is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction outward and has a translucent milky white color, and projects in a columnar shape outwardly in the direction perpendicular to the axis from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the operating gear member 475 which is attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and has gear teeth 475 a formed over substantially half of the outer periphery, and penetrates the sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decorative member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75) formed in a relief shape simulating a transparent and predetermined character (skull); A sub-screen decorative board 477 (see FIG. 75 and the like) mounted on the back side of the 472 and having a plurality of LEDs 477 a mounted on a surface facing the sub-screen 472, and a side opposite to the sub-screen 472 of the main screen 471. And a semicircular peripheral decoration member 478 that extends shortly from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 has an axial length approximately 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are bordered by the peripheral decoration portion 472 a and the peripheral decoration member 478 of the sub-screen 472.

  The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74B). . The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and has a peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are provided in a plurality of rows in the circumferential direction, and closes the inside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a. And a curved general screen portion 472b. The entire peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape such that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b bulges in a direction away from the main screen 471 into a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471. A through-hole is formed in the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472, and a sub-screen decorative member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 from the front, respectively, and are rotatably mounted.

  The operating gear member 475 meshes with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotary drive unit 490 and is formed with a gear tooth 475a formed over substantially half a circumference, and protrudes outward from one of circumferential ends of the gear tooth 475a. A stopper 475b, and a detection piece 475c protruding outward in a flat plate shape from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear teeth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 is located in the concave portion 481a of the upper bearing member 480 that is concaved in an arc around the axis of the upper shaft member 473 when assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is regulated by contacting the pair of rotation regulating parts 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the concave portion 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that contacts the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It has become.

  The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position in which the main screen 471 is directed forward and a second position in which the sub-screen 472 is directed forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decorative member 476 is formed in a relief shape simulating a skull by a transparent member, and since the plate thickness is complicatedly changed, transmitted light is complicatedly refracted, and the rear is visually recognized. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the letter “PUSH” is formed in the relief simulating the skull of the sub-screen decorative member 476.

  The sub-screen decorative board 477 is attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472 so as to form a gap between the sub-screen 472 and a plurality of LEDs 477a on the front side (the side facing the sub-screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decorative board 477 has an outer shape smaller than the sub-screen decorative member 476, and has a white surface. By making the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative board 477 can make the “eye” portion of the skull and the character portion of “PUSH” emit light and light by making the LED 477 a emit light.

  The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472, and does not include a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen 472 and the LED 477a. , The LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Further, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can be projected on the sub-screen 472 by the projector 500.

  The peripheral decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and similarly to the peripheral decorative portion 472a, a plurality of square pyramidal irregularities are provided in the circumferential direction of the arc. .

  As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens, such as the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472. The main screen 471 is intended to display an effect image which is projected from the projector 500 over the entire surface of the semi-cylindrical shape and which is attracted to the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the sub-screen 472 has an effect image from the projector 500 formed in a narrow range (narrower than the main screen 471) around the center sub-screen decorative member 476 due to the presence of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 at the back center. (The range), the purpose is to display an effect image that gorgeously colors the periphery of the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the operation of pressing the operation button 410 on the player by the light-emitting decoration of the sub-screen decoration member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to encourage.

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 close the front sides of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, which are opened forward. It is attached to the front of 451a. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are in a state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451, respectively. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

  The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 mounted on the upper part of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing part 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member. And a frame top lens decorative substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of the 481. The bearing member 481 has a concave portion 481a that is concave in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is the deepest. The concave portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the concave portion 481a. The concave portion 481a that is concave in the arc shape allows the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 to satisfactorily rotate between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decorative board 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state where it is assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. Accordingly, the frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light by making the LED of the frame top lens decorative board 482 emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. By attaching the lower bearing member 485 to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the lower shaft member 474 is provided. Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotation drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 that is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 that is mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and has a rotation shaft protruding into the unit case 491. A spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear meshed with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A transmission gear (not shown) is meshed with the first transmission gear and is meshable with the gear teeth 475 a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A second transmission gear 495 in the form of a spur gear.

  The second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475 a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state where the rotation drive unit 490 is assembled to the second effect operation unit 400 </ b> A. The rotation drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending back and forth through the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. Can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector 500 is arranged in a hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector mounting member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cubic projector body 501 attached to the projector attachment member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector body 501 in a columnar shape and irradiates the effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear part of the projector main body 501 is mounted on the projector mounting member 505, and the lens part 502 and the projector main body 501 are disposed in the cover part 451b through the through-hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Mounted as

  The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. This projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal type projector and has an automatic focusing function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front. The projector 500 is mounted inside the projector mounting member 505, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector mounting member 505 can be mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 to cover the cover 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction. . A plurality of slits 505a penetrating back and forth are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

  A second effect operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side of the projector mounting member 505 in a front view.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper side of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensors 507 are for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 while being separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached at positions separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operation gears in the screen unit 470 are provided. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 include a detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 faces forward and a detection piece 475c when the sub-screen 472 faces forward. The detection piece 475c at the time can be detected respectively. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c by the two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The buffer unit 510 is attached to a lower surface of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, and reduces a shock when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, and a plate unit cover in the plate unit 320. 326 is transmitted to the bottom plate 326i.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with an elastically deformable flat plate-shaped buffer member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and is in contact with the lower surface of the buffer member 511. And a buffer base 512 attached to the lower surface of the projector attachment member 505 so as to be relatively accessible.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a in contact with the lower surface of the shock-absorbing member 511, and leg pieces protruding downward from both left and right sides of the main body portion 512a in front view and extending in the front-rear direction. 512b. The leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in a state where the leg piece portion 512b is assembled to the door frame 3.

  The buffer unit 510 is configured such that when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit down, the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 of the buffer unit 510. To move down. The shock is absorbed by the compression of the buffer member 511. When the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 abuts on the upper surface of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. Since the main body 512a has a gap formed between the left and right leg pieces 512b and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member abutting on the upper surface of the main body 512a. When the 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a bends, and the shock can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a bent downward contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the attachment unit 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment unit of the plate unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the 326a and the like, and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4g-7. Operation and effect of the second production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74A is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the center axis | shaft of the operation button extended with the screen facing front. FIG. 75A is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 75B is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74B. FIG. 76 (a) is a view in which the second production operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is going to do, (b) shows the part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd effect operation unit of the state of (a). FIG. FIG. 77 (a) shows the second production operation unit hidden by a first button decoration portion, a button frame, and the like of the operation button in a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from a direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is going to do, (b) shows the part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd effect operation unit of the state of (a). FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button operation in accordance with the game state that changes when a game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying an effect image in the 410 and to allow the player to operate the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second effect operation unit 400A is formed so that the overall height is substantially the same as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than １ ／ of the entire width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is disposed below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit 320, between the lower end of the leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. , A gap is formed. That is, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. As a result, the second effect operation unit 400A changes the center axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) into a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees so as to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the plate unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can reach its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). , And the operation button 410 and the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 slide on the four cylindrical guide bosses 413c of the operation buttons 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400 </ b> A causes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be moved by the urging force of the operation button spring. In contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416.

  In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A is configured such that the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 is forward from the center opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion protruding forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412. , Protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the frame unit It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the center axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the movement of the operation button 410 is stopped, and the movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center portion is pressed. Likely to be. To be more specific, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is mounted so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation button of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is operated. Since the button 410 is attached such that the central axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above similarly to the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part is pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the pressed portion is made a flat surface However, if a part deviating from the center of the operation button is pressed, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player is pressed forward. When the operation button 410 is pressed at a position distant from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can smoothly retreat without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to enjoy the operation to be operated sufficiently.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is configured such that the vibration effect motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended as described above. Since only the upper portion is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, when the vibration 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at a portion farthest from the attached portion. As a result, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the second effect operation unit 400A. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below a position where the player can relatively easily press the operation button (near the upper portion of the operation button 410), a strong vibration is applied to the player pressing the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 are provided. The buffer unit 510 is disposed between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that can be elastically deformed, and forms a gap between the main body portion 512a with which the cushioning member 511 contacts the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the shock is multi-staged by the elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511 or the bending of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. It can be absorbed, and it can be prevented that an unreasonable force acts on the attachment part 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment part 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the second effect operation unit 400A is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or struck with a strong force, for example, when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is presented to the player, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second production operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, the interruption of the game due to the damage can be avoided, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, the button lens 411 is compared with a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are increased, and even if the player is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are formed of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back side thereof. The decoration by unevenness such as 411a and the second button decoration 411b can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, since light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the rear side is difficult to visually recognize through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to the center side, the plurality of first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make the rear of the button lens 411 hardly visible at the outer peripheral portion of the portion inside the button lens 411 by the uneven decoration combining the triangles. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device on the door frame side The gap between the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 is located from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap. Can be made difficult to see. Thereby, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the player who has seen the operation button 410 can In addition to preventing discomfort, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be arranged in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like, which are on the rear side (rear side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, and the like, from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decorative member 478. The outside portion (the cross hatched portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 76) is not seen from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the state of the second position where the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the portion outside the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (the cross-hatched portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 76). ) Is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are hardly seen. It can be hidden, so that the appearance of the operation buttons 410 and thus the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be improved.

  When the main screen 471 is in the first position in which the main screen 471 faces forward, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like of the button lens 411 cause the general screen portion of the sub-screen 472 to move. The 472b and the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are hard to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the sub-screen 472, the fact that the main screen 471 is rotatable, and the like. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, the operation By performing a motion that exceeds the player's expectation within the button 410, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the sub-screen 472 faces the front, the upper button member 473 and the lower axis are provided by the first button decoration section 411a, the second button decoration section 411b, the button frame 412, and the like of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (the sub-screen decoration member 476) is rotatable, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (the screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. It can entertain players.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A includes a button lens 411 that allows the user to visually recognize the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410. Within the range of a predetermined width, a first button decoration portion 411a in the form of a polyhedron in which a plurality of triangular surfaces are combined is provided, and the second effect display on the door frame side disposed inside and behind the operation button 410. The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square pyramids are arranged and a peripheral decorative member 478. As a result, the triangle decoration (first button decoration part 411a) arranged on the front side and the quadrilateral decoration (peripheral decoration part 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) arranged on the rear side overlap so as to intersect. As a result, a complicated geometric pattern can be shown to the player, and the appearance can be improved to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  Further, as described above, the first button decoration 411a mainly composed of a triangle and the peripheral decoration 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478 mainly composed of a square are separated in the front-rear direction, so that the player's eyes can be seen. As the position moves, the degree of overlap changes, so that the overlapping geometrical pattern changes, allowing the player to see the moving decoration and the decoration with a three-dimensional feeling with depth. Can be shown to entertain the player.

  Further, in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side arranged behind the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by the drive of the switching drive motor 492 to turn the main screen 471 forward or the sub screen. 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in a state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are vertically extended while being separated to the left and right. The decoration made up of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row forms a geometric pattern decoration that vertically traverses the decoration made up of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Can be shown to players. On the other hand, in a state where the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration portion 472a is in a state of being extended in an annular shape, and is an ornament composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern decoration that overlaps the decoration made up of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the change in the decoration attracts the player's interest to the operation button 410 or the decoration of the operation button 410. The change can suggest the arrival of a chance or the like to the player, and entertains the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen having different switchable screens (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the display unit includes the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470, it is possible to display an effect image completely different from the effect image display by the liquid crystal display device, and to have a strong impact on the player. Can be entertained. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a disk-shaped sub-screen 472 having a relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 at the center of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided at a rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis in the circumferential direction.

  Then, in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, in a state where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the semi-cylindrical center axis is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangular (rectangular) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is emitted forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75 (a)), and the translucent milky white Through the main screen 471, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the main screen 471 has a smooth semi-cylindrical surface, the effect image has a display screen curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Thus, while the display screen of a general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Can be recognized, and the player can be surprised, and the player can be made to pay attention to the main screen 471, and the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be enjoyed. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the center axis of the disk is substantially coincident with the center axis of the operation button 410, and when viewed from the front, the circular operation button 410 It can be seen that the sub-screen decorative member 476 imitating a skull is located at the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when an effect image is emitted forward from projector 500 disposed rearward, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of sub-screen 472. By the way, since a flat and opaque sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 is applied to the portion of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. Is shielded, and the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emits light, the light can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the sub-screen 472, and the sub-screen provided at the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be illuminated. Further, by causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made less visible. The entire side can be brightly decorated with light.

  The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative board 477 to emit light with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, and displays an effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When illuminated, the effect image is displayed on the portion of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on the portion outside the sub-screen decorative member 476 made of a skull-like decoration, and the effect image is displayed. Is decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the luminous decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and a decorative effect completely different from the luminous decoration of the decorative member in the conventional pachinko machine is provided. The sub-screen 472 can be shown to the player, giving the player a strong impact. Also, in this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with higher brightness) than the brightness of the effected image inside the effected image, so that a partially high-intensity effected image that cannot be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and to display an effect image that makes the player more enjoyable.

  In the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, the screen facing forward is rotated in an appropriate direction while the effect image is radiated forward from the projector 500, and is changed from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472. When the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating, a part of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 that is located within the projection range of the projector 500 when the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating. Then, the effect image is projected and displayed. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub-screen 472, a mysterious visual effect in which the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a and the sub-screen decoration member 476 are rotationally moved on the effect image projected from the projector 500. It can be shown to the player and entertained the player.

  As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. This allows the player to see the moving and three-dimensional decoration, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power can be provided.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as an effect image to the front of the sub-screen decorative board 477 on which the LED 477a is mounted on the front and the front in the rear of the operation button 410 (inside of the button frame 412). A second effect display device 460A on the door frame side having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated by the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side.

  Also, the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 of the decoration substrate unit 420, behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a of the operation button 410 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative board 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated by emitting light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422 b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423 b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416 d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated. .

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415. By causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be satisfactorily emitted and decorated.

  Also, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged inside and behind the operation button 410. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub-screen 472, and the effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is impossible with the conventional pachinko machine, can be presented to the player. , Can give the player a strong impact and entertain.

[3-4h. Overall Configuration of Effect Operation Unit in Third Embodiment]
Next, a third effect operation unit 400B which is a third embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 85 and the like. FIG. 78A is a front view of a third effect operation unit different from the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77 in the embodiment, and FIG. 78B is a right side view of the third effect operation unit. FIG. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the third effect operation unit. FIG. 80A is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 80B is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the center axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 82 is a sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 83 is a sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the third production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the third production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG.

  The third effect operation unit 400B can be attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit 320 instead of the effect operation unit 400 or the second effect operation unit 400A. The third effect operation unit 400B can be pressed by a player similarly to the effect operation unit 400. Hereinafter, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the same components as those in the effect operation unit 400 will be denoted by the same reference numerals and described.

  The third effect operation unit 400B is an operation button 410 which has a circular outer shape and is formed transparently on the center side excluding an outer peripheral edge, and which can be pressed by a player, and an effect of a plate unit cover 326 which surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame unit 415 having a frame shape attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a; a decoration substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission; A third base unit 520 mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front surface; and a third base unit 520 visibly viewed from the player side through the operation button 410. And a decorative rotator unit 530 attached to the That.

[3-4h-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side swells forward, and an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is mounted on the front side, and a cylindrical button base 413 is mounted on the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411.

  The operation buttons 410 of the third transportation operation unit 400B have the same configuration as the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400, are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

[3-4h-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape conforming to the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 has a circular central opening 416a, a plurality of outer peripheral openings 416b arranged in a row along the periphery of the central opening 416a, and a notch cut out by a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. A frame-shaped frame body 416 having a portion 416c and attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320, and is attached to the frame body 416 from the rear side so as to close the outer peripheral opening 416b. A pair of light-transmitting frame side lenses 417 and a light-transmitting frame top lens 418 attached to the frame main body 416 from the front side to close the cutout 416c are provided.

  The frame unit 415 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, is given the same reference numeral, and a detailed description is omitted.

[3-4h-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the third base unit 520 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. In addition, vibration can be applied to the third effect operation unit 400B.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 include a first LED 422 a and a first LED 423 a capable of emitting and decorating only the second button decoration portion 411 b of the operation button 410, and a frame side of the frame unit 415. A second LED 422b and a second LED 423b are provided to allow only the lens 417 to emit light.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and is denoted by the same reference numeral, and detailed description is omitted.

[3-4h-4. Third base unit]
The third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the third base unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the operation button 410 mounted so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the decorative rotator unit 530 is mounted, and is mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415. .

  The third base unit 520 includes a housing wall portion 521a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having a hemispherically concave rear portion at the center portion, and a blind hole opened forward outside the housing wall portion 521a. An annular unit base 521 having two holding holes 521b, a frame top lens decorative board 522 mounted on the upper front surface of the unit base 521, and four unit holes 521b inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521, respectively. An operation button spring 523, three sensor holders 524 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 521, three pressure detection sensors 525 mounted on each of the sensor holders 524, respectively, for detecting a pressing operation of the operation button 410; In the third production operation unit attached to the rear side of the base 521 A substrate 526, and a third staging operation unit relay board cover 527 attached to the rear side of the unit base 521 so as to cover the rear side of the relay board 526, a.

  Further, the third base unit 520 includes a production operation unit first drive motor 528 attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521, and a spur gear-shaped attachment attached to the rotation shaft of the production operation unit first drive motor 528. It includes a first drive gear (not shown) and a first transmission gear 529 in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the first drive gear and is rotatably attached to the unit base 521. The first transmission gear 529 meshes with a rotating gear 531a of the decorative rotating unit 530 described later.

  The unit base 521 has a substantially circular outer shape and is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 521 includes, in addition to the housing wall portion 521a and the holding hole 521b, a light-shielding wall portion 521c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from the lower side of a portion where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is mounted on the upper front surface. A plurality of ventilation openings 521d penetrating the wall portion 521a, a left protruding portion 521e protruding forward from substantially the center on the left outside and the up-down direction of the housing wall portion 521a, and a housing protruding from the left protruding portion 521e. A right protruding portion 521f protruding forward from a right outer side of the wall portion 521a and substantially from the center in the vertical direction, a left shaft portion 521g extending rightward from the left protruding portion 521e in a cylindrical shape, and an extension of the left shaft portion 521g. And a right bearing portion 521h coaxial with the axis (first axis CL1) and penetrating through the right protruding portion 521f.

  The housing wall portion 521a that is recessed in a hemispherical shape rearward of the unit base 521 is formed so that the recessed front side can be housed in a state where substantially half of the rear side of the decorative rotator unit 530 does not contact.

  The four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521 are formed at four upper, lower, left and right corners outside the housing wall 521a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The holding hole 521b has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss 413c, and the guide boss 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 521b of the four holding holes 521b extends from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 521. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. The upper right holding hole 521b of the four holding holes 521b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 521 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410). Is formed at a position rotated by about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, two holding holes 521b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 521b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 521 with respect to the upper two holding holes 521b. .

  The light-shielding wall portion 521c of the unit base 521 can prevent the light from the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 from leaking downward, so that the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 522. It is for doing.

  The left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 has a horizontally extending left end fixed to the left protruding portion 521e, and the right side thereof is rotatably inserted into the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b of the decorative rotating body unit 530. Things. Further, the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521 has the cylindrical rotating body side right shaft portion 531c of the decorative rotating body unit 530 rotatably inserted therein. The left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h are arranged coaxially with the first axis CL1 (see FIG. 83) extending in the horizontal direction. By the left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, the decorative rotator unit 530 can be rotatably mounted around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522, and by emitting the LEDs, the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated. Further, the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 is white, and the mounted LEDs are full-color LEDs.

  The operation button spring 523 is a coil spring, and is inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521 from the front. When assembled to the third effect operation unit 400B, the operation button spring 523 has a rear end in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 521b and a front end protruding rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the guide boss 413c. These operation button springs 523 urge the operation buttons 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 525 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, on the front surface of the unit base 521, three pressing detection sensors 525 are provided, one at the lower left of the upper left holding hole 521b, the other at the lower right of the upper right holding hole 521b, and the other at the lower left. Are attached via the sensor holder 524 to the lower right side of the holding holes 521b. The three pressure detection sensors 525 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 521. These three pressure detection sensors 525 can detect three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

  The third effect operation unit relay board 526 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 521, on the left outside (right side in front view) of the housing wall 521a in rear view. The third effect operation unit relay board 526 includes an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422, an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, a vibration motor 424, a frame top lens decoration substrate 522, a press detection sensor 525, an effect operation unit first drive motor 528. The effect operation unit second drive motor 534 of the decorative rotator unit 530, the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535, the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, and the door main body relay substrate (not shown) of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection.

  The relay board cover 527 extends leftward in a front view from a lower end of a portion that covers the rear side of the third effect operation unit relay board 526, and includes a leg 527a attached to a lower rear part of the unit base 521. When assembled to the door frame 3, the leg 527 a of the relay board cover 527 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally, and a leg 527 a between the leg 527 a and the bottom plate 326 i forming the bottom of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. To form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Accordingly, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit down, the frame unit 415 is not moved until the lower surface of the leg 527a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the attachment part 416e and the effect operation unit attachment part 326a of the plate unit cover 326 downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 527a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the lower portion of the third effect operation unit 400B is restricted, and the effect operation unit of the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 is restricted. By preventing an excessive force from acting on the mounting portion 326a and the like, it is possible to prevent their breakage.

  The production operation unit first drive motor 528 is attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521, and is connected to the left shaft portion 521g of the unit base 521 via a first drive gear (not shown) and a first transmission gear 529. The decorative rotator unit 530 rotatably mounted by the right bearing 521h can be rotated around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction.

[3-4h-5. Decorative rotator unit]
The decorative rotator unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85 and 87. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operating unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operating unit as viewed from the back. The decorative rotator unit 530 is attached to the third base unit 520, and allows the player to show a movable effect through a transparent portion of the operation button 410. As shown, the decorative rotator unit 530 has a substantially spherical outer surface as a whole.

  The decorative rotator unit 530 is rotatably attached to the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, and has one of a disk-shaped rotator base unit 531 and a disk-shaped rotator base unit 531. A first decorative surface portion 532 rotatably mounted outside the surface, and a first decorative surface portion rotatably mounted outside a surface of the rotator base unit 531 opposite to the first decorative surface portion 532. A second operation surface unit 533 having a different decoration from 532 and a rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 (which is mounted in the rotating body base unit 531 and rotates the first operation surface unit 532 and the second operation surface unit 533) ( 83 (see FIG. 83).

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the decorative rotator unit 530 includes a plurality of LEDs attached to one surface of the rotator base unit 531 and capable of irradiating light toward the first decorative surface portion 532. The mounted first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 is mounted on the surface of the rotating body base unit 531 opposite to the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535, and can emit light toward the second decorative surface portion 533. A second decorative surface portion decorative board 536 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The rotator base unit 531 has a disk shape having a predetermined thickness, and has a hollow interior. The rotator base unit 531 is attached to a predetermined position on the outer peripheral surface and penetrates through a spur gear-shaped rotator gear 531a that meshes with the first transmission gear 529 of the third base unit 520, and a center of the rotator gear 531a. The rotating body side left bearing 531b into which the left shaft part 521g is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, and a cylindrical protruding from the outer peripheral surface opposite to the rotating body gear 531a so as to be relatively rotatable in the right bearing 521h. The rotating body side right shaft portion 531c to be inserted, and a stopper 531d protruding outward at the base end side of the rotating body side right shaft portion 531c are provided.

  The rotator gear 531a, the rotator-side left bearing 531b, and the rotator-side right shaft 531c are orthogonal to the second axis CL2 passing through the disc-shaped center of the rotator base unit 531 and pass through the axial center of the outer peripheral surface. It is arranged coaxially with respect to one axis CL1. The stopper 531d is formed so as to contact the front surface of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. The stopper 531d regulates the rotation range of the decorative rotator unit 530 relative to the third base unit 520 about the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction to a predetermined angle range (here, 180 degrees).

  In addition, the rotating body base unit 531 includes a cylindrical bearing portion 531e extending concentrically with the second axis CL2 passing through the center of the disk and a plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f decorating the outer peripheral surface. , Is provided. The shaft member 532d protruding from the first decorative surface portion 532 is inserted into the bearing cylinder portion 531e, and the shaft member 532d can be rotatably mounted by bushes mounted on both ends. The peripheral surface decoration portion 531f penetrates the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531 and can release the heat in the rotator base unit 531 to the outside, and also decorates the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531. Can improve the appearance.

  Although not shown, the peripheral surface on which the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative rotating unit 530 in the rotating body base unit 531 and capable of irradiating light toward the peripheral decorative portion 531f is mounted. A decorative part decorative board may be provided. By appropriately illuminating the LED of the peripheral decorative portion decorative board, the peripheral decorative portion 531f of the rotating body base unit 531 can be illuminated.

  The first decorative surface portion 532 is formed substantially hemispherically as a whole. The first decorative surface portion 532 includes a logo decorative portion 532a made of predetermined characters provided at the center of the bulging surface, and a light-transmitting second radially formed around the logo decorative portion 532a. An opaque first sub-decoration formed so as to fill the outer periphery of the one main decoration portion 532b and the first main decoration portion 532b, and the outer peripheral edge of which forms the circular outer peripheral end of the first decorative surface portion 532. A portion 532c and a shaft member 532d protruding in a columnar shape from the back surface along the center are provided.

  The logo decoration portion 532a and the first main decoration portion 532b are illuminated and decorated by light from the LED mounted on the first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535. The shaft member 532d is rotatably inserted into the bearing cylinder 531e via a bush. The shaft member 532d is formed to have a length extending through the bearing cylinder portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531 and extending to the opposite side in a state where the shaft member 532d is assembled to the decorative rotating body unit 530. The state coincides with the second axis line CL2 orthogonal to CL1.

  The whole of the first decorative surface portion 532 can rotate around the second axis CL2 by attaching the shaft member 532d to the bearing cylinder portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531.

  The second decorative surface portion 533 is disposed between the rotary decorative portion 533a attached to the tip of the shaft member 532d of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the rotary decorative portion 533a and the rotary body base unit 531. And a fixed decorative portion 533b attached to the 531. Since the rotating decorative portion 533a is attached to the shaft member 532d, it can rotate together with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and can rotate around the second axis CL2. On the other hand, since the fixed decorative portion 533b is attached to the rotating body base unit 531, it does not rotate together with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and does not rotate around the second axis.

  The rotary decorative portion 533a is formed in a decorative shape having a plurality of fins (blades) in the circumferential direction, and has a plurality of decorations extending concentrically in the circumferential direction. The rotating decorative portion 533a can generate wind by rotating. In the fixed decorative portion 533b, a decoration having a plurality of radially extending lines is formed. The rotating decorative portion 533a and the fixed decorative portion 533b partially have translucency, and are illuminated and decorated with light from the LED mounted on the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is mounted in the rotating body base unit 531 so that the rotating shaft projects rearward. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 534a is attached to the rotation shaft of the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. The second drive gear 534a meshes with a spur gear-shaped decorative surface gear 534b fixed in the middle of the shaft member 532d. Therefore, the first operation surface unit 532 and the second operation surface unit 533 (rotation operation unit 533a) are connected by the effect operation unit second operation motor 534 via the operation surface unit gear 534a, the operation surface unit gear 534b, and the shaft member 532d. Can be rotated together.

  The first decorative surface decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface decorative substrate 536 have a white front surface, and the mounted LEDs are full-color LEDs.

  In the decorative rotator unit 530 of the present embodiment, a first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction around the second axis CL2. Specifically, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are provided at 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction.

[3-4h-6. Operation and Effect of Third Production Operation Unit]
Next, the operation and effect of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 81, and 88. FIG. 88 (a) is a front view of a third effect operation unit showing the second decoration surface portion of the decoration rotator unit facing forward, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 89 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing rotation of the first decorative surface in the third effect operating unit with the first decorative surface facing forward, and FIG. 89 (b) is the second decorative surface in the third effect operating unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows rotation of a 2nd decoration surface part in the state which turned forward.

  The third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player in accordance with a game state that is changed by a game ball being driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player Is operated by operating the operation button 410 to allow the player to participate in the player participation type effect presented to the player and entertain them.

  As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198 and the like, the third effect operation unit 400B has a total height substantially equal to the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. It is formed at the height. Further, the third effect operation unit 400B is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than 全 of the entire width of the door frame 3. The third effect operation unit 400B is disposed below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, the upper portion of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the state in which the third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the plate unit 320, the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 serving as the bottom surface is between the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. , A gap is formed. That is, the third effect operation unit 400B is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. Accordingly, the third effect operation unit 400B changes the center axis CL (see FIG. 82) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) into a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees so as to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (third effect operation unit 400B). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the third effect operation unit 400B (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can reach its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the center axis CL). , And the operation button 410 and the decorative rotator unit 530 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, the four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the third base unit 520, respectively, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 523. Have been. In a normal state (a state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the third effect operation unit 400B is operated by the urging force of the operation button spring 523 similarly to the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. The front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of 410 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, in the normal state, the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 moves forward from the center opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412. , Protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 82 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the frame unit It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 523. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, the backward movement is restricted, and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center portion is pressed. Likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are mounted so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons of the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment are operated. The button 410 is mounted with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, similarly to the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A, so that the player can operate the operation button from above similarly to the conventional pachinko machine. When the user presses the button 410, a part of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed as shown by a white arrow in FIG.

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the pressed portion is made a flat surface However, if a part deviating from the center of the operation button is pressed, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player is pressed forward. When the operation button 410 is pressed at a position distant from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can smoothly retreat without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to enjoy the operation to be operated sufficiently.

  The third effect operation unit 400B is configured such that the vibration effect motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and the third effect operation unit 400B is suspended as described above. Since only the upper portion is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, when the vibration 424a rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at a portion farthest from the attached portion. As a result, the entire third effect operation unit 400B can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the third effect operation unit 400B. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed directly below the position where the player can easily press the operation button, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player pressing the operation button 410, It can surprise the audience and entertain the production.

  Further, the third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg 527a of the relay board cover 527 forming the lower surface and the plate unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i, when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the lower surface of the leg 527a is brought into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i. The shock can be absorbed by the downward bending of the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 527a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the third effect operation unit 400B is restricted, and the effect operation of the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 is performed. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the unit mounting portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the third effect operation unit 400B and the like. Accordingly, even when the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B is presented to the player with an effect of pressing the operation button 410, the operation button 410 or the Since the three-stage operation unit 400B and the like are not damaged, the interruption of the game due to the damage can be avoided, the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed, and the damage to the game hall side can be suppressed. An increase in burden can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411 even when strongly hit, so that the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

  Further, since the third effect operation unit 400B includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to the center side, the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. The decoration of the unevenness makes it hard to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rearward in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the decorative rotator unit 530 However, the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap makes it difficult to see the gap on the outer periphery of the decoration rotator unit 530 from the front side (player side). . Thus, even if the rotating decorative rotator unit 530 is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the player who sees the operation button 410 feels uncomfortable. Can be prevented, and the decorative rotator unit 530 can be disposed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the operation button 410, the decorative rotator unit 530, and the overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Can be better.

  Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the first decoration surface decoration substrate 535 and the second decoration surface decoration substrate 536 are provided in the decoration rotating body unit 530 arranged in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be illuminated and decorated in the operation button 410 by causing the plurality of LEDs mounted thereon to emit light. Then, the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 are illuminated and decorated, so that the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated. At this time, since the button base 413 of the operation button 410 includes the cylindrical main body 413a surrounding the outer periphery of the decorative rotator unit 530, the light from the decorative rotator unit 530 is transmitted to the outside of the main body 413a. There is no leakage, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminously decorated.

  In addition, the third effect operation unit 400B is located behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decoration substrate in the decoration substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a of the operation button 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated. Can be done. The first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a cylinder of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. 52 and 83, etc. (see FIGS. 52 and 83, etc.), and light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a passes through the inside of the main body 413a (on the side of the decorative rotator unit 530) and the inner tube. There is no leakage to the outside of the part 416d, and only the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 can be luminously decorated.

  Further, the third effect operation unit 400B is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative board 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated by emitting light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422 b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423 b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416 d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated. .

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, the frame top lens decorative board 522 of the third base unit 520 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and is mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 522. By making the plurality of LEDs emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light. From the lower side of the third base unit 520 where the frame top lens decorative board 522 of the unit base 521 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 521c protrudes forward to near the lower rear end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the frame top lens decoration board 522 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  The third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment can visually recognize the decorative rotator unit 530 disposed on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 from the front. In the normal state, the third effect operation unit 400B has a state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotator unit 530 faces forward as shown in FIGS. In this state, the center axis of the shaft member 532d (second axis CL2) of the first decorative surface portion 532 substantially matches the center axis CL of the operation button 410 (see FIG. 82). In a normal state, the rotational position of the first decorative surface portion 532 around the second axis CL2 is rotationally stationary in a state where the logo decorative portion 532a having directionality is oriented in a correct direction.

  In a normal state, the stopper 531d of the rotator base unit 531 in the decorative rotator unit 530 is in contact with the front surface above the right bearing 521h of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. That is, in the normal state, the rotation of the decorative rotator unit 530 in the direction in which the upper portion moves rearward with respect to the first axis CL1 extending horizontally is restricted by the stopper 531d.

  In this normal state, the rotator gear 531a of the decorative rotator unit 530 is driven by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 in the third base unit 520 via the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529. Is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right side, the decorative rotator unit 530 rotates about the first axis CL1 so that the upper part thereof moves forward. Then, when the decorative rotator unit 530 rotates 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the stopper 531d contacts the front surface below the right bearing 521h of the unit base 521, and further rotation is performed. Is regulated, and the rotational drive by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is stopped.

  Although not shown, the third base unit 520 includes a rotation detection sensor that detects the rotation position of the decoration rotator unit 530, and the rotation of the decoration rotator unit 530 is performed based on the detection by the rotation detection sensor. The rotational position is controlled.

  When the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated by 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward as shown in FIG. Therefore, the second decorative surface portion 533 is in a state where it can be visually recognized well through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. In this state, the second axis CL2 of the second decorative surface portion 533 substantially matches the center axis CL of the operation button 410.

  The third effect operation unit 400B extends coaxially with the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 in the decorative rotator unit 530 via the second drive gear 534a and the decorative surface portion gear 534b. When the shaft member 532d is rotated, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 attached to both ends of the shaft member 532d can be simultaneously rotated (see FIG. 89). In other words, the first operation surface unit 532 and the second operation surface unit 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 perpendicular to the first axis CL1 extending horizontally by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. Can be.

  Although not shown, the decorative rotator unit 530 includes a rotation detection sensor that detects the rotation position of the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533, and the rotation detection sensor detects the rotation position. The decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be stopped at an arbitrary rotation position. Therefore, even if the first decorative surface portion 532 is provided with the directional logo decorative portion 532a, the rotation can be stopped at a position corresponding to the direction, so that the decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 is impaired. The decorativeness can be surely exhibited without being performed.

  In addition, the third effect operation unit 400 </ b> B converts the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 provided in the decorative rotator unit 530. Each can be illuminated. The light-emitting decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 rotates around the first axis CL1 in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 extends horizontally. It can be performed even when the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotating around the second axis CL2 orthogonal to the first axis CL1.

  Since the second decorative surface portion 533 includes the rotating decorative portion 533a that rotates and the fixed decorative portion 533b that does not rotate, the second decorative surface portion 533 is mounted on the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 when the rotary decorative portion 533a is rotated. When a plurality of LEDs are turned on, a part of the light radiated forward by hitting the fixed decorative portion 533b may be a light-impermeable portion or a colored portion of the rotating rotary decorative portion 533a. This makes it possible to show the player a flickering light-emitting decoration, which can periodically attract the interest of the player.

[3-4h-7. Movable production in the third production operation unit]
Next, the movable effect in the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the movable effect of rotating the decorative rotator unit in the third effect operation unit. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing a movement of a movable effect of rotating the decorative rotator unit in a state where the first decorative surface portion and the second decorative surface portion are rotated in the third effect operation unit. First, with reference to FIG. 90 and the like, a description will be given of a movable effect of the decorative rotator unit 530 using only the effect operation unit first drive motor 528. In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 90 (a) and the like, the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decorative portion 532a faces forward.

  As an example of a movable effect that rotates only around the first axis CL1 extending horizontally, a first drive gear (shown in the figure) is changed from a normal state (the state of FIG. 90A) by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528. Omitted) The decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the right side through the first transmission gear 529 and the rotator gear 531a without stopping halfway, and the first decoration is performed. The second decorative surface portion 533 arranged on the opposite side of the surface portion 532 faces forward (see FIG. 90 (d)). This allows the player to see a movable effect in which the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates so as to move downward, while the second decorative surface portion 533 moves and appears from above. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an impression that the first decorative surface portion 532 is suddenly switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, which can surprise the player and change the decoration. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, the effect operation unit such that the decorative rotator unit 530 reciprocates in a counterclockwise direction in an angle range of 0 to 60 degrees in a right side view from a normal state. The first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward a plurality of times. Thereby, when the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates so as to face downward, a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 is slightly visible above the first decorative surface portion 532 with the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f therebetween. (See FIG. 90 (b)), the player can be strongly attracted to the second decorative surface portion 533 which is hidden by the reciprocating rotation of the decorative rotator unit 530. Whether or not the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward can increase the player's expectation of the arrival of a chance. Thereafter, by returning the decoration rotating body unit 530 to the original state (the state of FIG. 90A), it is possible to indicate to the player that a chance does not come. On the other hand, by further rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 so that the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward (the state shown in FIG. 90 (d)), it is possible to suggest that a chance has arrived, and It is possible to entertain the people and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees in a counterclockwise direction in a right side view from a normal state, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531 is directed forward. (See FIG. 90 (c)). Thus, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward, and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward with the upper surface facing downward. In this state, since the decorations of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 become unclear, a plurality of peripheral portions provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531 are relatively positioned. The decoration of the surface decoration portion 531f can be clearly seen, and the decoration of the peripheral decoration portion 531f can be enjoyed. In addition, by stopping the rotation of the decorative rotator unit 530 at the intermediate position where the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f is directed forward, it is possible to make the player foresee a change in the game situation, and the game of the player Expectations can be raised. Then, by rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 in a predetermined direction, the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward as a base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. The same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in a state where the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in a right side view from a normal state (see FIG. 90 (c)), a predetermined angle around the rotation angle is obtained. The effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within the range. Accordingly, the first decorative surface portion 532 side and the second decorative surface portion 533 side are more visible across the rotating body base unit 531 (the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f). Whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces the front or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces the front can be excited and excited, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest. After that, the decoration rotator unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decoration surface portion 532 is directed forward or the second decoration surface portion 533 is directed forward. The effect of the invention can be obtained.

  Also, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated by 180 degrees from the normal state, and the second decorative surface portion 533 is turned to the front (see FIG. 90 (d)). Based on the state, it is also possible to perform a movable effect that performs an operation opposite to the above, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. In this case, the second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward rotates so as to move upward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 appears from below, so that the player feels a rising momentum. It is possible to raise the sense of expectation for the game, and, by rotating the second decoration surface portion 533 upward, direct the player's line of sight to the game area 5a above the third effect operation unit 400B. It is possible to entertain a game or an effect in the game area 5a, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  When performing the above-described movable effect, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are appropriately lit to emit light, and the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion The decorative surface portion 533 is appropriately illuminated. This makes it easier to see the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 that can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, so that the player can clearly recognize the difference between those decorations. In addition, it is possible to sufficiently exhibit the premium feeling due to the difference in the decoration, to enjoy the decoration, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Further, since the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 are illuminated and decorated, the interest of the player can be directed to the operation button 410, so that the player participation type effect of pressing the operation button 410 is performed. At times, the player can be urged to press the operation button 410, so that the player can participate in the player-participation-type effect and entertain.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 91 and the like, a description will be given of a movable effect of the decorative rotator unit 530 using the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 and the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. In the initial state, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decorative portion 532a is directed forward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is connected to the effect operation unit second drive motor. By means of 534, the operation button 410 is rotated around the second axis CL2 (here, clockwise) extending so as to coincide with the center axis CL of the operation button 410. In this state, since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates around the second axis CL2, it is difficult for the player to recognize the logo of the logo decorative portion 532a having directivity.

  As an example of a movable effect performed in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, the first decorative surface portion 532 (second decorative surface portion 533) is moved along the second axis. While rotating around the CL2, the effect rotating unit first drive motor 528 rotates the decorative rotator unit 530 in a counterclockwise direction in a right side view at a stretch without stopping halfway, 180 degrees. The second decorative surface portion 533 rotating on the opposite side of the one decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (see FIG. 91 (d)). Thus, the first decorative surface portion 532 that has been rotating clockwise is suddenly switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, and the second decorative surface portion 533 (the rotational decorative portion 533a) is connected to the first decorative surface portion 532. Is rotated counterclockwise in the opposite direction, which can have a strong impact on the player, strongly attract the interest of the player, and It can be made to think that there is a good thing, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative operation unit 530 in a state where the first operation surface unit 532 and the second operation surface unit 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the operation operation unit second drive motor 534. However, the direction operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward a plurality of times so as to reciprocate in the counterclockwise direction within the angle range of 0 to 60 degrees when viewed from the right side. Thus, when the first decorative surface 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to face downward, the first decorative surface 532 rotates around the second axis CL2 above the first decorative surface 532. A plurality of peripheral decoration portions 531f that are not shown are visible, and a part of the second decoration surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 is slightly visible above the multiple peripheral decoration portions 531f. (See FIG. 91 (b)). Accordingly, the decorative rotator unit 530 reciprocates around the first axis CL1 to strongly attract the player's interest to the second decorative surface portion 533 which is invisible and invisible, and the second decorative surface portion Whether or not the player 533 faces forward can increase the player's expectation of the arrival of the chance. Thereafter, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis CL1, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (the state of FIG. 91 (a)), or the second decorative member. When the surface portion 533 is directed forward (the state of FIG. 91 (b)) and the player reaches a desired state, the arrival of a chance can be convinced, the player can be entertained, and a decrease in interest is suppressed. Can be done. After turning the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 forward, the rotation may be stopped so that the logo decorative portion 532a of the first decorative surface portion 532 is oriented correctly. This allows the player to clearly recognize the logo decoration portion 532a of the first decoration surface portion 532, thereby suggesting the arrival of a chance and increasing the player's expectation of the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as a movable effect different from the above, from the state where the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, the decoration rotating body unit 530 Is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in the right side view around the first axis CL1 so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531 faces forward (see FIG. 91 (c)). . Thus, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward, and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward with the upper surface facing downward. The first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 are in an unclear state since they are located and moved so as to move in the same direction. Therefore, the plurality of peripheral decoration portions 531f on the outer peripheral surface of the stationary rotating body base unit 531 sandwiched therebetween can be clearly seen. Therefore, in the operation button 410, the stationary peripheral decoration portion 531f can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the peripheral decoration portion 531f, and the decoration can be enjoyed. Then, by rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 in a predetermined direction, the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward as a base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. The same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, while the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL1 so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531 is moved forward. In this state (see FIG. 91 (c)), the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528 is turned over a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within a predetermined angle range around the first axis CL around this state. To rotate forward and reverse. Thereby, with the rotating body base unit 531 (the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f) interposed therebetween, the first decorative surface portion 532 side or the second decorative surface portion 533 side each rotating around the second axis CL2 can be seen. , The player can be excitedly excited by whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces forward or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward, so that the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Can be done. Thereafter, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis CL1, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (the state of FIG. 91 (a)), or the second decorative member. By setting the surface portion 533 to the front (the state of FIG. 91B), the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, as a movable effect different from the above, after rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 from the normal state, the decorative rotator unit 530 is moved around the first axis CL. By rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 by 180 degrees around the first axis CL from the state in which the rotating second decorative surface portion 533 is turned forward or from the normal state, the second decorative surface portion 533 is rotated by 180 degrees. After the surface portion 533 is directed forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2, and based on this state (see FIG. 91 (d)), Can perform a movable effect that performs the reverse operation, and can provide the same operation and effect as described above. In this case, the rotating second decorative surface 533 facing forward rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to move upward, and is opposite to the second decorative surface 533 with respect to around the second axis CL2. Since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating in the direction appears from below, it is possible to make the player feel a rising momentum, to increase the expectation for the game, and to increase the second axis. The upward movement of the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around CL2 can direct the player's line of sight to the game area 5a above the third effect operation unit 400B, and within the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain a game or an effect, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In performing the above-mentioned movable effect, the rotation of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is reversed in the middle. Alternatively, it may be made to reciprocate within a predetermined angle range. In addition, the rotation speed of the decoration rotating body unit 530 around the first axis CL1 by the rendering operation unit first drive motor 528, and the rotation speed of the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 by the delivery operation unit second drive motor 534. The rotation speed may be the same as or different from the rotation speed around the biaxial line CL2. By appropriately combining these, it is possible to increase the number of patterns of the movable production by the third production operation unit 400B, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of by abundant variations of the movable production and to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, when the above-mentioned movable effect is executed, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 respectively emit light as appropriate, and rotate around the second axis CL2. The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are appropriately illuminated. Accordingly, in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the entire transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be illuminated with uniform light. On the other hand, in a state where the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the transparent decorative lens portion 533a periodically intercepts light, causing the transparent button lens 411 to blink. It can be made to emit light by light. As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be variously illuminated and decorated, the player's interest can be directed to the operation button 410, and a player participation type effect of pressing the operation button 410 can be performed. Is executed, it is possible to prompt the player to perform the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the player can participate in the player-participation type effect and entertain.

[3-4h-8. Exhaust heat action of the third production operation unit]
Next, the heat removal action of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92 and the like. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of air due to the rotation of the second decorative surface in the third effect operation unit. In the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, the decorative rotator unit 530 disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410 includes the operation button 410 and the unit base 521 (the housing wall 521a) of the third base unit 520. , The front and rear are arranged in the closed button interior space AS (see FIG. 92). A plurality of ventilation openings 521d penetrating back and forth are formed in a housing wall portion 521a that forms the rear portion of the button interior space AS and covers the rear side of the decorative rotator unit 530. Therefore, the in-button space AS communicates with the inside of the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the third effect operation unit 400B is mounted through a plurality of ventilation openings 521d. Although not shown, the mounting space 326j communicates with the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through an exhaust port formed in the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower plate cover 340.

  In the third effect operation unit 400B, in the decorative rotator unit 530, one shaft member 532d rotatably mounted coaxially with the second axis CL on the bearing cylinder 531e of the rotator base unit 531. A first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are attached to both ends, respectively, so that the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can rotate together. The effect operation unit second drive motor 534 for rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is mounted in the hollow rotating body base unit 531. On the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531, a plurality of peripheral decoration portions 531 f formed of penetrating hole-shaped decorations are formed. Are in communication with each other.

  In the decorative rotator unit 530, of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 that are rotatably mounted around the second axis CL, the second decorative surface portion 533 rotates around the second axis CL. The decorative portion 533a is formed in a shape capable of generating wind when rotated.

  In the third rendering operation unit 400B having the above-described configuration, the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 are moved in the state where the first decoration surface portion 532 of the decoration rotating body unit 530 faces forward. When the second drive motor 534 rotates in a predetermined direction around the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary decorative portion 533a on the second decorative surface portion 533 generates a plurality of winds of the housing wall portion 521a covering the rear. Through the ventilation opening 521d, the air escapes to the rear side of the housing wall portion 521a (see FIG. 92A). By this wind flow, the air in the button interior space AS in which the decorative rotator unit 530 is housed can be forcibly discharged to the outside and ventilated. Since the in-button space AS and the inside of the rotating body base unit 531 communicate with each other through the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f, heat released from the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is transmitted to the plurality of peripheral units. It can be discharged to the rear of the third effect operation unit 400B (in the mounting space 326j of the plate unit 320) through the surface decoration portion 531f, the in-button space AS, and the ventilation port 521d. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an abnormal rise in the temperature in the decoration rotator unit 530 and the operation button 410, and it is possible to prevent a problem caused by heat.

  In addition, the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 in a state where the second decoration surface portion 533 of the decoration rotating body unit 530 is directed forward, the effect operation unit first. When the second drive motor 534 rotates in a predetermined direction around the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary decorative portion 533a on the second decorative surface portion 533 is guided backward along the inner surface of the operation button 410. Then, it passes through the plurality of ventilation openings 521d of the housing wall 521a covering the rear of the decorative rotator unit 530, and comes out behind the housing wall 521a (see FIG. 92 (b)). The air flow in the button interior space AS in which the decorative rotator unit 530 is housed can be forcibly discharged to the outside and ventilated by the flow of the wind, so that it is mounted in the rotator base unit 531. The heat released from the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 passes through the plurality of peripheral surface decoration portions 531f, the button interior space AS, and the ventilation port 521d, and is behind the third effect operation unit 400B (the mounting space 326j of the plate unit 320). Inside). Thereby, it is possible to suppress an abnormal rise in the temperature in the decoration rotator unit 530 and the operation button 410, and it is possible to prevent a problem caused by heat.

  The heat exhausted into the mounting space 326j through the plurality of ventilation openings 521d of the housing wall 521a of the unit base 521 is transmitted to the pachinko machine 1 through an exhaust port (not shown) formed in the bottom plate 326i and the lower plate cover 340. Is discharged to the outside.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as exploded from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as exploded from the rear. FIG. 96 is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 93 (a). The door frame left side unit 540 covers the front of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (the door frame left side decorative board 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left side of the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 540 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 540 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 541 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a left side in a front view of the through hole 111, and a left unit base 541. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 542 attached to the front surface, and a translucent member disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and an upper left unit mounted on the upper front surface of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a tubular frame shape, and extending vertically. The decorative base 544 is attached to the lower part of the front of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the decorative lens member for the left unit. A left unit lower decorative base 545 projecting forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 544, and covering the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the left unit lower decorative base 545. It includes a transparent left unit decorative cover 546 attached to the front side of the left unit base 541, and a plurality of decorative members 547 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 546.

  The left unit base 541 of the door frame left side unit 540 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 541a penetrating front and back on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 541a include a circular hole and a rectangular hole extending vertically. The left unit base 541 is configured such that the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surfaces of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are connected to the plurality of openings 541a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 541a of the left unit base 541 are formed such that the LEDs 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 541 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 542 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 542A and a lower diffusion lens member 542B. The left unit diffusion lens member 542 includes a circular lens portion 542a in front view corresponding to the circular opening 541a in the left unit base 541, and a square in front view corresponding to the square opening 541a. A lens unit 542b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 540 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161 a and 162 a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 542 a and the square lens portion 542 b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. By the circular lens portion 542a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed at the rear can be radiated forward in a dot shape. With the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 542a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 has a central diffuse reflection portion 542c that is concavely conically rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 542d that is formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 542c at the front surface. The input lens portion 542e bulging rearward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 542c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 542e generally increases outside the input lens portion 542e on the rear surface. And a front reflector 542f inclined to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 542d of the square lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffuse reflection portion 542c. More specifically, the front diffusion lens portion 542d has a cross-sectional shape cut along the radial direction, a groove portion is concavely formed in an arc shape rearward, and a mountain portion between the grooves is formed forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 542d is formed such that grooves and peaks are alternately located in the circumferential direction at radially extending lines dividing in the circumferential direction.

  The front reflecting portion 542f of the rectangular lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are circumferentially divided by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 542e. These grooves are recessed in a V-shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflector 542f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward, and is formed in a saw-like shape. The front reflector 542f is formed such that the groove and the ridge move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflector 542f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffusion lens portion 542d.

  In the state where the square lens portion 542b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 542e.

  In the square lens unit 542b, light emitted from the LEDs 161a and 162a forward is input into the square lens unit 542b from the input lens unit 542e. Since the input lens portion 542e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel, and the input light Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 542c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 542c is perpendicular to the axis extending forward and backward (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 542c. ), And travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 542b. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 542c travels outward from the center (in a direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 542c) over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction.

  When light reflected from the central side to the outside in the square lens portion 542b substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 542f, the light is reflected by the front reflecting portion 542f. Reflects to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 542f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflecting portion 542c increases, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction decreases with increasing distance from the center. (See FIG. 96). Thus, the light reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 542c over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwardly directed by the front reflection portion 542f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflector 542f passes through the front diffusion lens 542d and is emitted forward from the square lens 542b. At this time, since the cross section of the front diffusion lens portion 542d is formed in a wavy shape, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 542f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 542b The light can be emitted substantially uniformly from the front surface of the front side (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member).

  The square lens portion 542b is formed by dividing the plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines in the front diffusion lens portion 542d and the front reflecting portion 542f, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc grooves on the dividing line. Are shifted in the radial direction so that concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted from the front surface of the square lens portion 542b to the front has the density of concentric striped patterns. Light can be prevented from being emitted, and more uniform light and shade can be emitted forward. Thereby, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 542b in the left unit decorative lens member can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  The unillustrated left unit decorative lens member is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular lens portion 542b of the left unit diffusion lens member 542, and is located in front of the square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffusion lens member 542. And a multifaceted decorative part formed at the site. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends short before and after. The multi-face decoration part has a plurality of vertically arranged rectangular pyramid-shaped portions on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-face decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-face decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 546. The left decorative lens member has a multi-sided decorative portion that extends forward from the square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffused lens member 542 by light emitted from the circular decorative portion forward of the circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffused lens member 542. Each of them is illuminated and decorated by the light applied to the light.

  The upper decorative base 544 of the left unit is formed in a rectangular tube shape extending in the front-rear direction and a rectangular shape extending in the front view. The left unit upper decorative base 544 is inclined such that a portion constituting a lower surface in the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The upper decoration base 544 on the left unit is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 545 is formed in a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 545 is inclined from the substantially vertical center at the front end to the rear end such that the upper side moves rearward as going upward. The lower unit lower decorative base 545 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit decoration cover 546 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 540. The left unit decoration cover 546 is bent so that the middle part in the up-down direction is depressed rearward, and the lower part is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 544; A U-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 545 is connected to a lower end of the upper U-shaped part and an upper end of the lower U-shaped part. And a linear portion.

  The left and right ends of the left unit decorative cover 546 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 545, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 546 is formed of a transparent member, and allows the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side to be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 547 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 547 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 100 is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. FIG. 101 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 101 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in FIG. 97 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is mounted on the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a front view right side of the through-hole 111, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The right side decorative board 552 attached to the door frame and the front side of the right side decorative board 552 are attached to the front of the right unit base 551 on the left side from the center in front view, and extend in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. A transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decoration member A transparent flat right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in front view, on the right side of the front view center on the front surface of the right unit base 551, and on the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. A right unit right decorative member 557 in the form of a sheet, and a transparent flat plate right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. I have.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with the front and right sides open. An opaque box-shaped opaque right unit left light blocking member 559 and a light opaque mounted to close the open right side of the right unit left light blocking member 559 on the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. And a right unit right light shielding member 560 having a flat plate shape.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decoration lens member 561, the right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover A plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door frame relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570 are provided. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape having a long front-rear extension, extending shortly in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Have been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side from the center in the left and right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side from the center in the left and right direction on the front surface, and a center mounted on the front surface in the left and right direction. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is for illuminating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. In addition, the right LED 552b is used to decorate the right unit right decoration member 557 with light emission through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for making the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 has white front and rear surfaces. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is a door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes a plate-shaped main body 553a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 553b protruding from the rear side of the main body 553a to the right in a front view in a short plate-like manner. A notch 553c, which is formed in a rectangular shape from the right end side of the rear wall portion 553b to the left from the front view and formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body portion 553a in the front view A housing recess 553d which is shallowly recessed so as to be capable of housing the 554, an input lens portion 553e projecting rearward from the rear end face of the main body 553a, and a plurality of input lens portions 553e provided in the vertical direction. And a plurality of side reflectors 553f arranged in the vertical direction such that the input lens portion 553e is located at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a front end of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and a lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Also, as shown in FIG. 101, the main body 553 a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move rightward in front view from the rear end side toward the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall 553b is in contact with the left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The accommodation recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, it is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be spherically curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending rectangle projects rearward and from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. The input lens portions 553e are located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens portions 553e are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 553a.

  The side reflection part 553f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side surface reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, a surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to a surface of the main body portion 553a, and a surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is a main body portion. 553a extends perpendicular to the plane, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the side reflecting portion 553f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side when cut in a radial direction around the input lens portion 553e. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is configured such that light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is concavely curved forward, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, and each input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. At the center and diffuse radially forward.

  The main body 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves rightward in a front view as it goes forward, so that the door frame Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits a flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflection unit 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. Becomes

  The light that has entered the main body 553a forward from the input lens portion 553e is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-shaped side reflector 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-blocking member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a has a white color. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body 553a. . Accordingly, from the left surface of the main body 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f in the main body 553a and the light radiated to the right from the side reflector 553f and left on the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body 553a is radiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflection portion 553f, after the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left side of the main body 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shading. And more uniform light and shade can be radiated to the left. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodating concave portion 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, a side reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side where the housing recess 553d is formed) of the main body 553a in a front view. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent part is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection part 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent part, and the transparent part of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be seen. Can be decorated by the side reflector 553f.

  The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker's logo of the pachinko machine 1 or a logo that is presented to the player on the game board 5 in accordance with the concept of the effect is transparent. Is applied. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat main body 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall protruding from the rear side of the main body 556a to the left in a front view in a short flat shape. A portion 556b, a notch 556c formed in a rectangular shape from the left end side of the rear wall portion 556b to the right in a front view and formed at predetermined intervals in a vertical direction, and a right side in a front view right side of the main body portion 556a. A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to be able to house the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e that projects rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a plurality of vertically arranged input lens portions 556e and a front view of the main body portion 556a. On the left side, a plurality of side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction such that each input lens unit 556e is located at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. And the outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same as that of the main unit 553a. Also, as shown in FIG. 101, the main body 556a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the left as viewed from the front as going from the rear end side to the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall portion 556b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening penetrating forward and backward. Is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The accommodation recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and its outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right decorative member 557 in the right unit can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped and a rectangular parallelepiped portion extending upward and downward, and to be spherically curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. The input lens portions 556e are located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens portions 556e are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 556a.

  The side reflection part 556f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves which are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 556e is formed on the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the plane of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflection portion 556f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that when cut in the radial direction with the input lens portion 556e as a center, a mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is configured such that the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main unit 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens unit 556e is concavely curved forward, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, and each input lens unit 556e in the main body 556a. At the center and diffuse radially forward.

  The main body 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits a flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left side of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right side of the main body 556a, and is reflected by the inner side of the right side to the side reflection section 556f. Becomes

  The light that has entered the main body 556a forward from the input lens portion 556e is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by striking the saw-shaped side reflector 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a has a white color. As a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right side of the main body 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflector 556f in the main body 556a and the light radiated to the left from the side reflector 556f to the right on the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body 556a is radiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction at the dividing line to form a concentric arc groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted from the right surface of the main body portion 556a outward (to the right) is prevented from becoming light having a concentric striped light and shade. Thus, light with more uniform density can be radiated to the right. Thus, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodating recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed) of the main body 556a in front view. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric grooves of the portion 556f and lines extending radially can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent part is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection part 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent part, and the transparent part of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be seen. Can be decorated with the side reflection part 556f.

  The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo that is presented to the player on the game board 5 in accordance with the concept of the effect is transparent. Is applied. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right decoration member 557 and the right cover 558 of the right unit are formed substantially symmetrically with the left decoration member 554 and the right cover 555 of the right unit. The decorations applied to the right decorative member 554 and the right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape in side view as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides opened. The right unit left light-blocking member 559 includes a flat main body 559a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body 559a to the right in front view in a flat-plate shape, and a rear wall 559b. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a rectangular shape to the left from the right end side in the front view and formed in a plurality at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The wall portion 559b extends rightward from the right surface of the main body portion 559a and extends rearward. A plurality of plate-like reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side goes upward as it goes forward. It is formed so as to be inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main units 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right side from the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 559b is in contact with the left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560.

  The plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c, 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d which are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are vertically separated from each other. The reinforcing portions 559d of each set are formed at positions behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

  The right unit right light blocking member 560 has a shape in side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes the right opening that is opened to the right of the right unit left light blocking member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state where the right unit right light blocking member 560 is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 101, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. Accordingly, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left and right direction, and form a space extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction with a predetermined width in the left and right direction. . Light radiated forward from the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is converted into the right unit decoration. The light is emitted to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of an opaque member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 correspond to the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and Light emission decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

  Further, since the inner space of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d, they are arranged behind the respective divided spaces. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 prevents light from interfering between the spaces, and a portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space is removed. , Can be independently illuminated. In other words, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to vertically divide the area into a plurality of (four) areas and to independently decorate each of them.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends short before and after. The multi-sided decorative portion 561b has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the rectangular solid portion. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-face decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top, the multi-face decoration parts 561b are arranged one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 disposed at the rear.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 projects slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a light-impermeable member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes larger than the door frame left side unit 540 in a plate shape, and projects slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. I have. The door frame right side unit 550 independently includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at a front end. To make a luminous decoration.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility of a game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is connected to the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side. An effect such as a partition can be exerted between them. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to a player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 that the player is playing in a private room, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around. Can be.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island facilities may be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Accordingly, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the right and left sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated and decorated, even if they are not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the The pachinko machine 1 can be notified of the presence of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

  Further, when a problem such as clogging of a ball or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 in the door frame right side unit 550, a right unit left decorative member 554, a right unit right decorative member 557, and a right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By causing the members 561 and the like to emit light in a unique manner, the staff of the game hall can be immediately notified of the occurrence of the malfunction and can be recognized, and the malfunction can be promptly dealt with. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved at an early stage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the player being frustrated.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 105 is a sectional view taken along line RR in FIG. 102. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the central base 571, which is mounted at the center in the left-right direction above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extend right and left, and the center in the left and right direction projects forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 having a box-like shape with open rear, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. A plurality of (three on each side) slits extending each and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and vertically separated A unit body 574 having 574b and attached to the front sides of a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572, and a unit body 574 arranged at the front side of a pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close a pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of perforated metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction and has a translucent top decoration member 576, and is attached to the rear side of the top decoration member 576. A door frame top decoration board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b which are mounted on the front surface of the unit body 574 respectively and are closed, and both right and left ends of the top middle decoration member 576. A plurality of (three left and right) light guide members 578 in the form of a transparent flat plate extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit body 574 over the opening 574a, and the top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 574. Top left decorative lens members 579 and 579 respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578 The top right decorative lens member 580 and the front left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front side, and the opening 574a from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top center left decorative member 581 and a top center right decorative member 582 extending to the vicinity of the center side end portion of each of them.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is mounted inside the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 574, and LEDs are mounted on portions of the plurality (three) of the light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. Door frame top left decorative board 583 and door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574 b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the unit body 574 on the rear side in the left and right direction. A pair of board bases 585 respectively attached to the parts, and a door which is attached to the front surface of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 574 and the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 574 to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 574. And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a square shape in front view extending left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is assembled diagonally to the door frame top unit 570, and each of the front surfaces is obliquely mounted such that the side near the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570 moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 is a full-range cone-type speaker that can output sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 574 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front such that the lower portions near the left and right ends of a quadrangular shape extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed such that the shape of the unit body 574 as viewed from the front is formed by cutting out a rectangle extending left and right with a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower side. The unit body 574 has a rectangular shape extending in the left and right directions and a half of the full width (length in the left and right direction) about the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the square as the base. The shape is formed by combining a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a square that protrudes short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid being a long side. Therefore, the unit main body 574 has a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit main body 574 with the left and right ends of the unit main body 574 on both sides of the front protruding portion at the center in the left and right direction on the front surface. It is located behind (recessed).

  In the unit main body 574, openings 574a penetrating back and forth are formed in portions of the front surface from the left and right ends to positions outside the portions protruding forward, respectively. The unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits extending obliquely to a portion of the front surface that protrudes forward in a trapezoidal shape, extending left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front and rear direction. 574b are formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend right and left from near the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that extends obliquely forward to near the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574, each being vertically separated by three.

  Further, the unit body 574 includes an upper opening 574c which is notched squarely toward the front from the rear end at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end to the lower left and right in the lower surface. , Is provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit main body 574 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 574 is formed of an opaque member.

  The middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top middle decorative member 576 has a pentagonal shape in which the shape in a front view is bent such that the center in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape that combines a right-angled triangle connecting the tip of the set side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The in-top decoration member 576 is inclined such that the pentagonal portion on the front surface moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is entirely formed in a three-dimensional shape, and has translucency.

  The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is inclined behind the top middle decorative member 576 in such a manner that its front surface moves along the front surface of the pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576 and moves rearward downward. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the inside decoration substrate 577 of the door frame, and the top decoration member 576 can be illuminated by emitting light from the LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shape on both left and right outer sides of the front end of the front protruding portion on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The light guide member 578 will be described as a straight portion that extends straight from side to side from the end side toward the center side. 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the center end portion of the straight portion 578a toward the center. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the vertical direction at the circular arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed such that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 574 from the front. I have.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-like unevenness, and a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the circular arc portion 578b and having a plurality of unevennesses. It has.

  In a state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends face the LEDs 583 a and 584 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. While traveling inward toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of the top front decorative lens member 580 in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated.

  Also, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Accordingly, a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the circular arc portion 578b can be illuminated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 is provided by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. By guiding light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in front can be illuminated and decorated in a favorable (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently house the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, irregularities of a quadrangular frustum protruding forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the middle top decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit main body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side from the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a for independently accommodating the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front face of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a quadrangular truncated pyramid protruding forward are arranged in right and left rows.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the middle top decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill a space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top center left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill a space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state where the top middle right decorative member 582 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is mounted inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574 e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583 a is mounted facing right. On the door frame top left decorative board 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of three light guide members 578 mounted on the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 105). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. By the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 574 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be luminous decoration.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end faces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 105). ). The three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584 allows the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 574 to pass through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminous decoration.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574 where a plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 has a substantially square side wall having sides extending vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall having a square shape in front view extending rightward and leftward outward from a rear side of the side wall, and a front end of an upper side of the side wall. An upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper part of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and an outline that connects the lower side of the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side to the upper wall And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and is formed in a triangular prism-shaped box shape having an open space between upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 574 such that an open portion is closed by the unit main body 574. To this board base 585, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached so that the opened portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. Can be The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front face of the board base 585, so that the front face moves to the left and right so as to move forward toward the center in the left and right direction of the unit body 574. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b are formed on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Thus, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is in a state where the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit light at a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open part from the front in a board base 585 attached to the right rear side of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. Can be The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front face of the board base 585, so that the front face moves to the front side toward the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574, so as to move to the left and right. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 are formed. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state where the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light at a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light blocking members 588 is attached to the rear of the front surface of the unit body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit body 574. The pair of light blocking members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a light-impermeable member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 which are arranged in line with the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Partitioning. With this light blocking member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member are provided. It is possible to satisfactorily emit and decorate the decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 independently of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 gouge backward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the top middle decoration member 576 projects greatly forward, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 579 which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Since the speaker cover 575 is provided between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically separated from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, the speaker cover 575 faces forward. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good condition, and high quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decoration. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be satisfactorily illuminated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through-hole 111 penetrating the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 before and after the door frame base 110 is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be made as wide as possible from the player (front) through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponding to the game board 5 having a large game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 is a rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward below the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the lower part than the upper plate 321) (the front surface of the lower plate front decorative portion 326 c) on both left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to go backwards (the plate unit). The front surface of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400 is formed in a concavely curved shape such that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are located rearward than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude significantly forward, so that the effect operation unit 400 is emphasized and emphasized to the player. Thus, the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly noticed.

  The door frame 3 inclines the effect operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the plate unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. When the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the head (face) of the player, and the player drops his / her gaze to activate the staging operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation buttons 410 can be seen almost in front, so that the large and round operation buttons 410 can be intensely visually recognized, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation buttons 410 can be increased. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward and round, when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand is moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the operation button 410 can be “rapidly pressed” relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward and is round, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, as well as left and right. , Or from the front, and the operation using the operation buttons 410 can be more enjoyed by the operation buttons 410 with good operability.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has the effect operation unit 400 attached by the plate unit 320 in a suspended state, and has a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at a lower portion of the effect operation unit 400. When the vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the hand of the player touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the operation button is surprised. The effect using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The lower plate 322 below the lower palate becomes less noticeable, which makes it easier for a player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that the pachinko machine is clearly different, which appeals to the player's interest. The pachinko machine 1 having high power can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326 d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently ensured. Further, since the rear portion of the lower plate 322 is wrapped around the rear side of the staging operation unit 400, when the player puts his / her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his / her left hand on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. In comparison, the fact that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger can be recognized by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and a lower plate for pulling out game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly forward and backward, and is disposed on the right outside the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) when viewed from the front. In other words, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a in the tray unit cover 326 (to the right outside the lower tray opening 326d), and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Side, etc., the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the dish unit 320 (sling machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the door frame 3, the lower plate hole 322a is provided in the lower plate 322 in front of (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c, so that the lower plate hole 322a is opened. Then, the game balls released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the dollar box through the lower plate 322 is also reduced. I can't see it. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to the player that the game balls of the upper plate 321 or the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 830 with the upper plate 321 being full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Because it is possible, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image), thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. it can.

  In the lower frame 322, the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate hole 322a at a position on the front left side of the lower plate supply port 323c, and the lower plate 322 stands on the right side of the lower plate hole 322a. Since the raised wall is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are directly transferred to the lower dish ball 322. It can be guided to the hole 322a or indirectly reflected to the right wall to the hole 322a. Thus, in a state in which the lower dish hole 322a remains open, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are located on the left side of the lower dish hole 322a in the lower dish 322. The lower plate 322 can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first region A1), so that the game balls flowing through the lower plate 322 are not shown to the player. The game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not obstructed by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 of the board unit 900 can be favorably output to the front, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his hand on the lower plate 322 or approaches the lower plate 322, the vibration caused by the heavy bass from the speaker 921 outputted forward from the lower speaker opening 326e can be tactilely felt by the player. It is possible to entertain the people and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 can play in the private room. It is possible to give an illusion that the player is playing, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 can decorate the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and protrude largely forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side. The pachinko machine 1 can notify the presence of the pachinko machine 1 even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 or from a distance such as from the side along the island facilities, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes, in the door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111, a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left and right front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576, The shape of the door frame top unit 570 in the top frame decoration unit 570 is smaller than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the left and right front edges of the top middle decoration member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape such that the left and right front surfaces are located rearward. This allows only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to appear to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be emphasized and emphasized to the player. The interior decoration member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers separated from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punched metal at both left and right ends in a door frame top unit 570 attached above the through hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extend from the left and right sides of the middle top middle decorative member 576 to both left and right sides through the front of the speaker cover 575, and The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated. As a result, the upper part of the front of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 is not conspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, so that the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that the player is in the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player, and to make the player enjoy high quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  Thus, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, on the lower side and the upper side from the through-hole 111, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed. , Each of which protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, so that the player can see the decoration with a sense of unity above and below the imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction, and with sophisticated decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  The door frame 3 has the top decoration member 576 and the rendering operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction and the effect operation unit 400 projecting forward. When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can see a light-emitting line extending vertically in the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the player's line of sight is arranged at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. As shown, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to an island facility of a game hall on the upper and lower sides of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and that can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, respectively, and the reinforcing frame 660 mounted to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in a front view are provided. .

  The body frame 4 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the body frame base 600 and is used to launch a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; And a locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the cage player side, a board unit 900 attached to a lower rear portion of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 106 to 109, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game A game board placement portion 602 which forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a left and right end of the lower end of the game board 5 which protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement portion 602. And a game board regulation unit 603 for regulating backward movement.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 includes a launching device mounting portion 604 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view for mounting the ball firing device 680, and a right side of the launching device mounting portion 604 in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 605 that penetrates back and forth and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a front and rear lower left side from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front, and the door of the board unit 900 A connection opening 606 that allows the frame relay board 911 to face forward, and a circular opening that penetrates back and forth at the lower left side of the game board placement section 602 when viewed from the front to allow the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 to face forward. And a speaker opening 607.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 in a front view, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided for attachment. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed near the upper and lower ends of the rear surface at the left end in front view, and is an upper hinge mounting for mounting the main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A portion 609 and a lower hinge attachment portion 610 are provided.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so that the connection opening 606 can be opened and closed, and a position slightly below and to the left of the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601.

[4-2. Upper hinge member on body frame side and lower hinge member on body frame side]
The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 and the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the body frame base 600.

  The main frame-side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 having a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped rear portion bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The upper hinge member 622 pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge body 621 penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side in front view of the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame to pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. Hinge hole 623 for a door frame for use. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 has a portion of the upper hinge body 621 bent downward, and is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame base 600.

  The main frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear part of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L-shape. A lower hinge hole (not shown) for the outer frame that is pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and a horizontally extending flat plate that is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641. Hinge second body 643 whose rear part is bent upward in an L-shape, and a lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 that penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second body 643. And a door frame hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame, and extending upward from the left end behind the door frame hinge hole 644 in a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643, and the door frame 3 A regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of .

  The lower hinge second main body 643 is configured such that a horizontally extended portion is spaced apart above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 by a predetermined distance, and a portion bent upward is the lower hinge first body 641. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion of the main body 641 bent upward. In the main frame side lower hinge member 640, a portion bent upward of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 is attached to the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape whose right side is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. A pair of left positioning members 661 are mounted vertically separated from each other.

  The reinforcing frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and also enters the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Illegal insertion of a tool can be prevented.

[4-4. Ball launching device]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106, 108, and 109. The ball firing device 680 is a device for driving game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball firing device 680, the hitting strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the flat launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the rear surface of the launching base 681 on the right side when viewed from the front. A launch solenoid 682 made of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a hitting hammer 683 having a base end attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 682, and extending obliquely upward and left from near the tip of the hitting hammer 683. And a launch rail 684 on which a game ball can be rolled.

  In this ball launching device 680, game balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the firing rail 684, and game balls are supplied to the upper right end of the firing rail 684. When the handle 302 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting hammer 683. The game ball hit by the ball hammer 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 684, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  If the hitting ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball or the like, the distance between the firing rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). , Falls into the foul ball receiving port 275 of the foul cover unit 270 below, and is discharged to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the body frame base 600 of the body frame 4 and can lock between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 attached to the right side of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 700 protruding forward from the unit base 701 and locking with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of being locked to the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower portion of the unit base 701 in a cylindrical shape, A protrusion protrudes from the front end in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmitting member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3. And a key cylinder 710 for unlocking either the hook 702 for the frame or the hook 703 for the outer frame.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the back. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 114 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 116A is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116B is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the front and exploded. FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 119A is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 119B is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS in FIG. FIG. 120 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the movable ball removing piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 120 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the movable ball removing piece. It is.

  FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 122 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. is there. Further, FIG. 123 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit when disassembled from the front, and FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 126 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank route unit, and FIG. 126 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of gaming balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment is attached to an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and attached to an upper portion of the payout unit base 801. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending left and right and opened upward and attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left in a front view. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two front and rear rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 128) that is swingably suspended from above.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner. A payout device 830 which is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 951 housed in a payout control board box 950. And The game balls circulate in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the payout devices 830 pay out the game balls one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. Guide path 861 that guides the game balls forward to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end, and guides the game balls released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward to the door frame 3 from the front end. The full-frame taxiway 862 that guides to the full tank receiving port 274, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full-colored taxiway 862 are attached to the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side opened, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side opened, and a front case 822. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and that separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822 from each other. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 mounted thereon, and a pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear movable piece member rotatably mounted by the shaft member 824 and disposed in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826, and a ball-out detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational position of the pair of movable member front 825 and movable member rear 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding entrance 821a that is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guiding exit that opens at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 821b, and a guiding path 821c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821a and the ball guiding outlet 821b and through which game balls can flow. The guiding passage 821c extends from the ball guiding entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end thereof at an obliquely lower angle with respect to the horizontal at a small angle, and at the center of the height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introducing portion 821d. The detection unit 821e includes a detection unit 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f that extends in a meandering shape from the detection unit 821e to the left and right widths of the front case 821. In addition, the front case 821 includes a cutout portion 821g in a right wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding inlet 822a which is open at the upper portion of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet which is open at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left and right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 822b, and a guiding path 822c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a and the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which game balls can flow. The guide passage 822c extends from the ball guide entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end obliquely so as to become lower at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the guide portion 822d. The detection unit 822e includes a detection unit 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 822f that extends in a meandering shape from the detection unit 822e to the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 includes a cutout portion 822g in a right wall of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. When the rear case 822 is assembled to the ball guidance unit 820, the rear case 822 is formed so that the guidance passage 821c and the guidance passage 822c coincide with each other. I have.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a vertically movable flat piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 825a. An extension 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a. The extension 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole that penetrates forward and backward; A detection piece 825f which extends outward from the right end and which can be detected by the ball breaking detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight mounting portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the cutout portion 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a projects into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c (detection unit 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is prevented from further rotating in a direction (left direction when viewed from the front) protruding into the guide passage 821c. In addition, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in a direction (to the right in a front view) in which the lower end of the movable piece 825a approaches the wall of the guide passage 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a is Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f at the front of the movable piece member 825 is in a state of not detecting with respect to the ball cutout detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 does not detect.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a vertically movable plate-like movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 826a. An extension 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight attachment portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward, and A detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end and that can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827 and a detection piece 826f that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connection portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight mounting portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b. As a result, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the cutout portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a projects into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c (detection unit 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is prevented from further rotating in a direction (left direction when viewed from the front) protruding into the guide passage 822c. Also, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in a direction (rightward in front view) so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f at the rear of the movable piece member 826 is not detected with respect to the ball cut detection sensor 827. In other words, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball out detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls being arranged in a row in front and rear by a tank rail 803, and a plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. 822 allows the user to be guided back and forth in two rows to the lower payout device 830 (see FIG. 128). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide paths 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and can flow well. Can be.

  Also, when the game ball flows through the guide paths 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the front 825 and the rear 826 of the movable piece, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable member front 825 and the movable member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f at the front of the movable piece member 825 and at the rear of the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that a game ball is present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls, the game balls in the guide paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game balls flow in the guidance passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d increases, and the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d are movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It rebounds to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable balls 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game ball, the vibrations cause the movable pieces 825a and 826a to be caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Scratched dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight and the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 is configured to detect the game balls flowing through the respective guiding paths 821c and 822c by using separate movable member front 825 and movable member rear 826, respectively. Since the respective detecting pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member rear 826 are detected by one ball out detecting sensor 827, when the game ball in any one of the guide passages 821c and 822c runs out, the movable piece member front. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece 825 or the rear of the movable piece 826 are rotated so as to protrude into the guide paths 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball out detection sensor 827. You. Therefore, since the running out of the game ball can be detected at an early stage, the game ball can be quickly replenished, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, by screwing metal screws as weights into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the front and rear movable members 825 and 826, the weight of the front and rear movable members 825 and 826 and the weight of the weights. By this, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the directions protruding into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower ends protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. No dust or dust adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, and the like do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. Thus, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be prevented from rotating.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment includes the movable pieces 825a and 826a at the front of the movable piece member 825 and the rear of the movable piece member 826 whose lower ends protrude into the guide paths 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow by their own weight. By attaching weights made of metal screws to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface in contact with the game ball, the weight of the movable piece can be determined by the weight of the weight of the weight of the weight before the movable piece member 825 and the movable piece member 826. The lower ends of 825a and 826a can be easily turned (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower ends protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. No dust or dust adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, and the like do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. Thus, the movable pieces 825a and 826a (the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as a weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e formed as through holes and mounted, even if the movable member front 825 and the movable member rear 826 rotate frequently, the weight remains. The front 825 and the rear 826 of the movable member can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the front 825 of the movable member and the rear 826 of the movable member (weight attachment portions 825e, 826e). . Further, simply by screwing the metal screws into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e, the weight can be easily mounted on the front 825 of the movable piece and the rear 826 of the movable piece, thereby simplifying the work of mounting the weight. Thus, the cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guide passages 821c and 822c have introduction portions 821d and 822d that guide game balls toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a, respectively, on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a protrude inside. Since the game balls flow through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game balls contact the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, by vibrating the movable pieces 825a and 826a, dust, dust, and the like that are caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be removed, and can be moved by their own weight or the like. The front 825 of the one-sided member and the rear 826 of the movable one-sided member can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be satisfactorily rotated, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide paths 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to erroneous detection or the like. Further, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide paths 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide paths 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so Can be replenished with game balls, and by reducing the time during which the game is interrupted as short as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, a payout opening 831a that is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass, and a game ball that opens near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. Payout exit 831b, a ball extraction outlet 831c that is open near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a payout passage 831d that connects the payout entrance 831a and the payout exit 831b and through which game balls can flow. And a front box 831 that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball extraction outlet 831c and has a ball extraction passage 831e through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A payout opening 832a, which has a box shape with an open front side, and is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. The dispensing outlet 832b is opened to be able to pass through, the ball removing outlet 832c is opened near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that game balls can pass, and the dispensing inlet 832a communicates with the dispensing outlet 832b so that game balls are distributed. It includes a possible payout passage 832d, and a rear box 832 that has a ball free passage 832e that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 832c, and through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and is attached to the inside of the front box 831 so that the rotating shaft passes through the front box 831. Motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, a drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834, meshing with the drive gear 835, and rotatable by the front box 831 and the front cover 833. , A driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and a driven gear 837 rotatably penetrating therethrough and having a front end attached to the front cover 833 and a rear A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 penetrates the shaft member 838 so as to be rotatable, and is provided with the front box 831 and the rear box 832. A dispensing blade 839 that is disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 839. And

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and has a flat partition plate 841 for separating the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832; And a rear box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, payout passages 831d and 832d, and a ball emptying passage. 831e, 832e are branched from each other, and are rotatably attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 to close the ball-passing passages 831e, 832e. A ball release lever 844 which is slidably mounted on the upper right side of the box 832 so as to be able to slide up and down so that the ball release movable piece 843 can rotate or cannot rotate; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout entrance 831a to the ball ejection outlet 831c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. Bends to extend vertically to the left, near the center of the overall height to extend substantially horizontally to the left, and then vertically downwards again about 1/3 from the left end to the left and right width of the front box 831 The front box 831 is bent in a crank shape so as to be located just above the pay-out port 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the pay-out port 831b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed at a portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 831e is a form in which a portion extending obliquely downward and to the right from the payout entrance 831a in the payout passage 831d is further extended, and the height thereof is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the entire height of the front box 831. It diverges to the height near the center.

  In addition, the front box 831 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d and protruding rearward as it goes downward, and is formed at an upper portion on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely downward and to the right in front view from the payout inlet 832a to the ball-exiting outlet 832c, and at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. Bends to extend vertically to the left, near the center of the overall height, to extend almost horizontally to the left, and then vertically downwards again about 1/3 from the left end to the left and right width of the rear box 832 It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located just above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom of the rear box 832 with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed at a portion of the dispensing passage 832d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 832e is a form in which the portion extending obliquely downward and to the right from the payout entrance 832a in the payout passage 832d is further extended, and the height of the rear box 832 is approximately one third of the total height. It diverges to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d, and is formed at an upper portion of a guide shelf 832f protruding forward as it goes downward, and on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The pay-out passages 831d and 832d and the ball empty passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blades 839 are arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is mounted between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. In other words, the game balls flowing through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls flowing through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are separated from the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought near the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angle of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction from a spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It has a plurality of detecting pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and has a concave / convex shape on the peripheral surface at the rear end and can be connected to the dispensing blade 839. .

  The dispensing blade 839 extends cylindrically forward and backward, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a at regular intervals in a circumferential direction from a front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted. A plurality of (three) front blades 839b and a plurality of (which are perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a projecting from the rear end of the base cylinder portion 839a in the circumferential direction at regular intervals so as to be alternated with the front blades 839b. 3) A rear blade 839c and a connected portion that projects cylindrically forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a and has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 at the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  The front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the dispensing blade 839 are provided three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c is rotated relative to the front blade 839b so as to be staggered. It extends outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the payout blade 839 of this embodiment, three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc depressed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  The three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that their outer diameters D1 around the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a are 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In addition, a diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to a portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is four times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball by the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be promptly accommodated between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c) (the ball accommodating portion 839e).

  In the dispensing blade 839 of this embodiment, in a state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. In addition, the discharge blade 839 is disposed at a position below the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 in the discharge passages 831d and 832d, and is bent at a crank shape. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located immediately below a portion that extends vertically downward from near the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, in the portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is set to 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  Accordingly, when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 contacts the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d. , And is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, can pass through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d, 832d, and from the payout outlets 831b, 832b. Released downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is set to 1 by the ball accommodating portion 839e. Since a depth of / 7 to ４ is accommodated, the time required for accommodating game balls can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated quickly, the game balls can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the related art, and the time required for paying out game balls can be reduced.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape up and down and back and forth, and has a body portion 843a whose lower portion is bent to form a letter shape when viewed from the front, and a tubular shape that extends back and forth at the upper end of the body portion 843a. A shaft cylinder portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer surface of the main body portion 843a which is bent, and a main body portion 843a. And a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 120) formed of a through hole penetrating back and forth at a lower portion bent in a V-shape.

  When the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left in front view, and the upper end cylindrical tube portion 843b dispenses the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d, 832d, it is possible to rotate at a position extending obliquely to the lower right from the front from the payout entrances 831a, 832a, and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view slightly higher than the portion bent downward. Mounted on

  The dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment has a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward in a normal state, and the lower part of the ball-pulling lever 844 contacts the protrusion 843c of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 from the right in front view. In contact. This restricts rotation of the ball-moving movable piece 843 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 120A).

  In this normal state, in the body portion 843a of the ball-moving movable piece 843 which is bent in a V shape, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is obliquely lower left in front view. Extending to The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located near a portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball emptying passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removing movable piece 843 (the main body portion 843a), and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a partial wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. are doing.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball-moving movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Thus, a force for rotating in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is acting, but since the rotation in the counterclockwise direction is restricted by the ball release lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball release lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball release lever 844 separates from the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843, and the ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise in front view. Restrictions on movement are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft tube portion 843b. Note that the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the right side surface of the lower part of the main body 843a contacts the left surfaces of the members forming the right sides of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 120 (b)). As a result, the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball-moving movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball-drawing passages 831e and 832e, and is discharged downward from the ball-drawing outlets 831c and 832c through the opened ball-drawing passages 831e and 832e. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball-moving movable piece 843 is provided with the weight mounting portion 843d, a weight made of a metal screw is screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d and mounted, so that the ball-drawing lever 844 is slid upward. Then, when the regulation of the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is released, the lower end of the ball-moving movable piece 843 projects into the ball-drawing passages 831e and 832e due to the own weight of the ball-moving movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise in front view).

  Further, in a normal state in which the ball pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the game balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a are transferred to the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made with the game ball, the ball-moving movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact. Therefore, dust, dust, and the like that are caught or intruded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball-moving movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate due to biting, dust, or the like.

  In addition, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d formed as a through hole and attached, even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently, the weight can be attached to the ball-moving movable piece 843d. The ball-moving movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without being detached from the (weight attachment portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-moving movable piece 843 only by screwing the metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Can be reduced.

  If the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft rusts, and the ball removing passage 841e and 832e rust. The movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game balls entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the movable ball removing piece 843, the movable ball removing piece 843 causes the ball removing passage 831e. , 832e are closed, and when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 843, and the impact of the contact causes the ball to move. The ball removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball-pull lever 844 is operated to open the ball-pull passages 831e and 832e, the ball-pull movable piece 843 can rotate favorably, so that the game ball can be reliably pulled out. In addition, workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to a position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 whose rear side is open, and is mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and its front side is open. The dispenser includes a box-shaped upper full cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward to allow a game ball to pass therethrough at a position on the left side from the left and right center in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the left and right center on the upper surface in front view. Is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852 and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which game balls flow, a normal discharge port 850d that opens downward at a lower portion of the upper ball storage passage 850c directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a, and an upper ball storage A full tank discharge port 850e opening downward at a lower end of the passage 850c except for the normal discharge port 850d, a normal discharge port 850d, and a full tank discharge port 850e. And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball emptying path 850g that guides game balls entering from the upper ball emptying entrance 850b downward, and an upper part that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball emptying path 850g. And a ball ejection outlet 850h. The upper full tank path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball emptying outlet 850h that are arranged in order from the left side in a front view and open downward. The upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 at the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball emptying inlet 850b is provided. Are located immediately below the ball ejection outlets 831c and 832c of the dispensing device 830. In addition, when the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball emptying outlet 850h are connected to the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860. 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball guide path 865 are respectively opened directly above the rear end openings (see FIG. 128).

  In the upper full ball path unit 850, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, game balls that have entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving opening 850a are opened immediately below the upper payout ball receiving opening 850a. From the normal discharge port 850d.

  When the inside of the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and further, when the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition piece 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the partition piece 850f and become full. The water is discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850 e, and is sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860.

  In this manner, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically transfers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 in accordance with the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 123 to 127. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the upper full tank path unit 850. The lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward, and guides the game ball from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 by the normal guide path 861. And a full tank guide path 862 for guiding the game balls released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guiding the game balls from the front end to the full tank receiver 274 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 And a closing spring 864 that urges the front end opening in a direction to close the opening.

  In addition, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game balls discharged from the upper ball emptying outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 to the front, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. And a lower ball guide path 865 that discharges air to the bottom.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860, the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower ball empty guideway 865 are arranged in order from the left to the right in front view. The normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower ball empty taxiway 865 have their rear ends open upward. The normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right, and extend forward to near the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower. Further, the full taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball empty guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided into upper and lower parts, as shown in the figure.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to the front end of the lower case 867 at a position between the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway 862, and is rotated clockwise in front view by the closing spring 864. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860, a full tank guide path 862 opening to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is arranged at a position lower than the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disc-shaped base 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely to the upper left from the base 863a and that can close the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending in a flat plate shape to the right from the base portion 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extension portion 863d extending in a plate shape diagonally to the lower left from the base portion 863a. And an operating projection 863e that projects forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extension 863d and can abut on the door opening / closing abutting portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 means that the openings do not need to be sealed, and it is sufficient that the game balls cannot pass through. The operating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base 863a when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that the front end face projects forward as approaching the end side in the counterclockwise direction. are doing.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 864 so that the second door plate portion 863c is located at the front end of the lower case 867 from below the front end opening of the full guideway 862. By contacting the boss 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has a front end formed with a through-ball passage 273, a full tank receiving port 274, and a door opening / closing port in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 127). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guide path opening / closing door 863 does not abut on the operation protrusion 863 e, and the guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. As a result, it is rotated clockwise in a front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 126). (A)). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway are not opened. The game ball does not spill from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863, and the door frame 3 is activated. Due to the inclination of the front end face of the projection 863e, a force acts on the guideway opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c, which have closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862, rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 126 (b)). In this state, as shown in the drawing, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal guideway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full guideway 862. .

  In a state where the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4 and the normal guideway 861 and the full tank In front of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, the penetrating sphere passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

  As described above, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made to be different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are rotated by rotating the guideway opening / closing door 863. Since the doors are opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening and closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be reduced in size. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be more effectively utilized.

  The payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 321, and more payout devices 830 from the payout device 830. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 while the normal taxiway 861 is full of game balls, the game balls are normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When it remains above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, Payout of game balls to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 in addition to the upper plate 321 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be supplied to the lower plate 322, the foul cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of. Then, when the movable piece 278 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 by storing the game balls in the storage passage 277, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are filled with the game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

  The stopping of the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is performed by, for example, storing the game balls until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. In this state, the number that can fill the storage path 277 on the upstream side, the full guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper sphere storage path 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850 is set. When the game balls are paid out, the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in the conventional pachinko machine, and in a game state where many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are dispensed by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on big hit games and entertain them.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. A speaker unit 920 having a power supply board 921, a power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and in which a power supply board is housed, and which is mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 accommodating an interface control board therein, and a payout control board 951 mounted on the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. And a dispensing control board box 950. .

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510, and the door main body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 accommodated in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 129 is a front view of the game board with the panel plate of the game panel in an opaque state. 130 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 129 viewed from the front right, FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 129 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 132 is a view of the game board viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 133 is a sectional view taken along line TT in FIG. 129, and FIG. 134 is a sectional view taken along line UU in FIG. 129. Further, FIG. 135 is a front view in which the front unit of the game board is cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of the game panel is in a transparent state. FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is provided with a front component 1000 having a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and defining the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and a rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 to be divided, a substrate holder 1200 attached to a lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, which is driven by driving game balls into the gaming area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front surface of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side and on the rear side.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open to accept game balls hit into the game area 5a, and a plurality of general prize openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first opening 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate 2003 mounted at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of a game ball, and a game ball passing through the gate 2003 The second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery selected by the lottery, and the first special lottered by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first large winning opening 2005 and a second large winning opening 2006 are provided, in which a game ball can be received in accordance with either a lottery result or a second special lottery result.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted just above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002, and a left front view of the starting port unit 2100. Side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has a plurality (three in this case) of general winning openings 2001, and a side slope which is attached above the left end of the side unit 2200 in a front view. 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a first big winning opening, which are mounted on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the playing area 5a when viewed from the front. 2005, an attacker unit 2400 having a second winning opening 2006, a starter unit 2100 and a side unit. In above the bets 2200, and a frame-shaped center won game 2500 is attached to the front view substantially central slightly above closer in the game area 5a, a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600, an effect drive substrate 3031 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a, and an effect drive substrate on the rear surface of the back box 3010. A panel relay board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view of the back panel 3032, a lower left relay board 3033 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3032 in the back view, and a production drive board on the rear side of the back box 3010. And a lower right relay board 3034 attached to the left side of the rear view 3031.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back front decoration unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 on the left side and the bottom side in front view, and a back attached around the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The middle movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300 and the back right movable production unit 3400 attached respectively to the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 It has a rear-side movable effect unit 3500 attached thereto, and a lower-back movable effect unit 3700 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 139 (b) is a perspective view of the game panel as viewed from the rear. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction in front view and extending clockwise in the circumferential direction in front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the area 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and having an upper portion curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and that a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member that is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction and rotatable only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened and the closed position. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1008. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  Although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning projections projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning projections into inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses protruding rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the lower full tank path passes through these notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has been. In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at a position that is the lowest position in the game area 5a. The panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the panel plate 1110 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower left outer periphery and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends vertically. An elongated hole that extends. These fitting holes and long holes are arranged outside the game area 5a, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a stepped engagement step with a concave front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engaging steps are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel board 1110, and are disposed outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes and the long holes. For engagement with the panel holder 1120.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting a positioning protrusion (not shown) projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 from the front side and is recessed from the front side to the rear side (not shown), and has a size substantially equal to the game area 5a inside the holding step. And a through hole 1122 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface substantially equal to the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion is substantially the same as the front surface of the panel holder 1120. Become the same plane. Further, the holding step portion has a front inner peripheral surface formed to have a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of panel panel 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to a change in temperature or a change with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole and the long hole formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step, and is disposed forward from the front of the holding step. A plurality of protruding pins that extend toward the fitting hole and can be inserted into fitting holes and long holes of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins into the fitting holes and the long holes of panel panel 1110, panel holder 1120 and panel plate 1110 can be positioned with respect to each other.

  Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes an engagement claw and an engagement piece that engage with the engagement step at a position corresponding to the engagement step of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw is arranged above the holding step of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step of the panel plate 1110, and projects forward from the front surface of the holding step. It is adapted to elastically engage with the engaging step. The size of the engaging claw does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step of the panel plate 1110. This engaging piece is formed along the front surface of the panel holder upward (center side) along a front surface of the panel holder in a state where a gap large enough to allow the engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engaging piece and the front surface of the holding step portion. It extends for a predetermined amount. The panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 by engaging the engagement step of the panel plate 1110 with these engagement claws and engagement pieces.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The lower side of the rear surface of the out opening 1126 of the panel holder 1120 has the same width as the out opening 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 which is notched upward from a lower end at a lower left corner in a front view. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component 1000. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the notch 1127 penetrates the notches 1011 and 1127 to form the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 face forward.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of front and rear mounting holes at positions corresponding to a plurality of mounting bosses (not shown) of the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss of the front component 1000 into these mounting holes, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 ( The gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 includes a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted into the insertion hole 1129.

  When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened at the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding section 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below, when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged part 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 133) for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the improper act on the main control board 1310 is increased.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310 is connected to the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the second big winning opening sensor 2402, the first receiving entrance sensor 2434, the second receiving entrance sensor 2435, the second starting via the panel relay substrate 3032. Mouth sensor (not shown), first winning opening sensor (not shown), starting port solenoid (not shown), first attacker solenoid (not shown), second attacker solenoid (not shown), vibration A minute solenoid (not shown), a general winning opening sensor 3111, a first starting port sensor 3112, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 196). The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying a game state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result selected by passing a game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold display 1408 made up of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, and a first lottery selected by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying one special lottery result and a first special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls to the first starting port 2002. A device 1404 comprising eight LEDs for displaying a result of a second special lottery selected by accepting a game ball into the second starting port 2004. A special symbol display 1405, a second special reserve number display 1406 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of game balls to the second starting port 2004, a first special lottery result or a second special lottery When the result is a "big hit" or the like, a round indicator 1407 including three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 is mainly provided.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 133) that controls an effect to be presented to a player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 400, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the game board effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 3031, and the like.

[5-7. Game board effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500. The game board effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The game board side effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side face in front view, and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side face in front view. The game board-side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves which are opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally behind the back box 3010 into the 3010c, the right fixing piece 1602 is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. The front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end passes through the opening 1112. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of general prize holes 2001 which can receive game balls hit into the game area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general prize ports 2001 are in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open so as to receive a game ball at a different position, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing through the section 2003, and a lottery performed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006 that allow game balls to be accepted in either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  A plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower portion in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is arranged below the center in the up-down direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003. The first special winning opening 2005 is located on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction and at a height between the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002. The second winning opening 2006 is arranged between the second starting opening 2004 and the first winning opening 2005.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a sub-out port 2007 for discharging a game ball from the inside of the game area 5a between the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted just above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002. Side unit 2200 which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, a side slope 2300 which is mounted above the left end of the side unit 2200 in a front view, and a start-up opening unit Attacker unit 2400 attached to the right side of front view of 2100 and having one general winning opening 2001, gate section 2003, second starting opening 2004, first winning opening 2005, and second winning opening 2006. And a frame-shaped center role 2500 attached at a substantially center in the game area 5a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit, side unit, side slope, and attacker unit in the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. is there. The starting port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. In the starting port unit 2100, at the top, the first starting port 2002 is always open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time.

  The starting port unit 2100 is formed with a first starting port 2002 and has a light-transmitting unit main body 2101 attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit main body 2101. And a startup port decoration board 2102 (see FIG. 135) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The starting port unit 2100 can make the lower side of the first starting port 2002 emit light by lighting the LED of the starting port decoration board 2102.

  The start-up opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, so that the first start-up opening 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first start-up opening 2002 will be described later. It is located immediately below the chance exit 2536 on the stage 2530 of the center role 2500. Therefore, when a game ball is released downward from the chance exit 2536 of the stage 2530, it is accepted at the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The starting port unit 2100 can guide the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the central delivery port 3135 of the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 described later. it can.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001 that are always open upward.

  The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 arranged side by side on the left and right, and is provided so that the three general winning openings 2001 become higher toward the left as viewed from the front.

  By attaching the side unit 2200 to the panel plate 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and are positioned below the first starting opening 2002 and start. It will be in the state arrange | positioned between the mouth unit 2100 and the side slope 2300. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in each general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and delivers it to the delivery port 3151 of the ball guiding unit 3150 in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. be able to.

[5-8c. Side slope]
Next, the side slope 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The side slope 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front in the gaming area 5a from the center in the up-down direction and slightly downward from the front upper left of the side unit 2200 in front view. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf 2301 protruding forward and extending left and right so that the right end side in front view is lower.

  The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the left end of the shelf 2301 is close to the inner rail 1002, and the right end of the shelf 2301 is from the leftmost general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Is also located to the left. In the state where the side slope 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the shelf 2301 is located above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thus, the side slope 2300 can guide the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 to the right (the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a) by the shelf 2301. There is a possibility that a game ball will be accepted in any of the three general winning openings 2001 of the starting opening 2002 and the side unit 2200.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the front of the attacker unit in the front unit, which is cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. The attacker unit 2400 is disposed in the game area 5a, at the lower right corner in front view, to the right of the starting port unit 2100 in front view, and attached to the front of the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning opening 2001 out of the four general winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first winning opening 2005, a second winning opening 2006, and a sub-out opening 2007. It has.

  As illustrated in FIG. 141 and the like, the attacker unit 2400 has a bottom shape in which the outer shape in a front view is inclined such that the right end is located slightly above, a right side rising substantially perpendicularly from the right end of the bottom, and an upper end of the right side. And an oblique side extending obliquely so as to connect the left end of the base. In this attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which game balls flow (pass) up and down is arranged at the upper right corner, and a second starting port 2004 that can be opened forward is arranged immediately below the gate portion 2003. . In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a second big winning opening 2006 which can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and is always left open at the lower left of the second big winning opening 2006. A sub-out port 2007 is provided. Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a first winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward slightly to the left of the sub-out opening 2007 and is always opened upward at the lower left of the first winning opening 2005. General winning opening 2001 is arranged.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a second start-up port sensor (not shown) that detects a game ball received by the second start-up port 2004, A first special winning opening sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball received in the winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting a gaming ball received in the second winning opening 2006 are provided. Have.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port door 2411 that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through the gate unit 2003, and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. A first special winning opening door 2412 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting lot 2002 or the second starting lot A second special winning opening door 2413 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006 in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by accepting a game ball into the starting opening 2004.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a gate passage 2420 extending vertically at the upper right corner in the front view and through which game balls can flow, a left side passage 2421 extending vertically at the left side of the gate passage 2420 and through which game balls can flow, A right side passage 2422 that extends vertically on the right side of the gate passage 2420 and through which a game ball can flow, and a lower left end portion below the right side passage 2422 below the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421, and the right side passage 2422. An attacker passage 2423 that extends to the left from the left side passage 2421 so that game balls can flow therethrough, and extends to the left below the left side of the attacker passage 2423 so that the left end side is lower and guides the game ball. A possible attacker shelf 2424.

  In the gate passage 2420, the gate portion 2003 is arranged near the upper part, and the second starting port 2004 is arranged in the lower part. The left and right walls of the gate passage 2420 penetrate between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 so as to communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422, respectively. The gate passage 2420 extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  In the attacker passage 2423, a second big winning opening 2006 is opened on the bottom wall on the left side of the left side passage 2421. In the attacker passage 2423, a second special winning opening door 2413 for opening and closing the second special winning opening 2006 forms a part of the bottom wall. Further, the attacker passage 2423 has a left end, which is the lowest, opening downward. The second big winning opening 2006 is opened with a width of about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The attacker shelf 2424 has a first special winning opening 2005 opened, and a part of a first special winning opening door 2412 which closes the first special winning opening 2005 so that it can be opened and closed. The first big winning opening 2005 is opened with a width about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. At the right end of the attacker shelf 2424, a sub-out port 2007 is open. Further, one general winning opening 2001 is opened at the lower left of the left end of the attacker shelf 2424.

  The second starting port door 2411 is capable of closing the second starting port 2004 that is open frontward from the front, and is rotatable around an axis whose lower side extends left and right near the lower end of the second starting port 2004. Installed. By rotating (rotating) such that the upper side moves forward, the second starting port door 2411 opens the second starting port 2004, closes the gate passage 2420, and flows down in the gate passage 2420. The game balls that have been guided can be guided to the second starting port 2004 side and accepted by the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 is formed so as to rotate by driving a starting port solenoid (not shown). When the starting port solenoid is OFF (when not energized), the second starting port 2004 is closed, and the starting port is closed. When the solenoid is ON (when energized), the second start port 2004 is opened.

  The first large winning opening door 2412 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so as to extend forward and backward and lower at the left end, and is opened upward by moving forward and backward. The winning opening 2005 can be closed. The first special winning opening door 2412 closes the first special winning opening 2005 by moving forward, forms a part of the attacker shelf 2424, and plays a game ball flowing down on the attacker shelf 2424 to the left. To be discharged downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2424. In addition, the first special winning opening door 2412 opens the first special winning opening 2005 by retreating, and the game ball flowing down onto the attacker shelf 2424 via the attacker passage 2423 or the like is moved to the first special winning opening. 2005 can be accepted. The first special winning opening door 2412 is formed so as to move forward and backward by driving a first attacker solenoid (not shown), and closes the first special winning opening 2005 when the first attacker solenoid is OFF (when not energized). When the first attacker solenoid is ON (when energized), the first winning port 2005 is opened.

  The second large winning opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so as to extend forward and rearward so as to lower the left end, and is opened upward by moving forward and backward. The winning opening 2006 can be closed. The second special winning opening door 2413 moves forward to close the second special winning opening 2006 and forms a part of the bottom wall of the attacker passage 2423, and forms a gate passage 2420, a left side passage 2421, and a right side passage. The game ball that has passed through any of 2422 is guided to the left and discharged downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2423. In addition, the second large winning opening door 2413 opens the second large winning opening 2006 by retreating, and allows the game balls entering the attacker passage 2423 to be accepted by the second large winning opening 2006 with a high probability. it can. The second special winning opening door 2413 is formed so as to move forward and backward by driving a second attacker solenoid (not shown). When the second attacker solenoid is ON (when energized), the second winning port 2006 is opened.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes an internal passage 2430 through which the game balls received in the second big winning opening 2006 can flow, a first reception port 2431 and a second reception port 2432 that are open at the bottom of the internal passage 2430. A sorting piece 2433 for distributing a game ball to either the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 in the internal passage 2430, and a first receiving sensor 2434 for detecting a gaming ball received in the first receiving port 2431. And a second reception sensor 2435 for detecting a game ball received in the second reception 2432.

  The internal passage 2430 is formed on the downstream side of the second special winning opening sensor 2402. The first reception port 2431 is disposed directly below a portion of the second winning coin sensor 2402 through which a game ball passes, and the second reception port 2432 is disposed on the right side of the first reception port 2431 in a front view. . The distributing piece 2433 is arranged between the first receiving port 2431 and the second receiving port 2432 in the internal passage 2430, and is attached rotatably around an axis whose lower side extends in the front-back direction. The sorting piece 2433 rises vertically and connects the second special winning opening 2006 and the first receiving opening 2431 to each other, and the upper side moves to the left in front view and the left side wall of the internal passage 2430 is formed. It is attached so as to rotate between a state where the second large winning opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 are communicated with each other (or approach). The distributing piece 2433 is formed so as to rotate by driving a distributing solenoid (not shown). When the distributing solenoid is OFF (when not energized), the game ball is distributed to the first receiving port 2431, and the distributing piece is distributed. When the solenoid is ON (when energized), game balls are distributed to the second receiving port 2432.

  In this attacker unit 2400, in a state where the gate passage 2420 is mounted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the gate passage 2420 is located immediately below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center role 2500 described later. 2003 is located above the stage 2530 of the center role 2500. The first winning opening 2005 and the general winning opening 2001 are located below the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  Next, the flow of the game ball in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. When assembled on the game board 5, the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2530 of the center role 2500, so that the gate portion 2003 is released even if a game ball is released from the stage 2530. It does not pass. Therefore, only the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center role 2500 may pass through the gate portion 2003. The upper end opening of the gate passage 2420 in which the gate portion 2003 is disposed opens upward immediately below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center role 2500, so that the right side of the center role 2500 is opened. The game ball having flowed down the gate passage 2420 enters the gate passage 2420 with a high probability, and passes through the gate portion 2003.

  Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2420 to the attacker passage 2423 through the front of the second starting port door 2411 closing the second starting port 2004 immediately below. At this time, if the second starting port door 2411 is turned forward and is in the open position, the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 abuts on the back surface of the second starting port door 2411 and The user is guided to the starting port 2004 and is received by the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 responds to a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through the gate unit 2003 (a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the normal lottery result is “normal hit”). At that time, by appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second starting port door 2411, and the like, the game ball itself that has drawn the “normal hit” itself is accepted into the second starting port 2004. be able to.

  The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor.

  In the gate passage 2420, since the left and right sides of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422, the game passing through the gate portion 2003 In rare cases, a ball may enter the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 through a portion that is in communication. That is, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 does not always pass in front of the second starting port door 2411.

  When the game ball flowing down the right side of the center role 2500 does not enter the gate passage 2420, it enters either the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 arranged on the left and right sides of the gate passage 2420, It is discharged to the attacker passage 2423 through the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422.

  The game ball discharged from any one of the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421, and the right side passage 2422 to the attacker passage 2423 is guided to the left along the slope of the attacker passage 2423, and is downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2423. Released to At this time, when the second special winning opening door 2413 closing the second special winning opening 2006 retreats and the second special winning opening 2006 is opened, the game balls released into the attacker passage 2423 are It is accepted with a high probability in the second grand prize opening 2006. The game ball received in the second special winning opening 2006 is sent to the internal passage 2430 after being detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2402, and is distributed by the sorting piece 2433 to the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432. Is assigned to any of

  The game ball received in the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 is detected by the first receiving port sensor 2434 or the second receiving port sensor 2435, and is located below (substrate holder) behind the gaming panel 1100. 1200).

  Since the width of the left and right of the second special winning opening 2006 is about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball, the second special winning opening door 2413 retreats and the second special winning opening 2006 is formed. Even when the game ball is open, the game ball may jump over the second special winning opening 2006 depending on the speed and behavior of the game ball flowing through the attacker passage 2423 and may not be accepted in the second special winning opening 2006. .

  The game ball released from the attacker passage 2423 flows down onto the attacker shelf 2424, is guided to the attacker shelf 2424, and is discharged downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2424. At this time, when the first special winning opening door 2412 retreats and the first special winning opening 2005 is opened, the game ball released from the attacker passage 2423 is received in the first special winning opening 2005. . Therefore, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center role item 2500 while the first special winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball is highly likely to be inserted into the first special winning opening 2005. Can be accepted.

  The game ball received in the first special winning opening 2005 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the gaming panel 1100 after being detected by a first special winning opening sensor (not shown).

  There is a possibility that the game ball discharged downward from the attacker shelf 2424 may be received in one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 and then transferred to the right delivery port 3136 of the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game balls not received in the general winning opening 2001 pass through the out opening 1126 at the lower end of the game area 5a and are discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 (a) is a perspective view of the front center unit in the front unit, and FIG. 142 (b) is a perspective view of the front center unit from the back. The center role item 2500 is disposed above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a, substantially in the center in front view and slightly upward, and is mounted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Have been. The center role item 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes, from the front, an effect unit provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. be able to.

  In the frame-shaped center role 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It is inaccessible.

  The center role item 2500 is provided on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, with a warp entrance 2520 that is open to allow a game ball in the game area 5a to enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520, which can be released. It has an open warp exit 2522, and a stage 2530 that can release the game ball released from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharge it into the game area 5a (see FIG. 135 and the like). .

  The stage 2530 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. The stage 2530 can discharge a game ball into the game area 5a from the lowest part on both sides of the center formed in a wavy shape.

  The center role 2500 has a chance entrance 2535 in which a game ball can enter, and a game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2535. A chance exit 2536 for discharging the game area 5a below the stage 2530. The chance exit 2536 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 in a state where the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. As a result, when a game ball is released from the chance exit 2536, it is accepted to the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  In addition, the center role 2500 includes a right guide passage 2540 that guides the game ball flowing down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side in a front view slightly to the left and then discharges the ball downward. The right guide passage 2540 is formed such that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 is located directly above the gate passage 2420 (gate portion 2003) of the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. Have been.

  The center role item 2500 is formed such that, when assembled to the game board 5, the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball from the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000. Therefore, when the game ball circulates on the right side of the center role 2500, the game ball circulates along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center role 2500. Enter and be guided. Thereby, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to flow on the right side of the center role item 2500 (so-called right-handed), the game ball can pass through the gate unit 2003 with extremely high probability. it can.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the back unit of the gaming board viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the rear. is there. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100. In addition, a game board effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600, an effect drive substrate 3031 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a, and an effect drive substrate on the rear surface of the back box 3010. A panel relay board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view of the back panel 3032, a lower left relay board 3033 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3032 in the back view, and a production drive board on the rear side of the back box 3010. And a lower right relay board 3034 attached to the left side of the rear view 3031.

  The effect drive board 3031 is based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, and is based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, the back front decorative unit 3200, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit. 3500 and the lower back movable effect unit 3700 are controlled. The panel relay board 3032 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second winning port sensor 2402, a first receiving port sensor 2434, a second receiving port sensor 2435, and a second starting port sensor (not shown). ), First winning port sensor (not shown), starting port solenoid (not shown), first attacker solenoid (not shown), second attacker solenoid (not shown), distribution solenoid (shown) Are omitted), the connection with the general winning opening sensor 3111, the first starting opening sensor 3112, and the magnetic sensor (not shown) is relayed.

  The lower left relay board 3033 relays the connection between the effect drive board 3031 and the rear left movable effect unit 3300. The lower right relay board 3034 connects the effect drive board 3031 to the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit 3500, and the lower back movable effect unit 3700. Is relayed.

  The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of each of the effect drive board 3031, the panel relay board 3032, the lower left relay board 3033, and the lower right relay board 3034. A board cover 3035, a panel relay board cover 3036, a lower left relay board cover 3037, and a lower right relay board cover 3038 are provided.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back front decoration unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 on the left side and the lower side in front view, and a back unit attached so as to surround the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The middle movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300 and the back right movable production unit 3400 attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 It comprises a rear-side movable effect unit 3500 attached thereto, and a lower-back movable effect unit 3700 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is recessed from the inside of the frame to the outside on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b when viewed from the rear, and is inserted. And a notch portion 3010d which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view, and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is mounted.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the rear surface of the cutout portion 3010d so as to be slidable up and down.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses and mounting holes for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back decoration unit]
Next, the back decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 147. FIG. 147 (a) is a front view of the back decoration unit in the back unit, and FIG. 147 (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view cut along line VV in FIG. The back front decoration unit 3100 is attached so as to extend from the left side to the lower side of the front end of the back box 3010 in front view.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 is formed in an L-shape (crescent shape) along the left side and the lower side of the front end of the back box 3010, and a transparent unit base 3110 attached to the front end of the back box 3010; A general winning opening sensor 3111 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, a first starting opening sensor 3112 for detecting a gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002 of the front unit 2000, A magnetic sensor (not shown) capable of detecting illegal magnetism applied from the outside in the game area 5a.

  Further, the front decoration unit 3100 extends vertically along the left side of the back box 3010 and is attached to the front of the unit base 3110. A lower back decoration unit 3130 extending right and left along the side of the box 3010 and attached to the front of the unit base 3110, and a lower unit on the front left side of the lower back decoration unit 3130 when viewed from the front. A ball guiding unit 3150 attached to the front of the 3110.

  As shown in the figure, the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front decorative unit 3100 has a translucent flat back front left decorative ornament 3121 having a decoration of “Do-do-do” and a back front left decorative. A transparent flat front left back light guiding lens 3122 mounted on the rear side of the decorative body 3121 and a plurality of LEDs 3123a capable of irradiating light toward the left side surface of the front left left light guiding lens 3122 are mounted. And a back front left decorative substrate 3123 (see FIG. 147 (b)).

  The back front left light guide lens 3122 has a plurality of conical reflecting portions 3122 a on the rear surface behind the “<” shape decoration in the back front left decorative decoration 3121. Light that has entered the inside from the left side of the back front left light guide lens 3122 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflectors 3122a, and the back front left decorative ornament placed in front of the back front left light guide lens 3122. The 3121 can be decorated with light emission in a planar manner.

  The lower back front decoration unit 3130 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is disposed so as to correspond to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and has a lower front lower center lens 3131 having a predetermined three-dimensional decoration formed on the front surface. , A lower front lower left lens 3132 and a lower front lower right lens 3133, which are disposed on the left and right sides of the lower front lower center lens 3131 and have a predetermined three-dimensional decoration on the front, respectively, and a lower front lower center lens 3131. , A back front lower left lens 3132 and a back front lower right lens 3133, and a back front lower decorative board 3134 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs on the back front lower decorative substrate, the lower front lower center lens 3131, the lower front lower left lens 3132, and the lower front lower right lens 3133 can be illuminated and decorated in an independent state.

  Further, the back front lower decoration unit 3130 is opened forward at the upper center of the back front lower central lens 3131, and a game ball received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and guided backward is provided. A central delivery port 3135 that can be entered, and a game ball that is opened forward at the right outside of the lower part of the lower front lower central lens 3131 and that is received by the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 and guided backward is entered. And a possible left delivery port 3137. The game ball that has entered the central delivery port 3135 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the first starting port sensor 3112. Further, the game ball that has entered the right delivery port 3136 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3111.

  The ball guiding unit 3150 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is attached to the unit base 3110 so as to be disposed below the back front lower left lens 3132 of the back front lower decoration unit 3130. The ball guiding unit 3150 is formed in a box shape as a whole, and is opened forward at a position corresponding to the three general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200, and three delivery ports 3151 through which game balls can enter. And a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game balls entering the inside from the delivery port 3151 downward (on the substrate holder 1200). The game ball that has entered the inside from the delivery port 3151 is discharged downward from the discharge port after being detected by the general winning port sensor 3111.

[5-9c. Uranaka movable production unit]
Next, the back inside movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. The rear middle movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear wall in the back box 3010 so as to surround the opening 3010a. The back middle movable effecting unit 3200 is arranged on the left side in front view, extends vertically higher than the height of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and has a back middle left decorative body 3210 having a predetermined decoration; , A back middle right decorative body 3220 extending vertically higher than the height of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 and having a predetermined decoration, and an opening 3010a in the rear wall of the back box 3010. A back middle drive unit 3250 attached to the upper and lower outer sides to move the middle back decoration 3210 and the middle right decoration 3220 in the left-right direction.

  The back middle left decorative body 3210 is a flat back middle left decorative lens 3211 having a relief-shaped decoration formed on the front and a translucent flat left middle decorative lens 3211, and is disposed on the rear side of the back middle left decorative lens 3211. A back center left decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a flat back center mounted on the rear side of the back center left decorative lens 3211 so as to cover the rear surface of the back center left decorative board. And a left decorative body base 3212. Although not shown, the back center left decorative body base 3212 is provided at the lower end thereof with a rack gear extending left and right and having gear teeth formed upward. The back center left decorative body 3210 can make the back center left decorative lens 3211 emit light by making the LED of the back center left decorative substrate emit light.

  The back middle right decorative body 3220 is disposed on the rear side of the back middle right decorative lens 3221 having a translucent plate-shaped back middle right decorative lens 3221 having a relief-shaped decoration formed on the front side, and is provided on the front side. A back middle right decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a flat back middle attached to the rear side of the back middle right decorative lens 3221 so as to cover the rear surface of the back middle right decorative board. A right decorative body base 3222. Although not shown, the back middle right decorative body base 3222 includes a rack gear at the lower end extending left and right and having gear teeth formed downward. The back middle right decorative body 3220 can cause the back middle right decorative lens 3221 to emit light by making the LED on the back middle right decorative substrate emit light.

  The back middle left decorative lens 3211 and the back middle right decorative lens 3221 of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are formed to be bilaterally symmetrical. 5 is formed in a shape like a hollow on the side near the center in the left-right direction.

  The back middle drive unit 3250 is mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and supports the upper ends of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A flat unit base 3252 that supports the lower ends of the middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and an opening 3010 a attached to the rear side of the unit base 3252 and inside the back box 3010. , A back-side drive motor 3254 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3252 such that a rotation axis projects between the mounting base 3253 and the unit base 3252, The rotation of the drive motor 3254 is transmitted, and it is rotatable on the front surface of the mounting base 3253. Attached to and pinion gear rack and is engaged in the rack gear and the back in the right decorations 3220 of the back in the left ornamental body 3210 so as to be sandwiched from above and below (not shown) in which provided with a.

  In the back middle movable effecting unit 3200, in a normal state, the left and right back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are in a retracted position where they are most separated from each other. In this state, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are slightly visible through the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIG. 129 and the like). When the pinion gear is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the driving of the rear middle drive motor 3254 from the normal state, the rack gear of the rear middle left decorative body 3210 and the rear middle right decorative body 3220 meshing with the pinion gear are rotated. Due to the rack gear, the back center left decorative body 3210 moves to the right and the back center right decorative body 3220 moves to the left.

  As a result, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 that have been separated from each other move so as to approach each other, and stop moving immediately before coming into contact with each other. In this state, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are in a state of being located substantially at the center (appearance position) on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back center left decorative body 3210 The decoration with the back middle right decorative body 3220 is united to form one large decoration (decoration imitating cherry petals) (see FIG. 185).

[5-9d. Back left movable directing unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left outside of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back right movable effect unit 3400 with an opening 3010a in the back box 3010 interposed therebetween.

  The back left movable rendering unit 3300 includes a back left decoration body 3310 formed in a triangular prism shape, a back left rotation drive unit 3330 for rotating the back left decoration body 3310 around an axis extending vertically, and a back box 3010. A back left moving drive unit 3350 that is mounted and moves the upper end of the back left rotary drive unit 3330 in the left and right direction, and guides the lower end side of the back left rotary drive unit 3330 that is mounted in the back box 3010 to be movable in the left and right direction. A rear left lower guide rail 3370 and a rear upper left decorative body 3390 attached to the front side of the rear left moving drive unit 3350 and having a predetermined decoration.

  The back left decorative body 3310 is formed in a triangular prism shape extending vertically, and extends shorter than the vertical height of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back left decorative body 3310 has a first decorative surface 3311 on which a relief of a statue of Nio is formed, a second decorative surface 3312 on which a decoration of a predetermined character is formed, and a character different from the second decorative surface 3312. And a third decorative surface 3313 on which a decoration is formed. The back left decorative body 3310 is formed to have translucency. Although not shown, the back left decorative body 3310 has a cylindrical shaft at the lower end.

  The back left rotation drive unit 3330 is attached to the bottom of the movement base 3331 that extends vertically, and is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3331 so as to protrude forward. A lower rotation base 3332 rotatably supporting the lower end of the body 3310, and an upper rotation base (not shown) mounted on the upper part of the moving base 3331 so as to protrude above the back left decorative body 3310; A rotating shaft that is attached to the upper rotating base so as to protrude downward, and a rotating shaft that penetrates the upper rotating base is attached to an upper end of the back left decorative body 3310 (not shown). The motor cover 3333 attached to the moving base 3331 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back left rotary drive motor, and the inside of the back left decorative body 3310 The lower end with being location includes a Urahidari decorative substrate 3334 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the lower rotary base 3332 is mounted (see FIG. 134), the.

  Although not shown, the moving base 3331 has a rack gear extending left and right at the upper end. The lower rotation base 3332 rotatably supports the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back left decorative body 3310. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3332 has a protrusion that protrudes downward from the lower surface and is guided by the lower left lower guide rail 3370.

  The back left decorative substrate 3334 is arranged inside the back left decorative body 3310 through the inside of the cylindrical shaft portion. Although not shown, the upper left side of the back left decorative substrate 3334 is relatively rotatably supported below the upper end of the back left decorative body 3310. Thereby, only the back left decorative body 3310 is formed to rotate by the driving of the back left rotation drive motor. In addition, the LED of the back left decorative board 3334 always faces forward, and only the portion of the back left decorative body 3310 located in front of the back left decorative board 3334 (that is, the decorative surface facing forward) emits light. be able to.

  The back left moving drive unit 3350 has a unit base 3351 attached to the upper left corner above the opening 3010 a in the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010, and the rotation shaft projects rearward through the unit base 3351. The rear left movement drive motor 3352 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, the drive gear 3353 attached to the rotating shaft of the back left movement drive motor 3352, and the rear left rotation A pinion gear (not shown) meshed with the rack gear of the drive unit 3330 and rotatably mounted on the unit base 3351; and a moving base of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 mounted on the lower front surface of the unit base 3351 Slide rail for mounting 3331 movably in the left and right direction Shown is provided with abbreviated).

  When the pinion gear is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the back left movement drive motor 3352 via the drive gear 3353 by the back left movement drive unit 3350, the back left rotation drive unit 3350 is driven by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. The unit 3330 (the back left decorative body 3310) can be moved rightward.

  The lower back left guide rail 3370 is attached near the left end below the opening 3010 a in the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The lower back left guide rail 3370 extends left and right and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower back left guide rail 3370 guides the protrusion slidably in the left-right direction by inserting a protrusion projecting from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3332 into the opening on the upper surface. Can be.

  The back upper left decorative body 3390 includes a translucent back left upper decorative lens 3391 on which a predetermined decoration is formed, and a unit base 3351 of the back left moving drive unit 3350 attached to the rear side of the rear upper left decorative lens 3391. A decorative body base 3392 attached to the front surface, and a rear upper left decorative substrate (not shown) mounted between the decorative body base 3392 and the upper left decorative lens 3391 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back upper left decorative body 3390 can make the back upper left decorative lens 3391 emit light by lighting the LED of the back upper left decorative board.

  In a normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in a state (retreat position) where the back left rotation drive unit 3330 (back left decorative body 3310) is moved to the leftmost position by the back left movement drive unit 3350. ing. In this normal state, the back left decorative body 3310 is located behind the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front decorative unit 3100, and can be almost visually recognized from the front by being blocked by the back front left decorative unit 3120. No (see FIG. 129 etc.).

  In this normal state, by driving the back left movement drive motor 3352 of the back left movement drive unit 3350, the back left decorative body 3310 can be moved rightward through the back left rotation drive unit 3330. When reaching the right end position (appearance position) of the slide rail of the left movement drive unit 3350, the movement stops. In this appearance position, the back left decoration body 3310 is located on the right side of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100 via the back left rotation drive unit 3330, and the game board side effect display. It is located near the left end on the front surface of the device 1600, and is visible through the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIGS. 186 to 188).

  In addition, the back left movable rendering unit 3300 rotates the back left decoration body 3310 with the back left rotation drive motor of the back left rotation drive unit 3330, or the first decoration surface 3311 and the second decoration of the back left decoration body 3310. The rotation can be stopped or any one of the surface 3312 and the third decorative surface 3313 faces forward. The back left decorative body 3310 can be rotated at any of the retracted position and the appearing position.

[5-9e. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the right outside of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back left movable effect unit 3300 with an opening 3010a in the back box 3010 interposed therebetween.

  The back right movable rendering unit 3400 includes a back right decorative body 3410 formed in a triangular prism shape, a back right rotation drive unit 3430 for rotating the back right decorative body 3410 around an axis extending vertically, and a back box 3010. A back-right moving drive unit 3450 that is attached and moves the upper end of the back-right rotary drive unit 3430 in the left-right direction, and guides the lower end of the back-right rotary drive unit 3430 that is mounted in the back box 3010 to be movable in the left-right direction. And a back lower right guide rail 3470, and a back upper right decorative body 3490 attached to the front side of the back right moving drive unit 3450 and having a predetermined decoration.

  The back right decorative body 3410 is formed in a vertically extending triangular prism shape, and extends shorter than the vertical height of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back right decorative body 3410 includes a first decorative surface 3411 on which a relief of a statue of Nioh is formed, a second decorative surface 3412 on which a predetermined character decoration is formed, and a character different from the second decorative surface 3412. A third decorative surface 3413 on which a decoration is formed. The back right decorative body 3410 is formed to have translucency. Although not shown, the back right decorative body 3410 has a cylindrical shaft at the lower end.

  The back right rotation drive unit 3430 is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3431 that is vertically movably attached by the back right movement drive unit 3450 so as to be movable in the left-right direction, and is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3431 so as to protrude forward. A lower rotating base 3432 rotatably supporting the lower end of the body 3410, and an upper rotating base (not shown) attached to the upper portion of the moving base 3431 so as to protrude upward from the back right decorative body 3410; A rotation shaft is attached to the upper rotation base so as to protrude downward, and a rotation shaft that penetrates the upper rotation base and a back right rotation drive motor (not shown) mounted on the upper end of the back right decoration 3410 The motor cover 3433 attached to the moving base 3431 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back right rotation drive motor and the inside of the back right decorative body 3410 The lower end with being location includes a back right decorative substrate 3434 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the lower rotary base 3432 is mounted (see FIG. 134), the.

  Although not shown, the moving base 3431 has a rack gear extending left and right at the upper end. The lower rotation base 3432 rotatably supports the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back right decorative body 3410. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3432 has a projection that protrudes downward from the lower surface and is guided by the lower right guide rail 3470.

  The back right decorative substrate 3434 is disposed inside the back right decorative body 3410 through the inside of the cylindrical shaft portion. Although not illustrated, the back right decorative board 3434 is supported at the upper end below the upper end of the back right decorative body 3410 so as to be relatively rotatable. Thus, only the back right decorative body 3410 is formed to rotate by the driving of the back right rotation drive motor. In addition, the LEDs of the back right decorative board 3434 always face forward, and only the portion of the back right decorative body 3410 located in front of the back right decorative board 3434 (that is, the decorative surface facing forward) emits light. be able to.

  The back right movement drive unit 3450 has a unit base 3451 attached to the upper right corner above the opening 3010 a in the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010, and the rotation shaft projects rearward through the unit base 3451. , A back right movement drive motor 3452 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3451, a drive gear 3453 attached to the rotating shaft of the back right movement drive motor 3452, and a back gear A pinion gear (not shown) meshed with the rack gear of the drive unit 3430 and rotatably mounted on the unit base 3451, and a moving base of the rear right rotation drive unit 3430 mounted on the lower front part of the unit base 3451 Slide rail for mounting 3431 movably in the left and right direction Shown is provided with abbreviated).

  When the pinion gear is rotated clockwise in front view by the back right movement drive motor 3452 via the drive gear 3453 by the back right movement drive unit 3450, the back right rotation drive unit is driven by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. 3430 (back right decorative body 3410) can be moved to the left.

  The lower right back guide rail 3470 is attached near the right end below the opening 3010 a in the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The lower right back guide rail 3470 extends left and right and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The rear lower right guide rail 3470 guides the protrusion slidably in the left-right direction by inserting a protrusion protruding from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3432 into the opening on the upper surface. be able to.

  The back upper right decorative body 3490 has a translucent back upper right decorative lens 3490 on which a predetermined decoration is formed, and a unit base 3451 of the back right moving drive unit 3450 attached to the back right upper back decorative lens 3490. A decorative body base 3492 attached to the front surface, and a back upper right decorative substrate (not shown) mounted between the decorative body base 3492 and the back upper right decorative lens 3491 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back upper right decorative body 3490 can make the back upper right decorative lens 3491 emit light by making the LED on the back upper right decorative substrate emit light.

  In the normal state, the back right movable effecting unit 3400 is in a state where the back right rotation drive unit 3430 (the back right decorative body 3410) is moved to the rightmost position (retreat position) by the back right movement drive unit 3450. ing. In this normal state, the back right decorative body 3410 is located behind the right side of the center role 2500, and a part thereof can be visually recognized through the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIG. 129 and the like). reference).

  In this normal state, by driving the back right movement drive motor 3452 of the back right movement drive unit 3450, the back right decorative body 3410 can be moved rightward through the back right rotation drive unit 3430. When reaching the left end position (appearance position) of the slide rail of the right movement drive unit 3450, the movement stops. In this appearance position, the back right decorative body 3410 is located on the left side of the right side of the center role item 2500 via the back right rotation drive unit 3430, and is located on the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is located near the right end, and is in a state of being entirely visible through the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIGS. 186 to 188).

  In addition, the back right movable rendering unit 3400 rotates the back right decorative body 3410 with the back right rotary drive motor of the back right rotary drive unit 3430, or the first decorative surface 3411 of the back right decorative body 3410, the second decorative The rotation can be stopped or any one of the surface 3412 and the third decorative surface 3413 faces forward. The back right decorative body 3410 can be rotated at any of the retracted position and the appearing position.

[5-9f. Overall configuration of the back movable unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back upper movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 173. FIG. 148 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit mainly disassembled for each constituent unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit disassembled for each main unit. It is an exploded perspective view. The rear upper movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front of the rear wall and above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010.

  The back upper movable rendering unit 3500 includes a back upper first decorative body unit 3510 having a predetermined character decoration, and a back upper second decorative body unit having a different character decoration from the back upper first decorative body unit 3510. 3530; a back upper third decorative body unit 3550 having a different character decoration from the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 and the back upper second decorative body unit 3530; and a back upper first decorative body at the center in the longitudinal direction. The unit 3510 is attached so as to be rotatable relative to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 extend in the front-rear direction near both ends in the longitudinal direction, respectively. A back-upside rotation base unit 3570 that is mounted to be rotatable relative to the axis of the back-up. A decoration unit 3510 that is non-rotatably mounted, and a back-up and down unit 3600 that lifts and lowers the back upper first decoration unit 3510 and the back upper rotation base unit 3570 and is mounted in the back box 3010. I have.

[5-9f-1. Back upper first decorative unit]
Next, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 in the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154. FIG. 151 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 151 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit viewed from the front and FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 154 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front a drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the closed position, and FIG. 154 (b) is a drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from the front. The back upper first decorative body unit 3510 of the back upper movable effecting unit 3500 has a rear end non-rotatably attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 in the rear elevating unit 3600.

  The back upper first decorative body unit 3510 includes a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512, which are formed in such a way as to form predetermined characters in one-to-one pairs and have translucency. A first fixed decorative lens 3513 which is disposed on the rear side of the one left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 and has a predetermined decoration and has a light-transmitting property; A first upper decorative substrate 3514 disposed on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and attached to the rear side of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 so as to cover the rear surface of the first upper decorative substrate 3514. And the first decorative base 3515 in the shape of a flat plate. Note that the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is provided with a decoration imitating lightning.

  The back upper first decorative body unit 3510 extends in the left-right direction at the lower rear portion of the first decorative body base 3515, and has a left end on the left outer side of the first decorative body base 3515 and a first left movable decorative lens 3511. A first lower arm 3516 having a rack gear 3516a extending left and right on the upper side, a slit 3516b penetrating back and forth under the rack gear 3516a and extending left and right, and a first lower arm 3516 A lower arm presser 3517 which is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the slit 3516b and cooperates with the first decorative body base 3515 to slidably mount the first lower arm 3516 in the left-right direction; It has.

  In addition, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515, and has a right end on the right outer side of the first decorative body base 3515 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512. A first upper arm 3518 having a rack gear 3518a extending left and right on the lower side, a slit 3518b penetrating back and forth above the rack gear 3518a and extending left and right, and a first upper arm 3518 An upper arm retainer 3519 attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the slit 3518b and cooperating with the first decorative body base 3515 to attach the first upper arm 3518 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Have.

  Further, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 includes a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3520a that meshes with the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518, respectively, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3520a. A first opening / closing gear member 3520 having a small-diameter drive gear portion 3520b formed integrally and rotatably attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 is provided.

  The upper back first decorative body unit 3510 is a flat plate-like member extending vertically in the front left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515, and has a first opening / closing gear member on the right side. It has a vertically extending drive rack gear 3521a that meshes with the 3520 drive gear portion 3520b, a receiving boss 3521b that projects cylindrically rearward from the lower portion of the rear surface, and a slit 3521c that penetrates back and forth and extends vertically near the left side. The first opening / closing arm 3521 and the slit 3521c of the first opening / closing arm 3521 are attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515, and the first opening / closing arm 3521 is vertically moved in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515. An open / close arm presser 3522 slidably mounted.

  Further, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 has a left end attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and a right end attached to the first upper arm 3518, so that the first upper arm 3518 can be viewed from the front left. A first opening / closing spring 3523 biased to move toward the first direction, and a first attachment base 3524 attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 so as to cover the rear side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520. And a horizontal lock hole 3525a which is attached to the rear side of the first mounting base 3524 and is opened at the outer peripheral surface on the right side, and is formed at the same position in the front-rear direction as the horizontal lock hole 3525a. A vertical lock hole 3525b, which is open at the bottom, and a mounting shaft portion 3525c that projects cylindrically rearward behind the vertical lock hole 3525b. End and a, a first mounting shaft member 3525 attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 in the back on the lift unit 3600.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 will be described in detail. The back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is located between a closed position in which the left and right first left movable decorative lenses 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 approach each other and an open position in which they are separated from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

  In the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, a first upper arm 3518 to which a first right movable decorative lens 3512 is attached is disposed above a first lower arm 3516 to which a first left movable decorative lens 3511 is attached. And each is mounted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The first lower arm 3516 is provided with a rack gear 3516a extending left and right upward, and the first upper arm 3518 is provided with a rack gear 3518a extending left and right downward. The rack gear 3516a of the arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518 face each other. Then, between the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is connected to the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518. Each is engaged. Thus, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 (the transmission gear portion 3520a) is rotated, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be slid in mutually different left and right directions.

  Therefore, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens are moved via the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518. When the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be slid in a direction approaching each other (a direction of the closed position). , The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be slid in directions away from each other (in the direction of the open position).

  In the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 has a drive gear portion 3520b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3520a, and extends vertically so as to mesh with the drive gear portion 3520b. A first opening / closing arm 3521 having a drive rack gear 3521a is provided. Since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Then, since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is disposed on the left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 in a front view, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, it slides downward, When the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated clockwise in front view, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid downward, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 Can be slid in a direction approaching each other (a direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid upward, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates clockwise in front view, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are mutually moved. It can be slid in the separating direction (the direction of the open position).

  Since the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 has the first opening / closing spring 3523 that urges the first upper arm 3518 to move to the left, a force acts on the first opening / closing arm 3521. When not performed (in a normal state), the first upper arm 3518 is slid to the left by the urging force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative The lens 3512 is brought into a closed position where the lenses 3512 abut each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518. Are engaged. In this state, the drive gear portion 3520b of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3521a of the first opening / closing arm 3521 (see FIG. 154 (a)).

  When the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid upward from the closed position to resist the urging force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates clockwise in front view, The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 slide in directions away from each other via the lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518. Then, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 reach the open positions, the slide stops (see FIG. 154 (b)). The stop of the slide at this open position is performed at at least one of the slit 3516b of the first lower arm 3516, the slit 3518b of the first upper arm 3518, and the slit 3521c of the first opening / closing arm 3521, at the end of the long hole. The slide is regulated by the lower arm press 3517, the upper arm press 3519, and the opening / closing arm press 3522 abutting on each other.

  Therefore, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 includes the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. Is located in front of the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is almost invisible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. Decoration is visible. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are separated from each other, and the first movable movable lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are separated from each other. The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3513 can be seen.

  In addition, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 causes the LED of the back upper first decorative substrate 3514 to emit light as appropriate, so that the first left movable decorative lens 3511, the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the first fixed decorative lens are provided. 3513 can be appropriately decorated with light emission. Specifically, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, when the LED on the back upper first decorative substrate 3514 emits light, the first fixed decorative lens 3513 passes through the first fixed decorative lens 3513. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position and the LED on the back upper first decorative substrate 3514 emits light, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3511 are turned on. Only the first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between the decorative lens 3512 can be illuminated.

[5-9f-2. Second decorative body unit on the back]
Next, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 in the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158. FIG. 155 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 155 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit as viewed from the front and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 158 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper second decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and FIG. 158 (b) is a drive system when the back upper second decorative body unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from the front. The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 of the back upper movable effect unit 3500 has a rear end near one end in the longitudinal direction of the back upper rotating base unit 3570 (near the right end when in the horizontal position), and a front-rear direction. Is mounted so as to be rotatable about an axis extending to

  The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 includes a second left movable decorative lens 3531 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532 which are formed in such a way as to form a predetermined character in one-to-one pairs and have translucency. A second fixed decorative lens 3533 which is disposed behind the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 and has a predetermined decoration and has a light-transmitting property, and a second fixed decorative lens 3533 A second upper decorative substrate 3534 disposed on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and attached to the rear side of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 so as to cover the rear surface of the second upper decorative substrate 3534. And a flat second decorative body base 3535. Note that a decoration imitating lightning is formed on the second fixed decorative lens 3533.

  In addition, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 extends in the left-right direction at the lower part on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535, and has a left end on the left outer side of the second decorative body base 3535 and a second left movable decorative lens 3531. And a second lower arm 3536 having a rack gear 3536a extending left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3536b penetrating back and forth below the rack gear 3536a and extending left and right. A lower arm presser 3537 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3536b, and cooperating with the second decorative body base 3535 to attach the second lower arm 3536 slidably in the left-right direction; It has.

  In addition, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535, and has a right end on the right outside of the second decorative body base 3535 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532. And a second upper arm 3538 having a rack gear 3538a extending left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3538b penetrating back and forth above and above the rack gear 3538a and extending left and right. An upper arm presser 3539 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3538b and cooperating with the second decorative body base 3535 to attach the second upper arm 3538 slidably in the left-right direction. Have.

  Further, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 includes a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3540a that meshes with the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3540a. A second opening / closing gear member 3540 having a small-diameter drive gear portion 3540b formed integrally and rotatably attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 is provided.

  In addition, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 is a flat plate extending on the left side in the front view of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535, and extends vertically in the right side. A vertically extending drive rack gear 3541a that meshes with a drive gear portion 3540b of 3540, a receiving boss 3541b that projects rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the upper end of the rear surface, and a slit 3541c that extends vertically through and near the left side. And a second opening / closing arm 3541 having an opening / closing arm 3541. The second opening / closing arm 3541 is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3541c of the second opening / closing arm 3541. And an opening / closing arm presser 3542 mounted to be slidable in the direction.

  Further, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 has a left end attached to the second lower arm 3536 and a right end attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535, so that the second lower arm 3536 can be viewed from the right in front view. A second opening / closing spring 3543 urged to move toward the second direction, and a second attachment base 3544 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 so as to cover the rear side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540. And The second attachment base 3544 is attached to a second drive link gear member 3573 of the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 described later.

  Next, the movement of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 will be described in detail. The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 moves between the closed position where the left and right second left movable decorative lenses 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 approach each other and the open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

  In the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, a second upper arm 3538 to which a second right movable decorative lens 3532 is attached is disposed above a second lower arm 3536 to which a second left movable decorative lens 3531 is attached. And each is mounted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. In the second lower arm 3536, a rack gear 3536a extending left and right is provided upward, and in the second upper arm 3538, a rack gear 3538a extending left and right is provided downward. The rack gear 3536a of the arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538 face each other. Then, between the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is connected to the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538. Each is engaged. Accordingly, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 (transmission gear portion 3540a) is rotated, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in mutually different left and right directions.

  Therefore, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3531 via the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. When the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated clockwise in front view, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in a direction approaching each other (a direction of the closed position). , The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be slid in the direction away from each other (in the direction of the open position).

  Further, in the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 has a drive gear portion 3540b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3540a, and extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3540b. A second opening / closing arm 3541 having a driving rack gear 3541a is provided. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Then, since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is disposed on the left side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 in a front view, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, it slides downward, When the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated clockwise in front view, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid downward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 Can be slid in a direction approaching each other (a direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates clockwise in front view, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are mutually moved. It can be slid in the separating direction (the direction of the open position).

  Since the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 has the second opening / closing spring 3543 that urges the second lower arm 3536 to move rightward, a force acts on the second opening / closing arm 3541. When not performed (in a normal state), the second lower arm 3536 is slid rightward by the urging force of the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative The lens 3532 is in a closed position where the lens 3532 is in contact with each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538. Are engaged. In this state, the drive gear portion 3540b of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3541a of the second opening / closing arm 3541 (see FIG. 158 (a)).

  When the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward from the closed position to oppose the urging force of the second opening / closing spring 3543, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates clockwise in front view, The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 slide in directions away from each other via the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. When the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 reach the open positions, the slide stops (see FIG. 158 (b)). The stop of the slide at this open position is performed at at least one of the slit 3536b of the second lower arm 3536, the slit 3538b of the second upper arm 3538, and the slit 3541c of the second opening / closing arm 3541, at the end of the long hole. The slide is regulated by the lower arm press 3537, the upper arm press 3539, and the opening / closing arm press 3542 abutting on each other.

  Therefore, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 includes the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 in the closed position. Is located in front of the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the second fixed decorative lens 3533 is almost invisible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532. Decoration is visible. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are separated from each other, and The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3533 becomes visible.

  In addition, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 causes the LED of the back upper second decorative substrate 3534 to emit light appropriately, so that the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the second fixed decorative lens are provided. 3533 can be illuminated as appropriate. Specifically, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, when the LED of the second upper decorative substrate 3534 emits light, the light passes through the second fixed decorative lens 3533. The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position and the LED of the second upper decorative substrate 3534 emits light, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable Only the second fixed decorative lens 3533 facing from between the decorative lens 3532 can be illuminated.

[5-9f-3. Back upper third decorative body unit]
Next, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 in the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 162. FIG. 159 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 159 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit as exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit exploded and viewed from the rear. FIG. 162 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, a drive system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the closed position, and FIG. 162 (b) is a drive system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from the front. The rear upper third decorative body unit 3550 of the rear upper movable effect unit 3500 has a rear end near the end opposite to the rear upper second decorative body unit 3530 in the longitudinal direction of the rear upper rotating base unit 3570 (horizontal position). (In the vicinity of the left end at the time of), it is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has a third left movable decorative lens 3551 and a third right movable decorative lens 3552 having a light-transmitting decoration in which decorations for predetermined characters are formed in one-to-one pairs. A third fixed decorative lens 3553 which is disposed on the rear side of the three left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and has a predetermined decoration and has transparency, and a third fixed decorative lens 3553 A third upper decorative board 3554, which is disposed on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and is attached to the rear side of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 so as to cover the rear side of the third upper decorative board 3554. And a third decorative base 3555 in the form of a flat plate. Note that a decoration imitating lightning is formed on the third fixed decorative lens 3553.

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction at a lower portion on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 and has a left end on the left outer side of the third decorative body base 3555 and a third left movable decorative lens 3551. A third lower arm 3556 having a rack gear 3556a extending left and right on the upper side thereof, a slit 3556b penetrating back and forth below the rack gear 3556a and extending left and right, and a third lower arm 3556 A lower arm presser 3557 that is attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 through the slit 3556b, and that cooperates with the third decorative body base 3555 to attach the third lower arm 3556 to be slidable in the left-right direction. It has.

  In addition, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555, and the right end is the third right movable decorative lens 3552 on the right outside of the third decorative body base 3555. And a third upper arm 3558 having a rack gear 3558a extending left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3558b extending left and right through the front and rear above the rack gear 3558a, and a third upper arm 3558. An upper arm presser 3559 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 through the slit 3558b and cooperating with the third decorative body base 3555 to attach the third upper arm 3558 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Have.

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 includes a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3560a that meshes with the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3560a. A third opening / closing gear member 3560 having a small-diameter drive gear portion 3560b formed integrally and rotatably attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 is provided.

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is a flat plate-like extending vertically on the left side in the front view of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555, and has a third opening / closing gear member on the right side. A third opening / closing arm 3561 having a vertically extending driving rack gear 3561a meshing with a driving gear portion 3560b of a 3560, a slit 3561c penetrating back and forth near the left side, and a slit 3561c of the third opening / closing arm 3561. An opening / closing arm presser 3562 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 and cooperating with the third decorative body base 3555 to attach the third opening / closing arm 3561 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. .

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has a left end attached to the third lower arm 3556 and a right end attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555, so that the third lower arm 3556 can be seen from the right in front view. A third opening / closing spring 3563 urged to move toward the third opening / closing member 3560, and a third attachment base 3564 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 so as to cover the rear side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560. And The third attachment base 3564 is attached to a third drive link gear member 3578 of the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 described later.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 will be described in detail. The back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is located between a closed position where the left and right third left movable decorative lenses 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 approach each other and is in an open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

  In the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, a third upper arm 3558 to which a third right movable decorative lens 3552 is mounted is disposed above a third lower arm 3556 to which a third left movable decorative lens 3551 is mounted. And each is mounted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. In the third lower arm 3556, a rack gear 3556a extending left and right is provided upward, and in the third upper arm 3558, a rack gear 3558a extending left and right is provided downward. The rack gear 3556a of the arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558 face each other. Then, between the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is connected to the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558. Each is engaged. Thus, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 (transmission gear portion 3560a) is rotated, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in mutually different left and right directions.

  Therefore, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative via the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. When the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated clockwise in front view, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in a direction in which the lens 3552 approaches each other (a direction of the closed position). , The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be slid in directions away from each other (in the direction of the open position).

  In the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 has a drive gear portion 3560b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3560a, and extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3560b. A third opening / closing arm 3561 having a drive rack gear 3561a is provided. Since the third opening / closing arm 3561 is mounted so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Then, since the third opening / closing arm 3561 is disposed on the left side in the front view of the third opening / closing gear member 3560, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, it slides downward, When the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated clockwise in front view, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid downward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 Can be slid in a direction approaching each other (a direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid upward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates clockwise in front view, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 mutually move. It can be slid in the separating direction (the direction of the open position).

  Since the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has the third opening / closing spring 3563 which urges the third lower arm 3556 to move rightward, a force acts on the third opening / closing arm 3561. When not performed (in a normal state), the third lower arm 3556 is slid rightward by the urging force of the third opening / closing spring 3563, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative The lens 3552 is in a closed position where the lens 3552 is in contact with each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558. Are engaged. In this state, the drive gear portion 3560b of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3561a of the third opening / closing arm 3561 (see FIG. 162 (a)).

  When the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid upward from this closed position so as to oppose the urging force of the third opening / closing spring 3563, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates clockwise in front view, and The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 slide in directions away from each other via the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. Then, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 reach the open positions, the slide stops (see FIG. 162 (b)). The stop of the slide at the open position is performed at at least one of the slit 3556b of the third lower arm 3556, the slit 3558b of the third upper arm 3558, and the slit 3561c of the third opening / closing arm 3561, at the end of the long hole. The lower arm presser 3557, the upper arm presser 3559, and the opening / closing arm presser 3562 abut on each other to restrict the slide.

  Accordingly, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, the third upper decorative body unit 3550 includes the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Is located in front of the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 is almost invisible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Decoration is visible. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are separated from each other and the third movable decorative lens 3551 is located between them. The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3553 becomes visible.

  In addition, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 appropriately emits the LED of the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, so that the third left movable decorative lens 3551, the third right movable decorative lens 3552, and the third fixed decorative lens are provided. 3553 can be luminously decorated as appropriate. Specifically, when the LED on the back upper third decorative substrate 3554 emits light when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, the light passes through the third fixed decorative lens 3553. The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position and the LED on the third upper decorative board 3554 emits light, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3551 are turned on. Only the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing the decorative lens 3552 can be illuminated.

[5-9f-4. Rotating base unit on the back]
Next, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 of the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 163 to 167. FIG. 163 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper rotary base unit in the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 163 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper rotary base unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the gear configuration of the rear upper rotation base unit from the front. FIG. 167 (a) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state in which the operation lever of the upper back rotation base unit is in the operation position from the front, and FIG. 167 (b) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state in which the operation lever is in the non-operation position from the front.

  The back upper rotation base unit 3570 of the back upper movable effecting unit 3500 is attached to the front surface of the movable unit in the back elevating unit so as to be rotatable around an axis that extends in the front-rear direction. The second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are mounted so as to be relatively rotatable around axes extending in the front-rear direction, respectively.

  The back upper rotation base unit 3570 extends in parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and has a first hole 3571a penetrating front and rear in the center in the longitudinal direction, and front and rear portions near both ends in the longitudinal direction, respectively. The second and third holes 3571b and 3571c penetrating through the first and third holes 3571a, and the cylindrical portion protrudes rearward from the outer periphery of the first hole 3571a and is rotatably mounted on the movable side unit 3610 of the back elevation unit 3600. It has a back-up rotating base with 3571d. The first hole 3571a (the inner diameter of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d) is formed to have a size that allows the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 to pass therethrough. The second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed to be slightly smaller than the first hole 3571a and have the same size as each other. Further, the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed near the right end and near the left end, respectively, when viewed from the front when the upper back rotating base 3571 extends horizontally (at the horizontal position). I have. In the following, a description will be given of a state where the upper back rotation base 3571 extends horizontally.

  The upper back rotation base unit 3570 includes a rotation base driven gear 3572 attached to the rear side of the upper back rotation base 3571 and extending in a semicircular shape concentrically with the center of the first hole 3571a. The rotation-based driven gear 3572 is formed in the form of an upper half with respect to the ring having the central axis extended back and forth, and gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. The rotation base driven gear 3572 is mounted such that a gap is formed between the rotation base driven gear 3572 and the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d. The rotation base driven gear 3572 meshes with a rotation base drive gear 3614 of the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 described later.

  In addition, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is formed into an annular shaft portion 3573a rotatably inserted from the front into the second hole 3571b of the back upper rotation base 3571, and a concentric fan shape from the front end of the shaft portion 3573a. A second drive link gear member 3573 having a second link gear portion 3573b formed thereon and having a front surface to which the rear surface of the second mounting base 3544 of the second upper decorative body unit 3530 is mounted; A pressing member 3574 attached to the rear side of the second drive link gear member 3573 from the rear side of the base 3571 and having a diameter larger than that of the second hole 3571b. In the second drive link gear member 3573, the second link gear portion 3573b is formed to have a larger diameter than the second hole 3571b. Further, the second link gear portion 3573b is formed at the same pitch as the center link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 with the same diameter. The second drive link gear member 3573 has a pressing member 3574 attached to the rear side of the shaft portion 3573a inserted into the second hole 3571b, so that the movement of the second drive link gear member 3573 in the forward and backward directions with respect to the second hole 3571b is restricted. It is rotatably mounted in the state.

  Further, the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 on the left side in the front view of the second hole 3571b, and the second link gear portion of the second drive link gear member 3573. The second link gear 3575 in the form of a spur gear meshing with 3573b, and the second link gear 3575 for second rotation is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper back base 3571 on the left side in front view of the first link gear 3575 for second use. A second sprocket-shaped second link gear 3576 meshing with the second first link gear 3575, and rotatable rearward on the left side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 on the left side in the front view of the second second link gear 3576. And a spur gear-shaped second third link gear 3577 which is attached to the second gear and meshes with the second second link gear 3576.

  The second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the second first link gear 3575 mesh with each other through an opening formed in the upper back rotation base 3571. The left end side of the second third link gear 3577 is close to the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d in the upper back rotating base 3571. The second third link gear 3577 meshes with a central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 described later.

  In addition, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is formed into an annular shaft portion 3578a rotatably inserted from the front into the third hole 3571c of the upper back rotation base 3571, and a concentric fan shape from the front end of the shaft portion 3578a. A third drive link gear member 3578 having a third link gear portion 3578b formed thereon and having a front surface to which a rear surface of a third mounting base 3564 of the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 is mounted; A pressing member 3579 attached to the rear side of the third drive link gear member 3578 from the rear side of the base 3571 and having a diameter larger than that of the third hole 3571c. In the third drive link gear member 3578, the third link gear portion 3578b has a larger diameter than the third hole 3571c. Further, the third link gear portion 3578b is formed with the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600. The third drive link gear member 3578 has its pressing member 3579 attached to the rear side of the shaft portion 3578a inserted into the third hole 3571c, whereby the movement of the third drive link gear member 3578 in the forward and backward directions with respect to the third hole 3571c is restricted. It is rotatably mounted in the state.

  Further, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the front side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the right side of the third hole 3571c in front view, and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578. The third link gear 3580 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first link gear 3580, and the third link gear 3580 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper back base 3571 on the right side in front view of the third link gear 3580. A third second link gear 3581 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first link gear 3580, and a rotatable rear side of the upper rear base 3571 on the right side of the third second link gear 3581 in a front view. And a third gear third link gear 3582 in the form of a spur gear, which is attached and meshes with the second gear link 3581 for the third gear.

  The third first link gear 3580 and the third second link gear 3581 mesh with each other through an opening formed in the upper back rotation base 3571. The third link gear for third use 3582 has a right end approaching the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d in the upper back rotating base 3571. The third third link gear 3582 meshes with a central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 of the back elevating unit 3600 described later.

  In addition, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the rear lower portion of the upper back rotation base 3571 between the first hole 3571a and the second hole 3571b, and the rotation shaft passes through the upper back rotation base 3571. A working lever drive motor 3584 protruding forward, a spur gear-shaped action lever drive gear 3584 attached to the rotating shaft of the action lever drive motor 3584, and an action lever drive gear 3584 meshed with the back upper rotation base A working lever pinion gear 3585 which is rotatably mounted on the front surface of the working lever pinion 3571, and a working lever rack gear 3586a which meshes with the working lever pinion gear 3585 from above and extends left and right; An action lever 3586 attached to the front surface of the rotation base 3571 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction; The lever 3586 restricts the forward movement of the operating lever 3586 and is attached to the front surface of the upper back rotating base 3571, and the operating lever 3586 attached to the front surface of the upper rotating base 3571 in the left and right direction of the operating lever 3586. And an action lever movement detecting sensor 3588 for detecting the movement of the moving lever.

  The operating lever 3586 is connected to the horizontally long rectangular main body 3586b having an operating lever rack gear 3586a formed on the lower side, and the upper side of the main body 3586b, and extends in a strip shape to the left from the main body 3586b. A slide attachment portion 3586c attached to the upper front surface of the back upper rotating base 3571 so as to be slidable in the left and right direction; A lock piece 3586d that can be inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a and the vertical lock hole 3525b, a first extension 3586e extending downward from the main body 3586b, and a lock piece 3586d from the lower end of the first extension 3586e. The first action portion 3586f also protruding to the left and the upper side of the main body 3586b A second right extension 3586g connected to the vicinity of the end and extending rightward, and a second extension extending from the right end of the second right extension 3586g to a position slightly higher than the first working portion 3586f. A second lower extension 3586h, a second operating portion 3586i extending leftward from near the lower end of the left side of the second lower extension 3586h, and a lower end of the first extension 3586e from the left end of the slide mounting portion 3586c. A third extending portion 3586j extending downward to substantially the same height as that of the third extending portion 3586j, and a third working portion 3586k extending leftward from near the lower end of the left side of the third extending portion 3586j (FIG. 167).

  Further, the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 includes a front gear cover 3589 attached to the front surface of the rear upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the front surfaces of the operation lever drive gear 3584 and the operation lever pinion gear 3585, and a rear upper rotation base 3571. The upper back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590, which is attached to the lower surface of the first hole 3571a on the front surface of the lower surface and detects the rotation position of the back upper rotation base unit 3570, and the front side of the back upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590. An upper back rotating base relay board 3591 attached to the front surface of the upper back rotating base 3571 so as to cover, and a board mounted to the front surface of the upper back rotating base 3571 so as to cover the front surface of the back upper rotating base relay board 3591 And a cover 3592.

  The upper back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation position of the upper back rotation base unit 3570 by detecting the rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back elevation unit 3600. It is. The back upper rotation base relay board 3591 includes a back upper rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable unit 3610 in the back elevation unit 3600, a back upper second decorative board 3534, a back upper third decorative board 3554, an action lever drive motor 3584, The connection with the action lever movement detection sensor 3588 and the back upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 is relayed.

  Further, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is provided with the back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side of the second first link gear 3575, the second second link gear 3576, and the second third link gear 3577. A rear right gear cover 3593 attached to the rear side, a third second link gear 3581, and a third third link gear 3582 are attached to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side. A rear left gear cover 3594 and a motor cover 3595 attached to the rear side of the upper rear rotation base 3571 so as to cover the lower side of the operating lever drive motor 3581.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 will be described. In the back-upside rotation base unit 3570, the mounting tube portion 3571 d protruding rearward of the back-upside rotation base 3571 is inserted into the shaft tube portion 3611 a of the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 of the back up / down unit 3600. Accordingly, the movable unit 3610 is attached so as to rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the front surface of the movable-side unit 3610. Note that the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is restricted from moving forward by a first mounting shaft member 3525 of a back upper first decorative body unit 3510 that penetrates the mounting cylinder portion 3571d from the front and is mounted on the front surface of the movable unit. Is done. In addition, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is provided on the front surface of the second drive link gear member 3573 rotatably attached to the second hole 3571b of the upper back rotation base 3571, and the second rotation base unit 3570 in the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is provided. By attaching the rear surface of the two attachment bases 3544, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 can be attached so as to be rotatable relative to the back upper rotation base 3571. Further, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is provided on the front surface of the third drive link gear member 3578 which is rotatably attached to the third hole 3571c of the upper back rotation base 3571. By attaching the rear surface of the three attachment bases 3564, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 can be attached so as to be rotatable relative to the back upper rotation base 3571.

  When the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 in the rear lifting / lowering unit 3600, the rotation base driven gear 3572 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 of the movable side unit 3610. At the same time, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 mesh with the central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 (see FIG. 178). Then, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated by driving the rotation drive motor 3612 on the back side of the movable unit 3610, the rotation base unit 3570 is rotated through the rotation base driven gear 3572, and the first hole 3571a (attachment). It rotates around an axis extending back and forth about the axis of the cylindrical portion 3571d). The upper back rotation base unit 3570 has a horizontal position where the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the first hole 3571a, the second hole 3571b, and the third hole 3571c are arranged) extends horizontally, and a vertical position which extends vertically. It can rotate 90 degrees between the positions. In the horizontal position, the second hole 3571b is located to the right of the first hole 3571a, and in the vertical position, the second hole 3571b is located below the first hole 3571a. At this horizontal position, the upper back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable unit 3610 in the back elevation unit 3600.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates between the horizontal position and the vertical position around the first hole 3571a, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are moved by the movable unit 3610. Move around the center link gear 3611b. At this time, since the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are engaged with the central link gear 3611b, when revolving around the central link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 revolve around the central link gear 3611b. The gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 rotate by themselves, and each of them rotates relatively to the rear upper rotation base 3571.

  Then, when the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 rotate, their rotation is transmitted from the second third link gear 3577 to the second second link gear 3576 and the second The second drive link gear member 3573 is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b via the second first link gear 3575, and the second drive link gear member 3573 rotates in the opposite direction to the second third link gear 3577. The third link gear 3581 is transmitted to the third link gear portion 3578b via the third link gear 3581 and the third first link gear 3580, and the third drive link gear member 3578 is moved from the third link gear 3581 to the third drive link gear member 3578. And the third link gear 3582 rotates in the opposite direction.

  At this time, since the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b have the same diameter as the center link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610, the rotation of the back upper rotation base 3571 and the center link gear 3611b is performed. The angle is the same as the rotation angle of the upper back rotation base 3571 and the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b. Since the central link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610 is non-rotatably attached, when the rear upper rotation base 3571 rotates, the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b move forward and backward. Instead of rotating about the extended axis, it revolves around the central link gear 3611b. That is, the upper back rotating base unit 3570 holds the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 in the first hole 3571a (movable side It can revolve around the center link gear 3611b) of the unit 3610.

  In addition, when the operating lever drive motor 3583 rotates the operating lever pinion gear 3585 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 moves the operating lever 3586 to the left via the operating lever rack gear 3586a. When the operation lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in a front view, the operation lever 3586 can be moved rightward via the operation lever rack gear 3586a.

  More specifically, the main body 3586b is located on the right side of the first hole 3571a in the upper back rotation base 3571 in a front view in a state where the action lever 3586 is assembled to the upper back rotation base unit 3570. The slide mounting portion 3586c of the operation lever 3586 extends leftward to the vicinity of the third hole 3571c so as to straddle the upper and outer sides of the first hole 3571a. The first action portion 3586f is located below the first hole 3571a. The second right extension 3586g extends to the vicinity of the second hole 3571b above the second hole 3571b. The second lower extension 3586h extends so that the lower end is located below the second hole 3571b. The second action portion 3586i is located at a height near the lower part of the second hole 3571b. The lower end of the third extension 3586j extends below the third hole 3571c. Therefore, the third action portion 3586k is located below the third hole 3571c.

  As shown in FIG. 167 (a), when the operation lever 3586 is moved to the leftmost position (state of the operation position), the lock piece 3586d protruding leftward from the left side of the main body 3586b in a front view. Are projected into the first hole 3571a. In this state, the left end of the first working portion 3586f is located slightly to the left of the center of the first hole 3571a. The left end of the second action portion 3586i is located to the left of the second hole 3571b. Further, the left end of the third action portion 3586k is located near the right end of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extension 3586j of the operation lever 3586 is detected by the operation lever movement detection sensor 3588.

  On the other hand, in a state where the operation lever 3586 is moved to the rightmost position (a state of the non-operation position), the lock piece 3586d and the first operation portion 3586f are located to the right of the first hole 3571a. The left end of the second action portion 3586i is located slightly to the left with respect to the center of the second hole 3571b. Further, the left end of the third action portion 3586k is located to the right of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extension 3586j of the operation lever 3586 is separated from the operation lever movement detection sensor 3588, and is in a non-detection state.

  The operation lever 3586 is moved to the operation position, and the lock piece 3586d is inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 by moving the operation lever 3586 to the operation position. By doing so, the rotation of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 with respect to the movable side unit 3610 of the back elevation unit 3600 can be restricted (locked). Accordingly, when the operating lever 3586 is moved to the non-operating position, the lock piece 3586d comes out of the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b, and rotates upward and downward with respect to the movable side unit 3610 of the rear elevation unit 3600. The base unit 3570 can be rotated.

  In addition, the left end of each of the first operating portion 3586f, the second operating portion 3586i, and the third operating portion 3586k is connected to the first opening / closing arm 3521 of the first decorative body unit 3510 on the back. The second opening / closing arm 3541 of the upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the third opening / closing arm 3561 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 can be brought into contact with each other. Therefore, when the operating lever 3586 is moved to the operating position when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated and positioned in the vertically extended state, the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3541 The arm 3561 can be slid upward.

[5-9f-5. Back elevation unit]
Next, the back raising / lowering unit 3600 of the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173. FIG. 168 (a) is a perspective view of the back ascending / descending unit in the back and back movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 168 (b) is a perspective view of the back ascending / descending unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 169 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back elevating / lowering unit disassembled into a movable side unit and a fixed side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the device as viewed from behind after being disassembled. FIG. 170 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit of the back elevating unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 170 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed side unit of the back up / down unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed side unit of the back up / down unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 173 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the drive system when the movable unit of the back elevating unit is at the ascending position, and FIG. 173 (b) is the driving system when the movable unit of the back elevating unit is at the lowered position. It is explanatory drawing which shows a system from the front.

  The back elevating / lowering unit 3600 is attached between the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 above the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The back elevating unit 3600 includes a movable unit 3610 to which a back upper first decorative body unit 3510 and a back upper rotating base unit 3570 are mounted on a front surface, and a fixed unit which is mounted in a back box 3010 by moving the movable unit 3610 up and down. 3650.

  First, as shown in FIG. 170, the movable side unit 3610 of the back elevating / lowering unit 3600 is attached to a substantially rectangular movable side base 3611 extending left and right in a front view and an upper right corner on the front surface of the movable side base 3611. A back-side rotation drive motor 3612 having a cage rotation shaft protruding rearward through the movable-side base 3611, a rotation drive gear 3613 attached to the rotation shaft of the back-side rotation drive motor 3612, and a rotation drive gear 3613. A rotatable base drive gear 3614 meshed with the rotatable base driven gear 3572 of the upper back rotary base unit 3570 and rotatably attached to the front surface of the movable base 3611.

  The movable unit 3610 includes a motor cover 3615 mounted on the front surface of the movable base 3611 so as to cover the rear upper rotation drive motor 3612, and a flat base mounted on the rear side of the movable base 3611. It has a cover 3616 and a movable-side relay board 3617 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3616.

  The movable-side base 3611 of the movable-side unit 3610 is formed at the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the shaft cylindrical portion 3611a and the shaft cylindrical portion 3611a that protrudes cylindrically from the lower portion at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. A central link gear 3611b that meshes with the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 of the base unit 3570; And a rotation detecting piece 3611d attached to a lower side of the shaft cylinder portion 3611a on the front surface and detected by the upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the upper rotation base unit 3570. 173).

  The inner diameter of the shaft cylindrical portion 3611a of the movable base 3611 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the mounting cylindrical portion 3571d of the upper back rotating base 3571 in the upper rear rotating base unit 3570, and the mounting cylindrical portion 3571d is rotated. It can be inserted as much as possible. The center link gear 3611b has the same diameter as the second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 in the upper back rotating base unit 3570. At the same pitch.

  The movable-side relay board 3617 includes a back-side relay board 3659 of the fixed-side unit 3650, a first-side decorative board 3514 of the back-side first decorative body unit 3510, and a back-side rotary base relay board 3591 of the back-side rotary base unit 3570. , And the connection with the rear upper rotation drive motor 3612. The elevating slide rail 3656 of the fixed unit 3650 is attached to the left and right ends on the rear surface of the base cover 3616. Further, the lower end of the elevating spring 3657 of the fixed unit 3650 is attached to the rear side of the base cover 3616.

  As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the fixed-side unit 3650 of the back elevating / lowering unit 3600 includes a substantially square fixed-side base 3651 attached to the inside of the back box 3010 and extending left and right in front view, and a fixed-side base 3651. A spur gear-shaped elevating gear portion 3652a, which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and rearward at the center of the front surface, and projects forward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the outer periphery on the front surface of the elevating gear portion 3652a. An elevating rotary pin 3652 having an elevating drive pin 3652b slidably inserted into an elevating slit 3611c of the movable base 3611, and a detection piece 3652c extending outward in a fan shape from the elevating gear portion 3652a; An elevating drive gear 3653 meshing with an elevating gear portion 3652a of the elevating rotating body 3652, and an elevating drive gear 653 is provided with a backing on elevation drive motor 3654 attached to the rear surface of which the fixed-side base 3651 attached to the rotating shaft.

  The fixed unit 3650 is attached to the front surface of the fixed base 3651 and detects an elevating sensor 3655 for detecting the detecting piece 3652c of the elevating rotating body 3652, and is attached near the left and right sides of the front surface of the fixed base 3651. At the same time, the base cover 3616 of the movable unit 3610 is attached to the front side, and a pair of vertically movable slide rails 3656 which can expand and contract vertically, and both left and right sides of the lower part of the front surface of the fixed side base 3651 outside the pair of vertically movable slide rails 3656 And a pair of elevating springs 3657, the lower end of which is attached to the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 and biases the movable base 3611 to move upward.

  Further, the fixed unit 3650 has an insertion slit 3658a which penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in a semicircular shape, and through which the elevation drive pin 3652b of the elevation rotary body 3652 can pass, and a pair of elevation slide rails. The fixed-side front cover 3658 attached to the front surface of the fixed-side base 3651 so as to cover the front surface of the elevating rotary body 3652 between 3656, and the fixed-side base 3651 is attached to the rear surface of the movable-side unit 3610. The upper relay board 3659 that connects the movable relay board 3617, the back-up / down drive motor 3654, and the elevation detection sensor 3655 to the lower-right relay board 3034, and the rear side of the back-up relay board 3659. A substrate cover 3660 attached to the rear side of the fixed-side base 3651.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 will be described. The back ascending / descending unit 3600 is rotatably inserted into the shaft tubular portion 3611a of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610, and the mounting tubular portion 3571d of the back upper rotating base 3571 of the back rotating base unit 3570 is rotatable. The rear end of the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the first upper decorative body unit 3510 is mounted on the front surface of the movable base 3611 through the mounting cylindrical portion 3571d of the upper rear rotating base 3571. Accordingly, the movable unit 3610 rotatably mounts the upper back rotation base unit 3570 around an axis extending back and forth about the shaft cylinder 3611a (first hole 3571a) in a state in which the base unit cannot be moved forward. be able to.

  In a state where the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610, the rotation base drive gear 3614 is in mesh with the rotation base driven gear 3572 of the upper back rotation base unit 3570. Therefore, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated via the rotation drive gear 3613 by the driving of the back rotation drive motor 3612, the back rotation base unit 3570 is rotated about the shaft cylinder portion 3611a (first hole 3571a). Can be done. The movable unit 3610 can rotate the upper back rotation base unit 3570 by 90 degrees between a horizontally extended horizontal position and a vertically extended vertical position. The rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 is detected by the upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the upper rotation base unit 3570 when the upper rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. .

  In the assembled state, the movable unit 3610 can be moved only vertically with respect to the fixed unit 3650 by the pair of elevating slide rails 3656 of the fixed unit 3650 in the assembled state. ing. In the movable unit 3610, an elevating drive pin 3652 b of the elevating rotating body 3652 in the fixed unit 3650 is inserted into the elevating slit 3611 c of the movable base 3611 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Therefore, the position of the movable unit 3610 in the vertical direction is regulated by the height position of the lifting drive pin 3652b in the lifting rotating body 3652. The movable unit 3610 is urged by a pair of elevating springs 3657 to move upward.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 has a lifting / lowering drive pin 3652b revolving by the rotation of the lifting / lowering rotating body 3652, right above the rotation center of the lifting / lowering rotating body 3652. On the other hand, it is located slightly to the right, and the movable unit 3610 is in the state of the ascending position where the movable unit 3610 is located at the uppermost position by the elevating drive pin 3652b. In this state, the detection piece 3652c of the rotating rotator 3652 is detected by the lifting sensor 3655. In this state, the lifting drive pin 3652b is in contact with the right end in the lifting slit 3611c extending to the left and right of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610.

  Therefore, when the weight of the movable unit 3610 acts on the lifting drive pin 3652b, the lifting drive pin 3652b is rotated by the lifting drive pin 3652b in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Since it is in contact with the right end of the elevating slit 3611c, the elevating rotary body 3652 cannot rotate further clockwise in front view, and the movable unit 3610 is prevented from moving downward. ing. That is, the movable unit 3610 is locked at the raised position. Accordingly, the weight (load) from the movable unit 3610 does not act on the back-up / down drive motor 3654 via the up / down gear portion 3652a of the up-and-down rotating body 3652 and the up / down drive gear 3653. A load is not applied to the lifting drive motor 3654.

  When the elevating rotary body 3652 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the back elevating drive motor 3654 from the state of the elevating position, the elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotary body 3652 moves to the left. The orbit moves so as to move downward, and the movable unit 3610 receives the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 3657 through the elevating slit 3611c while the elevating drive pin 3652b slides to the left in the elevating slit 3611c. It will move downward in opposition. The elevating drive pin 3652b, which revolves when the elevating rotary body 3652 rotates counterclockwise, revolves downward beyond the same height as the rotation center of the elevating rotary body 3652, the horizontal direction of the elevating drive pin 3652b. Is changed, and moves downward while moving rightward, and slides rightward in the elevating slit 3611c.

  When the lifting drive pin 3652b is located immediately below the center of the rotating rotator 3652, the rotation of the rotating rotator 3652 is stopped, and simultaneously, the downward movement of the movable unit 3610 is stopped. Is in the lowered position where it has descended most (see FIG. 173 (b)). When the movable unit 3610 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the back-up / down drive motor 3654 is driven in the opposite direction to rotate the up-and-down rotating body 3652 clockwise in front view. Thus, it is possible to return to the ascending position. At this time, the upward movement of the movable unit 3610 is assisted by the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 3657, and the load on the back elevation drive motor 3654 is reduced.

  In this way, the back elevating / lowering unit 3600, via the movable side unit 3610, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, and the upper back rotation The base unit 3570 can be moved up and down (elevated and lowered) between a raised position and a lowered position.

[5-9f-6. Operation of the movable unit on the back]
Next, the operation of the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 to 183. FIG. 174 is an explanatory view showing a drive system for elevating and lowering when the movable unit of the back elevating / lowering unit is in the ascending position in the back upper movable effecting unit. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system for elevating when the side unit is at a lowered position. FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the action lever is in the action position when the movable unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotary base unit is in the horizontal position in the back upper movable effect unit. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operating lever is in the non-operating position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the upper back rotating base unit is in the horizontal position. FIG. 178 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system of the back upper rotating base unit when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotating base unit is in the horizontal position in the back upper movable effecting unit. FIG. 180 is an explanatory view showing a drive system of the back upper rotating base unit when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the upper back rotating base unit is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the horizontal position, and FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system of the upper back rotary base unit when the movable unit is at the lowered position and the upper rear rotary base unit is at the vertical position.

  FIG. 181 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operating lever is in the non-operating position when the movable unit is in the lowered position and the upper rotating base unit is in the vertical position in the upper movable movable effecting unit. FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the operation lever restricts rotation in the operation position when the movable unit is in the lowered position and the upper back rotation base unit is in the vertical position in the effect unit; When the movable unit is in the lowered position and the upper back rotating base unit is in the vertical position, the operating lever acts on the upper back first decorative body unit, the upper back second decorative body unit, and the upper back third decorative body unit in the operating position. FIG.

  In the normal state, the back upper movable rendering unit 3500 is in a state where the movable side unit 3610 of the back raising / lowering unit 3600 is at the highest position as shown in FIG. 3570 is in a horizontal position extending horizontally. In this state, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are arranged on the left and right sides with the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 at the center. In addition, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are provided. 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are respectively formed by the first opening / closing spring 3523, the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the third opening / closing spring 3563. Due to the urging force, they are in the closed position where they are in contact with each other.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 174, the elevating drive pin 3652b revolving around the fixed unit 3650 in the back elevating unit 3600 is located slightly to the right of the rotation center of the elevating rotating body 3652. Thus, the movable base 3611 is in contact with the right end in a vertically extending slit 3611c extending left and right. Thereby, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper side are connected to the lifting drive pin 3652b through the lifting slit 3611c of the movable side unit 3610. Even if the weight (load) of the rotation base unit 3570 and the movable unit 3610 acts, the lifting drive pin 3652b cannot revolve further clockwise in front view, and moves downward under the movable unit 3610. Is restricted and locked at the raised position.

  Therefore, in a normal state, the loads of the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, the upper back rotating base unit 3570, and the movable side unit 3610 are reduced. , Does not act on the back-up / down drive motor 3654, so that no load is applied to the back-up / down drive motor 3654. In the normal state, the detection piece 3652c of the elevating rotating body 3652 that revolves the elevating drive pin 3652b is detected by the elevating sensor 3655.

  From this normal state, when the back up / down drive motor 3654 is driven to revolve the up / down drive pin 3652b of the up / down rotating body 3652 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the up / down drive pin 3652b moves in the up / down slit 3611c. When the lifting / lowering drive pin 3652b descends, the movable unit 3610 moves downward. When the vertical drive pin 3652b reaches the lowest position, the revolution of the vertical drive pin 3652b stops. As a result, the movable unit 3610 is located at the lowered position (see FIG. 175).

  By moving the movable unit 3610 of the back elevating unit 3600 to the descending position, the back upper movable effect unit 3500 can move the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decoration. The body unit 3550 and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 can be located at the upper portion on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 189).

  When moving the movable side unit 3610 of the back up / down unit 3600 between the up position and the down position, the back upper movable effect unit 3500 moves the action lever 3586 of the back upper rotary base unit 3570 to the action position. I have. When the operating lever 3586 is moved to the left operating position by the driving of the operating lever drive motor 3583, as shown in FIG. 176, the lock piece 3586d of the operating lever 3586 is moved to the back upper first decorative body unit 3510. Is inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525 in the above. As a result, the operation lever 3586 cannot rotate around the first mounting shaft member 3525, and therefore, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 to which the operation lever 3586 is mounted moves to the first mounting shaft member 3525 (movable side). The rotation is locked with respect to the shaft cylinder portion 3611a) of the unit 3610. That is, the rotation of the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is locked at the horizontal position.

  The lock piece 3586d of the operation lever 3586 has a tapered tip, so that even if the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is slightly displaced from the horizontal position, the horizontal lock hole of the first mounting shaft member 3525 is not required. By inserting the back upper rotation base unit 3570 into the horizontal position, the rotation can be locked by inserting it into the 3525a.

  In the action lever 3586, although not shown, the second right extension 3586g of the action lever 3586 abuts on the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 from above. At the same time, the third extension 3586j (the left end of the slide attachment portion 3586c) of the action lever 3586 is in contact with a predetermined position of the third upper arm 3558 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 from the right. Thereby, rotation of the back upper second decoration unit 3530 around the axis around the second hole 3571b of the back upper rotation base 3571 and rotation of the back upper third decoration unit 3550 by the action lever 3586 are performed. The rotation of the base 3571 around the axis about the third hole 3571c is prevented. Therefore, by moving (moving up and down) the movable unit 3610 of the back elevating / lowering unit 3600 in the vertical direction, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570 are moved. Even if the vibration is applied, the action of the action lever 3586 located at the action position prevents the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570 from swinging. ing.

  Via the movable side unit 3610 of the back elevating unit 3600, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570, When the operating lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in the front view by the operating lever drive motor 3584 through the operating lever drive gear 3584 in the state where the operating lever is driven to the lower position, the operating lever pinion gear 3585 meshes with the operating lever pinion gear 3585. The action lever rack gear 3586a moves the action lever 3586 in the horizontal state to the right non-action position, and the lock piece 3586d comes out of the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 177). Thereby, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (the first hole 3571a of the upper back rotation base 3571, the shaft cylinder portion 3611a of the movable base 3611). Will be able to

  In the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 of the upper rear movable effect unit 3500, as shown in FIG. 178, the rotation base driven gear 3572 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 of the movable unit 3610, and The third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 mesh with the center link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610.

  Then, with the back upper rotation base unit 3570 in the horizontal position and the operation lever 3586 in the non-operation position, the back upper rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable unit 3610 is driven to view the rotation base drive gear 3614 in front view. When rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is connected to the center link gear 3611b (the first hole 3571a, the mounting cylinder) via the rotation base driven gear 3572 meshing with the rotation base drive gear 3614. It rotates in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front about the axis of the portion 3571d) (see FIG. 179). At this time, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back upper rotating base unit 3570, so that the back upper rotating base It does not rotate with the unit 3570.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the center link gear 3611b, the second upper third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3577 meshed with the center link gear 3611b. The link gear 3582 rotates while revolving around the central link gear 3611b, and rotates clockwise with respect to the rear upper rotation base 3571. When the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 rotate, their rotation is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b, and the second drive The link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 rotate in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the upper back rotating base 3571, respectively. That is, when the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is rotated clockwise in front view, the second upper and lower holes 3571b and 3571c at both longitudinal ends of the upper back rotating base 3571 are rotatably mounted. Drive link gear member 3573 and third drive link gear member 3578 revolve clockwise around first hole 3571a, and second drive link gear member 3573 and third drive link gear member 3578. Rotates (self-rotates) in the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c of the back upper rotating base 3571 in the counterclockwise direction, respectively.

  The second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610. The rotation angle between the upper back rotation base 3571 and the center link gear 3611b is the same as the rotation angle between the upper back rotation base 3571 and the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b. When the back upper rotation base 3571 is rotated around the center link gear 3611b, the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 keep the rotation direction constant, and the center link gear Revolve around 3611b (see FIGS. 179 and 180). Since the second upper and lower third decorative body units 3530 and 3550 are attached to the front surfaces of the second and third drive link gear members 3573 and 3578, respectively. When the back-upper rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back-upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the back-upper third decorative body unit 3550 hold the upper-back first decorative body unit 3510 in a state in which the vertical direction is kept constant. It will revolve around.

  When the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position, the back upper movable decoration unit 3500 has the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 arranged on the right side of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and Since the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is disposed on the left side of one decorative body unit 3510, when the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is rotated clockwise in front view to the vertical position, The second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are placed in the lower and upper sides of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, respectively, with their up-down directions kept as they are (FIG. 180). See). Therefore, when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged in order from the top. . In this state, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are each in the closed position, and are centered in the left-right center of the game area 5a. It is positioned so as to extend across substantially the entire height within the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 191).

  In a state where the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated from the horizontal position to the vertical position, as shown in FIG. 181, the operation lever 3586 of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 located at the non-operation position moves the lock piece. 3586d faces upward. In this state, when the action lever drive motor 3583 is driven to rotate the action lever pinion gear 3585 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the action lever 3586 is moved upward to move from the non-action position to the action position. The lock piece 3586d of the operation lever 3586 is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 182). As a result, the rotation of the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is locked at the vertical position.

  When the operating lever 3586 is moved from the non-operating position to the operating position in a state where the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the rear upper movable effecting unit 3500 moves the operating lever 3586 upward. Each tip (upper end) of the first working portion 3586f, the second working portion 3586i, and the third working portion 3586k of the 3586 is a receiving boss of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510. 3521b, the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3561 in the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are respectively brought into contact with the lower side to perform the first opening / closing. The arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 are moved upward.

  Then, when the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 each move upward, the first left movable of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 which has been in the closed position. The decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the third left of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 The movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other, and are in an open position (see FIG. 183).

  Thus, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 in the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 The first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between the one left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative in the back upper second decorative body unit 3530. The second fixed decorative lenses 3533 facing the space between the lens 3532 and the second fixed decorative lens 3533 are arranged in a straight line from top to bottom. In this state, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are each in the open position, and are centered in the left-right center of the game area 5a. The first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are positioned so as to extend longitudinally over substantially the entire height within the frame of the accessory 2500. They are vertically arranged with substantially the same width so as to be continuous with the back front lower central lens 3131 (see FIG. 192).

  In addition, in order to return the back upper movable effect unit 3500 to the normal state, it is possible to return to the normal state by performing the operation reverse to the above.

  In addition, the back upper movable rendering unit 3500 includes a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the first upper decorative body unit 3510, and a second left movable decorative lens of the second upper decorative body unit 3530. 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are in the closed position where they are in contact with each other, respectively. Can show decorations of different characters, and when the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged side by side from left to right, One character is horizontally written with a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and allows the player to recognize the concept of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible. When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged from top to bottom. The logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is written vertically, and the player can recognize the logo even in this state.

  As described above, according to the back upper movable effect unit 3500, the relative positions of the back upper rotating base unit 3570 with respect to the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550. The upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back side by the operating lever 3586 that moves between the operating position and the non-operating position according to a specific rotation position (horizontal position or vertical position). The different effects of the rotation lock (first action) and the movement to the open position (second action) can be exerted on the upper third decorative body unit 3550, so that different effects can be shown to the player. Can be made hard to get tired of, and a player can be entertained, and a decrease in interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

[5-9 g. Movable production unit under the back]
Next, the lower back movable rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 184 and the like. FIG. 184 (a) is a front view of a lower back movable effect unit of the back unit, FIG. 184 (b) is a rear view of the lower back movable effect unit, and FIG. FIG. 5 is a rear view showing the unit in a raised state. The lower back movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010. The lower back movable effect unit 3700 includes a lower back movable decorative unit 3710 having a predetermined three-dimensional decoration, and a back mounted in the back box 3010 to move the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 up and down. And a lower drive unit 3750.

  The lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is formed with a three-dimensional decoration in which a plurality of gates are arranged left and right under a roof extending left and right, and a part of each gate penetrates back and forth. A main body 3711, a plurality of lower back door members 3712, which are attached to each gate portion of the lower back decoration body 3711 in such a manner as to open and close in a double-door manner in a pair, and a lower back door member 3712. A lower back decorative body base 3713 attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body main body 3711 behind and extending left and right, and is slidably mounted in the left and right direction at a lower front part of the lower back decorative body base 3713. A lower opening / closing slider 3714 for hinge-rotating the lower back door member 3712 on the left side in a front view of a pair of the plurality of lower back door members 3712, and a left-right direction on an upper front surface of the lower back decoration base 3713. Slidably the back under the door member 3712 viewed from the front right side in mounted and are pairwise multiple subplantar door member 3712 comprises a, opening and closing the slider 3715 on which the hinge rotates.

  In addition, the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body base 3713. One end is attached to the upper end of the body 3716 and the opening / closing rotating body 3716 and the other end is attached to the lower back decoration base 3713. And a door closing spring 3717 for urging the opening / closing rotary member 3716 so that the hinge 3712 rotates in the closing direction. The door closing spring 3717 urges the opening / closing rotator 3716 to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in rear view.

  Further, the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is disposed on the rear side of the lower back decorative lens 3718 (see FIG. 194) attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body main body 3711. A lower back decorative board 3719 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a wiring cable 3701 attached to the back side of the lower back decorative body base 3713 and connecting the lower back decorative board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3775. And an upper wiring cover 3720 that can guide the The distribution cable 3701 is a flexible flat cable. The upper wiring cover 3720 is attached to the lower back decoration base 3713 to form a downwardly open space that can accommodate the wiring cable 3701. The upper wiring cover 3720 has a curved upper guiding portion 3720a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in a rear view.

  The lower back drive unit 3750 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010, penetrates back and forth to the upper left corner in front view, extends right and left, and shortens upward from the right end. A lower back drive base 3751 having a link slit 3751a extending therefrom, and a back surface mounted movably up and down on the front surface of the back lower drive base 3751 and having a lower back decoration unit 3710 mounted on the upper portion. A lower elevating base 3752, a pair of elevating arms 3753 rotatably mounted near the left and right ends on the front surface of the lower back driving base 3751 to move the lower elevating base 3752 up and down, and a lower back driving base 3751 The lower back drive motor 3754 attached to the side and the rotation of the lower back drive motor 3754 are transmitted to form a pair of A plurality of transmission gears 3755 to rotate the over arm 3753 directions different from each other, and a.

  The lower back drive unit 3750 has a lower end slidably mounted in a link slit 3751a of the lower back drive base 3751 and an upper end rotatably mounted on the opening / closing rotating body 3716 of the lower back decoration unit 3710. Provided is a bar-shaped link arm 3756. The upper end of the link arm 3756 is rotatably attached to the opening / closing rotary member 3716 at a position on the right side in rear view with respect to the rotation center. Thus, when the link arm 3756 is pulled downward, the opening / closing rotating body 3716 rotates clockwise in rear view against the urging force of the door closing spring 3717.

  Further, the lower back drive unit 3750 is attached to the rear side of the lower back drive base 3751, and relays the connection between the lower back decorative board 3719 and the lower back drive motor 3754 to the lower right relay board 3034. A board 3577 and a lower part which is attached above the lower back relay board 3775 on the rear side of the lower back drive base 3751 and which can guide a wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back relay board 3775 and the lower back decorative board 3719. A wiring cover 3758. The lower wiring cover 3758 forms an upwardly open space that can accommodate the wiring cable 3701 by being attached to the lower rear drive base 3751. Further, the lower wiring cover 3758 has a curved lower guiding portion 3758a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in a rear view.

  Subsequently, an operation of the lower back movable effect unit 3700 will be described. In the lower back movable effect unit 3700, in a normal state, the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is in the most lowered state (see FIGS. 184 (a) and (b)). In this state, the plurality of lower back door members 3712 are closed by the opening / closing rotator 3716, the lower opening / closing slider 3714, and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 by the urging force of the door closing spring 3717, and the back lower decorative body main body is closed. The doors of the plurality of gates 3711 (lower back door member 3712) are in a closed state. Further, in this state, it is located below the upper end of the portion forming the lower side of the frame-shaped center role 2500, and can hardly be seen from the front (see FIG. 129 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the bottom driving motor 3754 is driven to rotate the pair of lifting arms 3753 so that the sides facing each other move upward, the bottom bottom lifting base 3752 moves upward, and the bottom bottom The lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 attached to the lifting base 3752 rises.

  At this time, since the upper end of the link arm 3756 is attached to the opening / closing rotating body 3716 of the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710, the link arm 3756 rises together with the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710, and the lower end side is the lower back. The inside of the link slit 3751a of the drive base 3751 slides upward (to the left in rear view).

  Then, when the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 rises and the lower end of the link arm 3756 reaches the upper end of the link slit 3751a, the link arm 3756 cannot move upward any more. The lower back movable effect unit 3700 can temporarily stop the vertical movement of the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 at this position (first rising position). In this state, the portions of the plurality of gates of the lower back decoration body 3711 are positioned above the lower side (stage 2530) of the center role 2500, and the door is closed through the frame of the center role 2500. A plurality of gates in the state can be visually recognized (see FIG. 193).

  When the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 further rises in the first raising / lowering position, the link arm 3756 is pulled downward relative to the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 by the link slit 3751a. The opening / closing rotator 3716 attached to the upper end of the arm 3756 rotates clockwise in rear view against the urging force of the door closing spring 3717 (see FIG. 184 (c)). When the opening / closing rotator 3716 rotates clockwise in rear view, the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 slide in a direction to open the plurality of lower back door members 3712, and a plurality of lower back slider members 3712 are formed. The door of the gate (lower back door member 3712) is in an open state and the ascent is stopped. In the state where the lower back door member 3712 is in the open position (second ascent position), the lower lower decorative lens 3718 disposed on the rear side through the plurality of gates of the lower lower decorative body main body 3711 can be visually recognized (FIG. 194). See). In this state, by lighting the LED of the lower back decoration board 3719, the open gate can be made to emit light.

  In the lower back movable rendering unit 3700, a wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back decorative board 3719 of the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 and the lower back relay board 3775 of the lower back drive unit 3750 is connected to the upper wiring cover 3720. And the lower wiring cover 3758. The upper wiring cover 3720 has an upper guiding portion 3720a in which a portion between the upper side and the right side in rear view is curved and a lower end of the right side extends downward. The lower wiring cover 3758 has a lower guiding portion 3758a in which a portion between the lower side and the right side in rear view is curved and an upper end of the right side extends upward.

  The wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back decoration board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3775 is configured to extend rightward in rear view at the left end in rear view on the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720 on the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 side. On the lower back drive unit 3750 side, it is mounted so as to extend rightward in rear view at the left end in rear view on the lower side of the lower wiring cover. Thus, in the state where the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is at the normal position where it is most lowered, the wiring cable 3701 is curved and extends along the upper guide portion 3720a and the lower guide portion 3758a, and is not extremely bent. The lower back decoration board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3775 are connected well (see FIG. 184 (b)).

  On the other hand, in a state in which the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is raised, as shown in FIG. The lower back decoration board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3775 are connected to each other while being separated from the lower side of the cover 3758 and the right side (lower guide part 3758a) in rear view. Then, when the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 descends from the elevated state, it is guided by the upper guide section 3720a and the lower guide section 3758a, respectively, so that it is smoothly bent without being bent, and the upper wiring cover 3720 and the lower It will be accommodated in the wiring cover 3758. Therefore, even if the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is repeatedly moved up and down, the wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 and the lower back drive unit 3750 is repeatedly moved up and down. Bending can be prevented, and disconnection of the distribution cable 3701 can be prevented.

[5-10. Production on a game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 185 to 194. FIG. 185 is a front view of the game board in which the back middle left decorative body and the back middle right decorative body of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit have been moved to the appearance position on the center side. FIG. 186 shows that the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the back left movable rendering unit and the back right movable rendering unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position closer to the center, and each first decorative surface is directed forward. 187 is a front view of the game board shown in a folded state, and FIG. 187 rotates the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit from the state of FIG. 188 is a front view of the game board showing the front facing state, and FIG. 188 rotates the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit from the state of FIG. 186, respectively. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state with the 3rd decoration surface facing forward.

  FIG. 189 shows a first left movable decorative lens and a first right movable decorative lens of the first upper decorative body unit, a second left movable decorative lens and a second movable decorative lens of the second upper decorative body unit in the upper rear movable effect unit in the rear unit. After the second right movable decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit are each in the closed position, the back upper first decorative body unit and the back upper It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the second decorative body unit, and the upper back third decorative body unit is moved to the lower position while keeping the upper back rotating base unit in the horizontal position so that the third decorative body unit is horizontally arranged, FIG. 190 shows the back upper first decorative unit, the back upper second decorative unit, and the back upper third decorative unit by rotating the back upper rotating base unit 45 degrees clockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 189. Are lined up diagonally FIG. 191 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a folded state, and FIG. 191 shows that the back upper rotating base unit is further rotated 45 degrees clockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 192 is a front view of the game board in which the unit, the back upper second decorative body unit, and the back upper third decorative body unit are vertically arranged, and FIG. 192 shows the back upper first decorative body unit from the state of FIG. 191. The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit, and the third left movable decorative of the back upper third decorative body unit A front view of the game board showing the lens and the third right movable decorative lens in an open position, respectively, with the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens visible. is there.

  FIG. 193 is a front view of the game board in a state where the lower back movable decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit in the back unit is moved to the first ascending position, and FIG. 194 is the lower back movable decoration from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the body unit was further raised and moved to the second raising position.

  In a normal state, the game board 5 is, as shown in FIGS. 129 and 136, a display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center role 2500. Can be visually recognized from the player side (front). In the back middle movable effecting unit 3200, the left and right back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are located at the evacuation positions most separated from each other, which are behind the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 at the evacuation positions. In this state, a part of the back center left decorative body 3210 and a part of the back center right decorative body 3220 are slightly visible through the frame of the center role 2500. In the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back left decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position where it has moved to the leftmost position, and is located behind the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front decorative unit 3100 and almost from the front. can not see. In the back right movable rendering unit 3400, the back right decorative body 3410 is in a retracted position where it has moved to the rightmost side, and a part of the right side of the center role 2500 is seen through the frame of the center role 2500. I have.

  In the normal state, in the back upper movable effecting unit 3500, the movable side unit 3610 of the back raising / lowering unit 3600 is in the state of the highest raised position, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570 extends horizontally. It is in the horizontal position. Further, with the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 at the center, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 is arranged on the right side, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 is arranged on the left side. Then, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are provided. 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are respectively formed by the first opening / closing spring 3523, the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the third opening / closing spring 3563. Each of them is in a closed position where they are in contact with each other by the urging force, and each forms a decoration of a predetermined character. The back upper movable rendering unit 3500 is configured such that the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged side by side from left to right. A predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be horizontally displayed by the two characters, and the predetermined logo is displayed above the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the upper part of the center role 2500 in the frame. It is visible from the player side (front).

  The game board 5 is a front decoration unit of the back unit 3000 according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. 3100, back middle movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back right movable production unit 3400, back upper movable production unit 3500, and lower back movable production unit 3700 perform predetermined production (movable production and light emission production). Do.

  Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back middle movable effecting unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decoration which are separated from each other by driving the back middle drive motor 3254. The body 3220 is moved so as to approach each other, and is moved to a substantially central appearance position (see FIG. 185). As a result, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are in a state of being located substantially at the center of the front side of the game board effect display device 1600, and the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body The decoration with 3220 is combined. In this appearance position state, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 obstruct the effect image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, and strongly attracts the player's interest. In addition to being able to let them together, one large decoration (decoration imitating cherry blossom petals) is formed by combining them, making the player think that there is something good and expecting the game Can be raised.

  As an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, for example, the back left movement drive motor 3352 and the back right of the back left movement drive unit 3350 and the back right movement drive unit 3450 By driving the movement drive motor 3452, the back left decoration body 3310 and the back right decoration body 3410 are moved to the appearance position on the center side in the left-right direction via the back left rotation drive unit 3330 and the back right rotation drive unit 3430. As a result, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are in a state close to the center close to the left side and the right side in the frame-shaped center role 2500. In other words, it is located near the left and right ends on the front surface of the game board effect display device 1600 within the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIGS. 186 to 188).

  Thereby, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 become visible, which can surprise the player, and attracts the player's interest to the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410. Can be done. At this time, the back left decorative board 3334 and the back right decorative board 3434 emit light, so that the back left decorative board 3310 and the back right decorative board 3410 can be light-emitting decorated, further attracting the player's interest. Can be done. Further, in this state, the display screen of the game board effect display device 1600 can be seen from between the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410, so that the effect in collaboration with the effect image can be enjoyed.

  Then, with the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 moved to the appearance position, the back left rotary drive motor and the back right rotary drive motor (not shown) of the back left rotary drive unit 3330 and the back right rotary drive unit 3430. Thereby, the player can be entertained by rotating the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 around the axis extending vertically. When the rotating back left decorative body 3310 and back right decorative body 3410 are stopped, the first decorative surfaces 3311, 3411 of the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are stopped so as to face forward ( 186), the second decorative surfaces 3312, 3412 are stopped so as to face forward (see FIG. 187), and the third decorative surfaces 3313, 3413 are stopped so as to face forward (see FIG. 188). )can do. The decoration changes depending on the direction in which the rotation of the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 is stopped, so that the player can enjoy the changing decoration, and the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative with the desired decoration. Depending on whether or not the body 3410 stops, the body 3410 can be excitedly excited, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the back left movable rendering unit 3300 and the back right movable rendering unit 3400 can be independently moved, only one of them may be movable, or the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right When the rotation of the decorative body 3410 is stopped, the decorative surface facing forward may be different. Thereby, more various effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of.

  As an effect using the back movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, for example, in the state of the normal position, the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is set to the horizontal position, and the operation lever 3586 is set to the operation position. When the lifting drive pin 3652b revolves in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the lifting drive motor 3654, the movable unit 3610 moves downward with the revolution of the lift drive pin 3652b, and is attached to the movable unit 3610. The upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper upper third decorative body unit 3550 are lowered. When the elevation drive pin 3652b reaches the most lowered position and stops revolving, the upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the lower upper The three decorative body units 3550 are located at the lowered position side by side (horizontally) (see FIG. 189).

  In this state, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are positioned upward from the center in the vertical direction in the frame of the center role 2500. In this state, the upper half of the front surface of the game board effect display device 1600 is covered. As a result, a predetermined logo formed by three of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is displayed on the gaming board side effect display device 1600. Because it descends to the center side so as to block a part of the displayed effect image, it is possible to make the player think that something is good and raise the player's expectation for the game. Can be done.

  In the state of FIG. 189, when the operation lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in front view by the operation lever drive motor 3583 to move the operation lever 3586 from the operation position to the right non-operation position, the first mounting The lock piece 3586d inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the shaft member 3525 comes out of the horizontal lock hole 3525a, and the rotation lock of the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is released.

  When the rotation of the rotation base drive gear 3614 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front is rotated by the rotation motor 3612 on the back of the movable unit 3610 in a state where the rotation lock of the upper rotation base unit 3570 by the action lever 3586 is released. Via the rotating base driven gear 3572 meshing with the base driving gear 3614, the rear upper rotating base unit 3570 rotates clockwise in the front view around the center link gear 3611b. At this time, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back upper rotating base unit 3570, so that the back upper rotating base It does not rotate with the unit 3570.

  When the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates about the center link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3572 meshing with the center link gear 3611b are moved to the center link gear. 3611b, while revolving around itself, the rotation thereof is transmitted to the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, and the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear The members 3578 rotate in counterclockwise directions with respect to the upper back rotation base 3571, respectively. Therefore, when the back upper rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 keep the up-down direction constant, and the back upper first decoration Revolve around body unit 3510 (see FIGS. 190 and 191).

  Due to the rotation of the back upper rotation base unit 3570, when the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 revolve around the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 rotates. Since the vertical direction of the decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is maintained, a predetermined logo with three decorative characters can be sufficiently recognized by the player, so that horizontal writing is performed. You can enjoy the movement that the logo changes to a vertical logo.

  When the upper back rotation base unit 3570 rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the horizontal position in a front view, it reaches the vertical position and stops its rotation. In this state, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged in order from top to bottom (see FIG. 191). Thus, the logo formed by the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is positioned at the center of the center role 2500 within the frame. Since it looks like it runs across almost the entire height of the inside, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and to enhance the interest of the player.

  Then, the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 are vertically arranged. In this state, when the operating lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the operating lever drive motor 3583 to move the operating lever 3586 in the non-operating position upward and to the operating position, the operating lever 3586 is actuated. Is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525, and the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in a state of being rotationally locked at the vertical position.

  When the operating lever 3586 moves (rises) from the non-operating position to the operating position, the respective distal ends of the first operating portion 3586f, the second operating portion 3586i, and the third operating portion 3586k of the operating lever 3586. The upper end is the receiving boss 3521b of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body. The lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3561 of the unit 3550 is abutted from below, and the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 are respectively moved upward. Accordingly, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 and the second left movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 which have been in the closed position. 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other. To the open position (see FIG. 192).

  Thereby, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and the first left movable decorative so as to cross the left and right center in the game area 5a. A first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between the lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and a second fixed decorative lens facing from between the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532. The 3533 and the lower front center lens 3131 of the front decoration unit 3100 are aligned in a straight line from top to bottom, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Can be attached.

  Then, in this state, the LEDs mounted on the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, the back upper first decorative substrate 3514, the upper back second decorative substrate 3534, and the lower front lower decorative substrate 3134 emit light as appropriate. The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower front lower central lens 3131 are sequentially illuminated and decorated to guide the player's line of sight upward or downward. Can entertain the player. In addition, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower front lower center lens 3131 are formed to have substantially the same width as the door frame side effect display device 460 in the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the lower back front center lens 3131, and the door frame side effect display device 460 allow the center of the pachinko machine 1 in the left and right direction. Can be shown to the player as if to traverse (see FIG. 196).

  As an effect using the lower back movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000, for example, when the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is moved to the first elevating position by the lower back drive motor 3754 from a normal state, the lower back decorative body The main body 3711 is positioned above the stage 2530 in the center role 2500, and can be seen through the frame of the center role 2500. Thereby, the lower back decoration main body 3711 can be seen, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted (see FIG. 193). In the first elevating position, the plurality of gates of the back lower decorative body 3711 are closed by the plurality of lower back door members 3712.

  Then, when the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 slightly rises from the first raising / lowering position to the second raising / lowering position, the plurality of lower back door members 3712 rotate by hinges and the plurality of gates of the lower back decorative body 3711 are opened. (See FIG. 194). By performing the operation of opening the gate (lower back door member 3712), it is possible to make the player think that something is good, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game. In this state, when the LED of the lower back decoration board 3719 emits light to decorate the opened gate with light emission, it is possible to convince the player that a chance has come, and to increase the interest of the player. Can be.

  As described above, in the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back right movable production unit 3400, the back upper movable production unit 3500, and the back bottom Lighting effects, movable effects, display effects, and the like can be performed by using the movable effect units 3700 and the like as appropriate, and various effects can entertain the player, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

[5-11. Different Embodiment in Gaming Board]
Next, an embodiment different from the above in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 shows another embodiment of the game board, in which the movable effect unit on the back of the back unit is provided with an LED for emitting and decorating the stage of the center character and the center lens on the back of the back decoration unit. FIG. In the embodiment of FIG. 195, a plurality of lower LEDs 3534a capable of irradiating light downward are provided on the upper back second decorative substrate 3534 of the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 in the upper back movable effect unit 3500. is there.

  Thus, by rotating the back upper rotation base unit 3570 to the vertical position, the lower end of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is positioned at the center of the stage 2530 of the center role item 2500 (near the chance entrance 2535) and the back front decoration. The upper end of the back front lower center lens 3131 of the unit 3100 is in close proximity, and by emitting the lower LED 3534a in this state, the center of the stage 2530 and the upper part of the back front lower center lens 3131 can be decorated with light emission. . Therefore, even in a region where the decorative board provided with the LED cannot be arranged at the rear, light can be supplied from the outside (here, the upper side) to perform light emitting decoration, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. A luminous effect can be performed.

[5-12. Direction by door frame and game board]
Next, an effect using the door frame 3 and the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198. FIG. 196 is a view showing an example of a rear upper movable base effect unit in a rear unit of a game board, in which a rear upper rotating base unit is in a vertical position, and a first left movable decorative lens and a first right movable of a rear upper first decorative body unit. A decorative lens, a second left movable decorative lens and a second right movable decorative lens of the second upper decorative body unit, and a third left movable decorative lens and a third right movable decorative lens of the third upper decorative body unit respectively It is a front view of the pachinko machine which shows each 1st fixed decorative lens, 2nd fixed decorative lens, and 3rd fixed decorative lens in the state of an open position so that it could be visually recognized. FIG. 197 shows a state in which the third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the plate unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400, the first decoration surface of the decoration rotating body unit is directed forward, and the game board is in a normal state. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown. FIG. 198 shows a state in which the second decoration surface portion of the decoration rotator unit is directed forward in FIG. 197, and then, in the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board, the back upper rotation base unit is set to the vertical position. Along with the state, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit, and With the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit in the open position, respectively, the respective first fixed decorative lens, second fixed decorative lens, and third fixed decorative lens It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in the state which made it visually recognizable.

  First, an effect by the pachinko machine 1 in which the effect operation unit 400 provided with the effect display device 460 on the door frame side is attached to the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described. As an effect by the door frame 3 and the game board 5, for example, there is an effect using an effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 and a movable effect unit 3500 on the back of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5. Specifically, in the back-side movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the back-side rotating base unit 3570 is moved to the vertical position while the movable-side unit 3610 of the back-up / down unit 3600 is moved to the lowered position. , And moves the operation lever 3586 from the non-operation position to the operation position to move the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, the second upper decorative body unit. The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit are in the open position, respectively.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 196, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back surface formed in the left-right center of the pachinko machine 1 to have substantially the same width. The front lower center lens 3131 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are lined up from top to bottom, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact. Then, in this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decoration are formed by the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, the back upper first decorative substrate 3514, the upper back second decorative substrate 3534, and the lower front lower decorative substrate 3134. The lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower front lower center lens 3131 are sequentially illuminated from the top to decorate the player's line of sight with the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3. Can be enjoyed, and the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 can be enjoyed, and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 can be operated to surely enjoy the player participation type effect. I can do it.

  In addition, with respect to the above-mentioned embodiment, a second production operation unit 400A having a door frame side second production display device 460A is attached to the plate unit 320 instead of the production operation unit 400, and the door frame side second production operation unit 400A is attached. The same effect as described above may be performed with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 in the second effect display device 460A facing forward. With this, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Next, an effect by the pachinko machine 1 in which the third effect operation unit 400B including the decorative rotator unit 530 is attached to the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described. In this pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 197, in the normal state, the rear side of the third effect operation unit 400B attached to the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is passed through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. The first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotator unit 530 arranged (inside) can be seen from the player side (front). The first decorative surface portion 532 rotatable about a second axis CL2 orthogonal to the horizontally extending first axis CL1 has a logo decorative portion 532a having a central directionality oriented correctly.

  In addition, above the third production operation unit 400B (the plate unit 320), in the game area 5a of the game board 5 which can be seen through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3, the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center role 2500. The display screen of the game board effect display device 1600 attached to the game board can be viewed visually from the player side (front). In the rear middle movable effecting unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, the left and right rear middle left decorative body 3210 and the rear middle right decorative body 3220 are in the retracted position most separated from each other, and pass through the frame of the center role 2500. Some are slightly visible. The back left decorative body 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in a retracted position behind the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front decorative unit 3100, and is almost invisible from the front. The back right decorative body 3410 of the back right movable effect unit 3400 is in the retracted position, and a part of the right side of the center role 2500 can be seen through the frame.

  Further, in the back upper movable effecting unit 3500, the movable side unit 3610 of the back raising / lowering unit 3600 is in the raised position, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. With one decorative body unit 3510 in the center, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 is arranged on the right side, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 is arranged on the left side. A first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510; a second left movable decorative lens 3531 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530; In addition, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are in a closed position in which they are in contact with each other, and each is decorated with a predetermined character ( (Not shown). Therefore, in the upper part in the frame of the center role 2500, a predetermined logo in which three characters are arranged on the left and right is visible from the player side (front).

  From the state of FIG. 197, for example, in the rear upper movable effect unit 3500, the upper rear rotating base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position in a state where the movable unit 3610 of the lower elevation unit 3600 is moved to the lower position. The operating lever 3586 is moved from the non-operating position to the operating position to move the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative unit, and the second left movable of the lower upper second decorative unit. The decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the upper back third decorative body unit are in the open position, respectively.

  In this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower front lower central lens 3131 formed at substantially the same width at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged. , From the top to the bottom, so that the player can be surprised and give a strong impact. In this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513 are formed by the third upper decorative board 3554, the first upper decorative board 3514, the second upper decorative board 3534, and the lower lower decorative board 3134. , The second fixed decorative lens 3533 and the lower front center lens 3131 are sequentially illuminated from the top, so that the player's line of sight can be guided to the third effect operation unit 400B in the door frame 3. Then, when the light emission decoration from above reaches the third effect operation unit 400B, the decoration rotating body unit 530 in the operation button 410 is light-emission-decorated by the first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535 and the second decoration surface portion decoration substrate 536. At the same time, the decorative operation unit 530 with the first decorative surface portion 532 facing forward is rotated by 180 degrees around the horizontally extending first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528, and the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward (see FIG. 198). As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 that is visible through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 at the point of the player's line of sight guided to the third effect operation unit 400B below from within the game area 5a has a different decoration. Since it changes to the second decorative surface portion 533, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, to increase the expectation for the game, and to prompt the operation of the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B. By operating the operation button 410, it is possible to entertain a player-participatory effect and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, the effect of the third effect operation unit 400B by the decorative rotator unit 530 is desirably performed when the light-emitting decoration reaches the third effect operation unit 400B from above in the game area 5a. , It is possible for the player to enjoy a continuous production. The effect of the decoration rotating unit 530 is as described in [3-4h-7. Movable Effect in Third Effect Operation Unit] may be executed.

  In addition, as an effect different from the above, for example, from the state of FIG. 197, the decoration rotator unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B is rotated 180 degrees around the horizontally extending first axis CL1, and the second decoration The surface portion 533 is in a state of facing forward. In this state, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are illuminated and decorated by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, so that the player's interest is reduced to the third rendering operation below the game area 5a. Attract to unit 400B. Thereafter, the decoration rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL so that the second decoration surface portion 533 facing forward moves upward, and the first decoration surface portion 532 on the opposite side of the second decoration surface portion 533 is moved. , So as to appear upward from below. By switching between the second decorative surface portion 533 and the first decorative surface portion 532, the player's line of sight can be guided above the third effect operation unit 400B (in the game area 5a).

  Subsequently, in a state where the movable side unit 3610 of the back up / down unit 3600 in the back up movable effect unit 3500 is moved to the down position, the back up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position, and the action lever 3586 is turned off. Moved from the operation position to the operation position, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right of the back upper second decorative body unit The movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit are respectively moved to the open position, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the third fixed decorative lens 3513, The two fixed decorative lenses 3533 and the lower front center lens 3131 are arranged vertically. Then, by illuminating them in order from the bottom, it is possible to make the effect starting from the third effect operation unit 400B appear to have moved upward from the third effect operation unit 400B, so that a feeling of rising momentum is felt. A possible effect can be shown to the player, and the mood of the player can be enhanced to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. The effect starting from the third effect operation unit 400B may be started when the player presses the operation button 410 at a predetermined timing during execution of the player participation type effect.

  In this way, various effects can be shown to the player, and the various effects can make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, and can entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 135 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is rotated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Then, the ball is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be driven harder as the clockwise rotation is performed. , Game balls can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a game ball is placed on the obstacle nail. By the contact, the flowing speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 in a front view from the highest portion, while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward. When a game ball enters the chance entrance 2535 at the center of the stage 2530 and is released from the chance exit 2536 into the game area 5a, the chance exit 2536 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that the probability is high. The first start port 2002 is accepted. When game balls are received in the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged from the area other than the center into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a are opened in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and the attacker unit 2400, and the opening in the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the state such as the first grand prize hole 2005.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side slope 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, , The first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, etc. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed), It is discharged to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400 from the right guide passage 2540 of the center role 2500. Immediately below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540, a gate passage 2420 provided with a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 is arranged, and a game ball enters the gate passage 2420 with a high probability. I do.

  Then, when the right-hitting game ball enters the gate passage 2420 and passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. The second starting port door 2411 that closes the starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), so that game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004. When the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. You.

  In the present embodiment, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 (for example, 0. 0). 01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. The shorter the normal fluctuation time, the more the game balls for which the “normal hit” has been drawn in the gate unit 2003 can be accepted in the second starting port 2004.

  Note that if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, it is not possible to start suggesting the normal lottery result. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to a maximum of four, and for more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", " A special lottery result that generates "medium hit", "small hit", "per probability change", "per time reduction", etc. is performed. Then, the lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). Note that special lottery results obtained by accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, and “5R big hit”. 15R jackpot "," probability change (probability change) "," time saving (time reduction) "," probability change time reduction "," probability change time reduction no hit "," second big hit (for example, per character) ", etc. is there.

  When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the special fluctuating time, the first special winning opening 2005 is ready to accept a game ball in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first special winning opening 2005 when the first special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is provided from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. ) Are paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the first special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting game balls, by allowing the first special winning opening 2005 to accept game balls, it is possible to pay out many game balls and entertain the player. Can be.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the first winning port 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern for closing afterwards is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first big winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which game balls can be received, or the first big winning When one of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls into the mouth 2005 is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern in which the game balls cannot be received in a closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot” are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed. ("Time savings").

  When the special lottery result is “second big hit (for example, per hit)”, the second big winning opening 2006 is a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 3.0 seconds), Alternatively, the opening state is maintained until one of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, only one) of game balls is satisfied. When a game ball is received in the second special winning opening 2006 when the second special winning opening 2006 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out. Then, when the game balls received in the second special winning opening 2006 are distributed to the first receiving opening 2431 by the sorting piece 2433, the first special winning opening 2005 is opened and closed as “5R big hit”, and the sorting piece 2433 is set. When it is distributed to the second reception port 2432, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed as “15R big hit”.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the special lottery result by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. You. The number of reserved special lottery results to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is indicated by the function display unit 1400 and the game board effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that the plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image by being indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. The effect image suggesting a special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is a display in which three symbol rows composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left and right direction, and each symbol row is fluctuated and displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol columns are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol columns to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a fixed image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the gaming board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, or the like) according to the selected special lottery result occurs.

  In addition, the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the game board effect display device 1600 (the symbol row varies. (The time until the final image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, back decoration unit 3100 of back unit 3000, back middle movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500 It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the movable effect unit 3700, and the underside movable effect unit 3700, and the like. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[7. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B in the present embodiment is the operation receiving portion of the present invention, and the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 of the third base unit 520 in the present embodiment is the first rotating means of the present invention. The rotator base unit 531 of the decorative rotator unit 530 in the present embodiment is a rotator of the present invention, and the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f of the rotator base unit 531 in the present embodiment is a joint decorative portion of the present invention. The first decorative surface part 532 and the second decorative surface part 533 in the embodiment are the decorative surface part of the present invention, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 in the present embodiment is the second rotating means of the present invention, and the first decorative part in the present embodiment. The surface decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface decorative substrate 536 serve as the decorative surface light emitting means of the present invention, Decorative portion decorative board for connecting the decorative portion light emitting means of the present invention, and corresponds respectively.

[8. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 532 are passed through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B. Of the two decorative surface portions 533, the first decorative surface portion 532 is visible, and the decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 enhances the appearance of the operation buttons 410. The first decorative surface portion 532 seen through the operation button 410 is a rotatable body that is rotatably supported around a first axis CL1 extending horizontally and parallel to a surface of the operation button 410 (a surface orthogonal to the central axis CL). The base units 531 are arranged in rows at intervals in the circumferential direction about the first axis CL1. In this state, when the rotator base unit 531 is rotated about the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528, the first decorative surface portion 532 located immediately behind the operation button 410 is While moving from the position directly behind, the next second decorative surface portion 533 arranged in a row at a circumferential interval moves right behind the operation button 410. Therefore, when the rotator base unit 531 is rotated around the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528, the first decorative surface portion 532 visible through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 becomes another second decorative surface portion. 533, and the decoration seen through the operation button 410 can be changed.

  When rotating the rotator base unit 531 around the first axis line CL1 to switch the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 viewed through the operation button 410, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface which are spaced apart from each other. Since the peripheral decorative portion 531f of the rotator base unit 531 is arranged between the surface portions 533, since the space between the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is decorated, the operation button 410 is provided. The appearance inside the operation buttons 410 can be prevented from deteriorating, and the appearance inside the operation buttons 410 can be improved. Then, by the rotation of the rotating body base unit 531 about the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528, the second decoration surface portion 533 or the first decoration surface portion 532 moved to the position directly behind the operation button 410 has its second The axis CL2 extends perpendicular to the surface of the operation button 410. In this state, when the second decoration surface portion 533 or the first decoration surface portion 532 visible through the operation button 410 is rotated by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, the second decoration surface portion 533 or the first decoration surface portion 532 is rotated. While being visible through the operation button 410, the user can rotate the device and the player can see the second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 532 that rotates with the device behind the operation button 410.

  Alternatively, in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, respectively, the rotating body is operated by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528. When the base unit 531 is rotated around the first axis line CL1 and the position between the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is moved to a position visible from the player side through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Thus, the rotating first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 and the non-rotating peripheral surface decorative portion 531f can be simultaneously displayed.

  In this way, by rotating the rotating body base unit 531 around the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528, it is possible to show a decoration that changes to a different decoration through the operation button 410, and to operate the effect operation unit. By rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis line CL2 by the second drive motor 534, it is possible to show the decoration rotating with the operation button 410 through the operation button 410. While rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis line CL2 by the two drive motor 534, the rotating body base unit 531 is rotated around the first axis line CL1 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528. By this, the first decorative surface portion rotating through the operation button 410 32 and the second decorative surface portion 533 and the non-rotating peripheral surface decorative portion 531f can be shown at the same time, so that various decorations can be shown to the player with the operation buttons 410, and the operation buttons operated by the player can be displayed. The decorativeness of 410 can be enhanced, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, when the rotating body base unit 531 is rotated around the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528, the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 that was first seen moves in the rotation direction. Since the next second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 532 can be seen (appears) after the peripheral decorative portion 531f has been seen, the next second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 532 can be seen by the peripheral decorative portion 531f. Since the appearance of the decorative surface portion 532 can be delayed so as to give a pause, the player is given time to imagine what kind of decoration the next second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 532 is. It is possible to increase the expectation of the player depending on whether or not the next second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 532 is a desired decoration imagined, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. It is possible.

  Further, when the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, the player can decorate the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533. Since it is difficult to clearly recognize, for example, the first operation surface unit 532 and the second operation surface unit 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the second operation motor 534, and the first operation unit When the rotator base unit 531 is rotated around the first axis line CL1 by the one drive motor 528, and the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f is positioned immediately after the operation button 410, the rotation of the rotation body base unit 531 is caused by the rotation around the second axis line CL2. Between the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 where the decoration looks unclear, the stationary peripheral decorative portion 531f Since such a that the decoration is clearly visible, can be strongly attracted the interest of the player on the peripheral surface decorative portions 531 f, it can be to direct the attention of the player to the operation button 410. Thereafter, the rotator base unit 531 is rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528, and either the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 is operated with the operation button. When the rotation around the second axis CL2 by the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534 is stopped after being positioned immediately after the first decoration surface 410, the first decoration surface portion 532 or the second decoration is passed through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. An effect in which the face portion 533 can be seen can be shown to the player. Thereby, by positioning the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f immediately after the operation button 410, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410, and the first decorative member 531f moving on both sides of the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can be drawn. Depending on which of the decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 moves immediately after the operation button 410 and the decoration becomes clearly visible, it is possible to raise the expectation by exciting and exciting. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, two of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a peripheral decorative portion is provided between the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. Since the 531f is disposed, the adjacent two of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be clearly separated by the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f. Therefore, when the rotator base unit 531 is rotated around the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528, and the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 visible through the operation button 410 is switched, halfway. By seeing the peripheral decorative portion 531f, the player can clearly recognize that the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 has been switched, and the change of the decoration on the operation button 410 can be surely performed. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the rotating body base unit 531 rotating around the first axis CL1 is provided with the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 and the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f, the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f produces an effect. Because the operation unit first drive motor 528 rotates around the first axis CL1 together with the first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533, the first decorative surface 532 and the second decorative surface 533 around the first axis CL1 are rotated. Regardless of the rotation position, the position of the peripheral decorative portion 531f seen between the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 does not change, and the same portion (decoration) can always be shown. Therefore, the decoration of the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can be easily understood by the player, and the decoration effect of the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, by providing the peripheral decoration unit decorative substrate in the rotating body base unit 531, the peripheral decoration unit 531 f can be illuminated and decorated. By rotating around the uniaxial line CL1, the peripheral decorative portion 531f disposed between the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. When the peripheral decorative portion 531f is illuminated and decorated when moved to the position, the peripheral decorative portion 531f can be seen more clearly, and the decorative effect of the peripheral decorative portion 531f can be reliably exhibited. In addition, by making the peripheral decoration portion 531f emit light, the peripheral decoration portion 531f can be made more conspicuous in the operation button 410, so that the player's interest can be directed to the operation button 410. Can be encouraged to participate in the player-participatory effect, and the player's participatory effect can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the peripheral decorative portion 531f is illuminated and decorated with the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 positioned immediately after the operation button 410, the outer periphery of the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 is provided. Since the outside is bright, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation buttons 410, and it can be made to think that there is something good for the game, thereby increasing the expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In this state, since the peripheral decoration portion 531f that cannot be seen through the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, when the peripheral decoration portion 531f becomes visible, the player has an advantageous gaming state (for example, “ It can be considered that it means the arrival of a chance to generate a "big hit game"), so that the rotating body base unit 531 rotates around the first axis CL1 so that the peripheral decoration 531f decorated with light emission can be seen. Depending on whether or not the button is located directly behind the button 410, the player can be excited and excited, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the game board 5 in which a game using a game ball is performed through the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3. The game area 5a can be seen, the operation buttons 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B attached to the front of the dish unit 320 can be seen below the through-hole 111, and the two second buttons 411 can be seen through the transparent button lenses 411 of the operation buttons 410. One of the one decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is visible, and the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 is improved by the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 visible through the operation button 410. In this state, when the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated about the first axis CL1 extending horizontally by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 of the third base unit 520, it can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. The first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 can be switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 532, and the decoration seen through the operation button 410 can be changed. On the other hand, the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 visible through the operation button 410 is orthogonal to the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, and the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 When rotated around the second axis line CL2 passing through the center, the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 is rotated in a state where it can be seen through the operation button 410, so that the operation button is provided to the player. The first decorative surface 532 or the second decorative surface 533 rotating around the back of the 410 can be shown. The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be illuminated by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536.

  As described above, the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 visible through the operation button 410 can be changed below the through-hole 111 (game area 5a), and the first decorative surface portion visible through the operation button 410. Since the 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 can be rotated around and the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be illuminated, the player can see various decorations on the operation button 410. It is possible to make the player hard to get tired of, and to strongly attract the interest of the player to the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B arranged below the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the player-participatory performance by operating the operation button 410, and It can be a pleasing suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the normal state, in the game area 5a which can be seen through the through hole 111 on the upper side of the operation button 410, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the second fixed decorative lens 3500 in the upper movable effect unit 3500 of the rear unit 3000. Since the third fixed decorative lens 3553 is located in the upper part of the frame of the center role 2500 near the periphery of the gaming area 5a (in front view), the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is provided. , The second fixed decorative lens 3533 and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are relatively inconspicuous, so that the game in the game area 5a is relatively conspicuous, so that the player can enjoy the game. Then, when the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are moved to the second production position by the back upper rotating base unit 3570 and the back raising / lowering unit 3600, the first fixed decorative. Since the lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are vertically arranged so as to be continuous above the lower front center lens 3131 of the front decoration unit 3100, the first fixed lens is provided. The decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the lower front center lens 3131, and the operation buttons 410 are aligned in a vertical line, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. Can be. In this state, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the lower front center lens 3131, and the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 visible through the operation button 410. , Respectively, can be illuminated and decorated so as to extend vertically across the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (game area 5a) on the front of the pachinko machine 1, thereby giving an impact to the player. Not only can it be done, but it can also increase the sense of expectation that there is something good for the player, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Therefore, from a normal state, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the lower front lower central lens 3131, and the operation buttons 410 are vertically aligned, The first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 (the decorative rotator unit) which can be seen through the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the lower front center lens 3131, and the operation button 410. When the decoration is performed in the order of 530), the player's line of sight can be guided to the operation button 410 on the lower side of the lower front lower center lens 3131 so that the operation button 410 is noticed. The first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 is rotated around the first axis line CL1 or around the second axis line CL2. By doing so, it is possible to reliably show the production by them, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and In addition, the operation of the operation button 410 can be prompted in the player participation-type production, and the player's participation-type production can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player.

  In addition, since the second decorative surface portion 533 of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is provided with the rotating decorative portion 533a and the fixed decorative portion 533b, the second decorative surface portion 533 can be used as the production operation unit. When rotated by the drive motor 534, only the rotating decorative portion 533a rotates and the fixed decorative portion 533b does not rotate, so that an impression different from that of the first decorative surface portion 532 that rotates as a whole can be given, and a more versatile effect can be obtained. It can be shown to the player and entertained. In addition, as described above, the second decorative surface portion 533 including the rotating decorative portion 533a and the fixed decorative portion 533b can give an impression different from the first decorative surface portion 532 that rotates as a whole, and thus the second decorative surface portion 533 can be given. It is possible to impart a premium feeling to the surface portion 533, and when the decoration operation unit 530 is rotated by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528, the second decoration surface portion 533 stops right behind the operation button 410. Depending on whether or not it is possible, the player can be excited and excited, the expectation of the player can be increased, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since all the first decorative surface portions 532 and the second decorative surface portions 533 are rotated around the respective second axes CL2 by one effect operation unit second drive motor 534, the first decorative surface portions 532 and Compared to the case where an actuator (drive motor) is provided for each of the second decorative surface portions 533, only one space for providing the drive motor is required, and the operation buttons 410 and the first decorative surface portion 532 and The space for disposing the second decorative surface portion 533 (the decorative rotator unit 530) or other members can be increased, and the operation buttons 410, the decorative rotator unit 530, and the like can be made larger to stand out. Can be.

  In addition, when the decoration rotator unit 530 is rotated by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528, the first decoration surface portion 532 or the second decoration surface portion 533 visible through the operation button 410 moves in the vertical direction and the second decoration surface portion 533. Or since it seems to switch with the first decoration surface part 532, the effect that the switching second decoration surface part 533 or the first decoration surface part 533 appears from above or below can be shown to the player. . Therefore, for example, with the first decorative surface portion 532 facing forward, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the lower front lower center lens 3131, and the operation button 410 are moved. In a state in which the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower central lens 3131 are illuminated from the top in the state of being aligned vertically, the second decoration is performed. In the case where the surface portion 533 appears and is switched from above, the second decorative surface portion 533 is in the upper game area 5a, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens. Since it appears that it has descended from above through 3533 and the lower front center lens 3131, revelation is given to the player from above. It is possible to make the player feel that there is something good, to raise the expectation of the game, and to make the operation buttons 410 noticeable. , The operation of the operation button 410 can be encouraged, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player. Alternatively, with the second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotated to make the first decorative surface portion 532 appear from below so as to be switched. The three fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower front lower central lens 3131 are vertically aligned (may be arranged in advance vertically). When the light emitting decoration is performed from the bottom in the order of 3131, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first decorative surface portion 532 rising from the bottom is in the upper game area 5a. It goes up along the back front lower central lens 3131, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553. Since it looks like it is going to go, it can give the player the impression that the rising momentum will be high, it can make the player think that a chance has come, and can suppress the decrease in interest in the game, Interest can be directed from the operation buttons 410 on the lower side of the game area 5a into the game area 5a, and subsequent games and effects in the game area 5a can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the surface of the operation button 410 is three-dimensionally bulged outward in a hemispherical shape, the space behind the operation button 410 (the button inner space AS) can be widened. Therefore, when the decoration rotator unit 530 is rotated about the first axis CL extending horizontally on the rear side of the operation button 410, the surface of the decoration rotator unit 530 (the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531, the first decoration, Surface portion 532, the second decorative surface portion 533, etc.) can be made difficult to contact the inner surface of the operation button 410, and the decorative rotator unit 530 can be satisfactorily rotated. Further, since the space behind the operation buttons 410 (the space AS within the button) can be widened, the decoration rotating body unit 530 (the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533) can be made larger. Therefore, the large first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 can be made more conspicuous from the player side, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533. it can.

  Furthermore, during the stop of the rotation by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 and the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, and during the rotation of the decoration rotator unit 530, the first decoration surface portion 532, and the second decoration surface portion 533, and the like. Since the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be illuminated and decorated by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 By performing the luminous decoration, the decorativeness of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be further enhanced, and the appearance of the game can be improved, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. Also, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are made to stand out by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, and the interest of the player is increased by the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. Can be directed to the operation button 410 with which the player can see, so that it is possible to encourage participation in the player participation type operation in which the operation button 410 is operated, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is provided in the decorative rotator unit 530, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is provided at a different position from the decorative rotator unit 530. Then, a mechanism for transmitting the rotation from the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 to the shaft member 532d extending coaxially with the second axis CL to rotate the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. Can be simplified. Further, since it is not necessary to secure a space for disposing the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 outside the decorative rotator unit 530, the operation buttons 410 are securely disposed outside the decorative rotator unit 530 accordingly. Or other decorative members can be arranged, and it is possible to easily realize the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects.

  Further, as described above, in the normal state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the second fixed decorative lens 3533 are located in the upper part in the frame of the center role object 250 at the first production position. , And the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the second fixed decorative lens 3533 move with respect to the player because the third fixed decorative lens 3553 and the second fixed decorative lens 3533 move away from the player. , The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the lower front lower center lens 3131, and the operation button 410 can be hardly imagined to be aligned. By the rotation base unit 3570 and the back elevating / lowering unit 3600, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the By moving the fixed decorative lens 3533 to the second production position, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the lower front center lens 3131, and the operation button 410 are aligned. Due to the unexpectedness of the state, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Also, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the lower front center lens 3131, and the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 on the rear side of the operation button 410 are , Respectively, so that the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the second fixed decorative lens 3533 are moved to the second production position, and they are vertically aligned. When each of the pachinko machines 1 is decorated with light emission, a single band of light that passes through the pachinko machine 1 can be shown, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Since the band of light is conspicuous, it can be easily noticed by other players. It can be a pachinko machine 1 high appeal against the player.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the decorative rotator unit 530 is provided with the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 in the circumferential direction around the first axis CL. Although the arrangement is shown as being arranged, it is not limited to this, and three or more arrangements may be arranged in the circumferential direction, such as a third decoration surface portion and a fourth decoration surface portion.

  In the above-described embodiment, the decorative rotator unit 530 is rotatable only in an angle range of 180 degrees with respect to the first axis CL, but is rotated in an angle range of up to 360 degrees. It may be made possible, or may be made to be able to rotate indefinitely.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the first axis CL that is the rotation axis of the decorative rotator unit 530 is shown as extending horizontally. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be extended vertically so as to be orthogonal.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the decoration that penetrates the outer peripheral surface of the rotator base unit 531 is shown as the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f provided in the rotator base unit 531 of the decorative rotator unit 530. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a three-dimensional decoration or a two-dimensional decoration such as a sticker or printing.

  In addition, this application intends to solve the problem in the conventional example (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-169251).

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to receive a game medium in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted in the game area, and a game medium in the game area. (General winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large winning opening, character winning opening), V winning opening, etc.), and game media can be received in the receiving opening. Then, a privilege (such as payout of a game medium, occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous in opening / closing a variable winning opening, etc.) is given to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  In a conventional gaming machine, an operation unit having an operation receiving unit that can be operated by a player is provided at a position below the game area, and when a player participation type effect is executed, the player receives an operation. It has been proposed that the user can enter into a production and entertain by operating a section.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the operation receiving portion of the operation portion only emits light by the LED provided inside, the decorativeness is poor, and some players get tired of the decoration of the operation receiving portion early. As a result, there is a problem that interest in the operation receiving unit is weakened, and a player-participation-type effect of operating the operation receiving unit cannot be sufficiently enjoyed, thereby reducing the interest of the player in the game.

  In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game by increasing the decorativeness of an operation receiving unit operated by a player. The following are listed as typical examples.

Means 1: In a gaming machine,
"An operation receiving section that can be operated by a player having a transparent portion,
Each is rotatable around a second axis orthogonal to a first axis extending in parallel with the surface of the operation receiving portion, and a circumferential direction around the first axis behind the operation receiving portion. A plurality of decorative surface portions which are arranged at intervals in the
A connecting decorative portion arranged to connect between the plurality of decorative surface portions, and a predetermined decoration is formed on the outer surface,
First rotating means for rotating a plurality of the decorative surface portions around the first axis, such that the decorative surface portion that becomes visible through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion changes,
And a second rotating means for rotating the decorative surface around the second axis. "

  Here, the “operation receiving unit” is a portion that is directly touched by the player in the operation unit (effect operation unit) operated by the player, and “the player performs a pressing operation”, “the player performs a touch operation”. Stuff "," the thing which the player rotates and operates ", and the like. In addition, examples of the surface shape of the “operation receiving portion” include “a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward”, “a planar shape”, and the like, and examples of the outer peripheral shape include “a circular shape”, “an elliptical shape”, and “ Polygonal shape "," indeterminate shapes such as heart shape and clover shape ", and the like. Further, as the “surface of the operation receiving portion”, “the surface formed by the outer peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion”, “when the operation receiving portion moves by the operation of the player, And a plane orthogonal to the plane ".

  In addition, the decoration of the "decorative surface" includes "decoration that imitates items in line with the concept of gaming machines", "decoration that imitates patterns and patterns in accordance with the concept of gaming machines", and "decoration in accordance with the concept of gaming machines." Decoration that imitates a logo, a decoration that imitates a character in line with the concept of a gaming machine, and the like. Further, as the “decorative surface portion”, “the one that rotates as a whole when viewed from the direction in which the second axis extends”, “the one that rotates around the second axis when viewed from the direction in which the second axis extends” And a fixed decorative portion that does not rotate around the second axis. " In addition, examples of the outer shape of the plurality of decorative surfaces arranged in the circumferential direction include “spherical shape”, “cylindrical shape”, and “polygonal prism shape”.

  Further, the "connecting decorative portion" refers to a plurality of decorative surface portions arranged in rows at intervals in the circumferential direction, and connects a gap between the decorative surface portions when viewed at least through a transparent portion of the operation receiving portion. Any shape may be used as long as it looks (filled), and may be arranged on the same surface as the decorative surface portion, or may be arranged on a surface different from the decorative surface portion. In addition, as the “joining decorative part”, “the one provided on the rotating body that is rotatably supported around the first axis and has a plurality of decorative surface parts (around the first axis together with the plurality of decorative surface parts) ), And those supported non-rotatably about the first axis. Also, the decorations of the "joint decoration part" include "decorations related to the decoration of the two decorative surfaces adjacent to both sides", "decorations that imitate pictures and patterns according to the concept of gaming machines", "games Decorations that imitate items in line with the concept of machine, decorations that imitate logos that match the concept of gaming machines, and decorations that imitate characters that match the concept of gaming machines. Or a flat decoration such as a sticker or printing.

  In addition, the “second axis” may be separately provided in each of the plurality of decorative surface portions, or, in a certain decorative surface portion, another decorative surface portion exists on the opposite side with respect to the first axis. In this case, the decorative surface portions may be rotatably supported by one second axis.

  Further, as the "first rotating means" and "second rotating means", "the means for rotating the rotating body by transmitting the rotation of the motor by a plurality of gears" and "the transmitting and retreating of the solenoid and the piston by the crank or the rack gear" To rotate the rotator ". Further, the “second rotating unit” may be provided on the rotating body, or may be provided at a position different from the rotating body. Further, as the "second rotating means", "a device for rotating all the decorative surfaces with one actuator", "a device for rotating all the decorative surfaces with one actuator at the same time", and "a plurality of decorative surfaces are independent of each other" That rotates only the decorative surface portion located directly behind the operation receiving portion, and the like. Examples of the "first rotating means" and "second rotating means" include "rotating only within a predetermined angle range", "rotating infinitely and infinitely", and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine has an operation receiving portion having a transparent portion that can be operated by a player, and a second axis orthogonal to the first axis extending in parallel with the surface of the operation receiving portion. A plurality of decorative surface portions, which are rotatable to each other and are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction around the first axis on the rear side of the operation receiving portion, each of which has a different decoration from each other, It is arranged so as to connect between the plurality of decorative surface portions, and the decorative surface portion that is visible through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion and the connecting decorative portion in which a predetermined decoration is formed on the outer surface are changed. A first rotating means for rotating the plurality of decorative surface portions around the first axis, and a second rotating means for rotating the decorative surface portions around the second axis.

  Thereby, when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, a certain one of a plurality of decorative surface portions arranged around the first axis extending in parallel with the surface of the operation receiving portion through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion. One decorative surface portion is visible, and in this state, when the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion located immediately behind the operation receiving portion becomes the operation receiving portion. Along with moving from the position directly behind, the next decorative surface portion arranged in a row at an interval in the circumferential direction moves right behind the operation receiving portion. Therefore, when the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion visible through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion can be switched to another decorative surface portion, and the decoration visible through the operation receiving portion can be changed. Can be changed. At this time, when the plurality of decorative surface portions rotate around the first axis and move between the decorative surface portions to a position visible from the player side through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion, the space between the decorative surface portions is changed. Since the decoration is performed by the connecting decorative portion, it is possible to prevent the appearance in the operation receiving portion from being deteriorated, and to improve the appearance in the operation receiving portion. The second axis is perpendicular to the surface of the operation receiving portion in the decorative surface portion moved to the position directly behind the operation receiving portion by the rotation about the first axis by the first rotation means. . In this state, when the decorative surface portion that is visible through the operation receiving portion is rotated by the second rotating means, the decorative surface portion rotates in a round state while being visible through the operation receiving portion, and the At the back of the operation receiving part, the decoration surface part which rotates with the wobble can be shown. Alternatively, in a state where the plurality of decorative surface portions are respectively rotated around the second axis by the second rotating means, the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, and the decorative surface portions are connected to each other. When the space is moved to a position visible from the player side through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion, the rotating decorative surface portion and the non-rotating connecting decorative portion are simultaneously shown through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion. Can be. In this way, by rotating the plurality of decorative surface portions around the first axis by the first rotating means, it is possible to show the decoration changing to a different decoration through the operation receiving portion, and the decorative surface portion by the second rotating means. By rotating around the two axes, it is possible to show the decoration rotating with the operation through the operation receiving portion, and, while rotating the decoration surface portion around the second axis by the second rotating means, a plurality of rotations by the first rotating means. By rotating the decorative surface portion about the first axis, the rotating decorative surface portion and the non-rotating connecting decorative portion can be simultaneously displayed through the operation receiving portion. It is possible to enhance the decorativeness of the operation receiving section operated by the player, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, when the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion that was initially seen moves in the rotation direction, and the next decorative surface portion is seen after the joint decorative portion comes into view. Since it can be seen (appears), the appearance of the next decorative surface can be delayed by the connecting decorative portion, so that the player can know what kind of decorative surface the next decorative surface is. It is possible to give time to imagine, and it is possible to increase a player's expectation and suppress a decrease in interest by whether or not the next decorative surface is the desired decorative surface.

  In addition, when the decoration surface portion is rotated around the second axis by the second rotating means, it becomes difficult for the player to clearly recognize the decoration of the decoration surface portion. While rotating around the two axes, the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, and the connecting decorative portion is positioned immediately after the operation receiving portion. The decoration of the stationary connecting decorative part is clearly visible between the two decorative surface parts due to the rotational movement, so that the player's attention is connected and strongly attracted to the decorative part. And the player's interest can be directed to the operation receiving section. Thereafter, the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis by the first rotating means, and the specific decorative surface portion is positioned immediately after the operation receiving portion, and then the second rotating means When the rotation around the two axes is stopped, the player can see an effect in which a specific decorative surface portion can be seen through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion. With this configuration, by positioning the connecting decorative portion immediately after the operation receiving portion, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation receiving portion, and any one of the decorative surface portions moving on both sides of the connecting decorative portion can be used. Depending on whether or not the decoration surface part moves immediately after the operation receiving part and the decoration becomes clearly visible, it can be excited and excited by raising the expectation, delighting the player and reducing the interest Can be suppressed.

  Further, since a plurality of decorative surface portions are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a connecting decorative portion is arranged between the decorative surface portions, two decorative surface portions adjacent by the connecting decorative portion are connected. Can be clearly separated. Therefore, when the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, and the decorative surface portion viewed through the operation receiving portion is switched, the decorative portion connected in the middle is visible, so that the decorative surface portion is provided to the player. Can be clearly recognized, and the change of the decoration in the operation receiving portion can be surely enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, the decoration seen through the operation receiving portion can be changed by switching the decoration surface portion or showing the connecting decoration portion by rotation around the first axis by the first rotating means, and changing the second axis by the second rotating means. Since it can be rotated around, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest to the operation receiving portion. Therefore, at the time of execution of the player participation type operation of operating the operation receiving unit, by changing the decoration visible through the operation receiving unit, the interest of the player is attracted to the operation receiving unit and the operation of the operation receiving unit is prompted. It is possible to ensure that the player participates in the player-participation-type effect, to entertain the player-participation-type effect, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, while the plurality of decorative surfaces are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, and the decorative surfaces are rotated around the second axis by the second rotating means, first, the first rotating means When the rotation about one axis is stopped and the predetermined decorative surface portion is located immediately behind the operation receiving portion, the decorative surface portion that can be seen through the operation receiving portion despite the rotation around the first axis is stopped. Because it is rotating around the axis, it is not possible to clearly recognize the decoration of the decorative surface portion, and then, when the rotation of the decorative surface portion around the second axis by the second rotating means is stopped, through the operation receiving portion The visible decoration on the decorative surface can be clearly recognized. Thus, the decoration cannot be recognized due to the rotation around the first axis and the second axis, but the rotation around the first axis and the rotation around the second axis are sequentially stopped, so that the operation is not received. Since the player can be presented with an effect in which the decoration seen through the part can be gradually recognized, the change in the decoration seen through the operation receiving part can be enjoyed, and the expectation for the decoration of the decoration surface part that is stopped rotating. Can be increased.

  In addition, since a plurality of decorative surfaces with different decorations are provided, when decorations with a different premium feeling are employed as decorations of the decorative surface, rotation around the first axis by the first rotating means immediately behind the operation receiving portion. By the decoration of the stopped decorative surface portion, the rate and reliability at which an advantageous game state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous to the player, or the type of the advantageous game state (for example, , “Number of rounds”). Therefore, by rotating the plurality of decorative surfaces around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface having a desired decoration for the player (the decorative surface having a high premium feeling) is located immediately behind the operation receiving portion. Depending on whether or not the vehicle stops at the position, it is possible to make the player feel excited and excited, to delight the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, it is desirable that the connecting decorative portion can be rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means. Thereby, since the joint decoration part rotates around the first axis together with the plurality of decoration surface parts by the first rotating means, regardless of the rotational position of the plurality of decoration surface parts around the first axis, between the decoration surface parts. The position of the connecting decorative part that is visible does not change, and the same part (decoration) can always be shown. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the decoration of the connecting decorative portion, and it is possible to reliably exert the decorative effect of the connecting decorative portion.

  In addition, it may be provided with a joint decorative portion light emitting means for emitting and decorating the joint decorative portion, whereby the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, and between the decorative surface portions. When the connected decorative portion is moved to a position that can be seen from the player side through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion, the connected decorative portion is made to emit light by the connecting decorative portion light emitting means, so that the connected decorative portion becomes more beautiful. The decorative effect of the connecting decorative portion can be reliably exhibited. Also, in this case, the connection decoration unit is made to emit light by the connection decoration unit light emitting means, so that the connection decoration unit can be made to stand out in the operation receiving unit, so that the player's interest can be directed to the operation reception unit. Thus, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the player-participation-type effect by operating the operation receiving unit, and to enjoy the player-partition-type effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Further, in this case, when the decorative connection portion is illuminated by the connection decorative portion light emitting means in a state where the decorative surface portion is located immediately after the operation receiving portion, the outer periphery of the decorative surface portion becomes bright, so that the player It is possible to draw attention to the inside of the operation receiving section, and to think that there is something good for the game, to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest. Further, in this state, since the connecting decorative portion which cannot be seen through the operation receiving portion is illuminated and decorated, when the connecting decorative portion becomes visible, an opportunity for an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage is generated. Therefore, the player can be determined by whether or not the plurality of decorative surface portions are positioned right behind the operation receiving portion so that the plurality of decorative surface portions rotate around the first axis and the luminous decorative joint portion can be seen. It is possible to excite and excite the player, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, it is desirable that the first axis extends in the horizontal direction. Thus, when the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion seen through the operation receiving portion moves the connecting decorative portion in the up and down direction and switches to the next decorative surface portion. Therefore, it is possible to show the player such an effect that the connecting decorative portion and the next decorative surface portion to be switched appear from above or below. Therefore, for example, when the next decorative surface portion is made to appear from above and is switched, since the next decorative surface portion appears to come down from above, a revelation is given to the player from above. It is possible to give a good impression, and to raise the expectation for the game by assuming that there is something good. On the other hand, if the next decorative surface is made to appear from below and is switched, it is possible to give the player the impression that the rising momentum will be higher by the next decorative surface rising from below. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by making it seem that a chance has arrived.

  In addition, when the first axis extends in the horizontal direction, when the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis, the plurality of decorative surface portions and the connecting decorative portion are switched so as to move vertically. It is possible to move the player's line of sight up and down, and to direct the player's line of sight from above or below the operation receiving unit to inside the operation receiving unit, or from above the operation receiving unit to above or below the operation receiving unit. Or can be directed to. Therefore, since it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation receiving unit and another effect device provided on the upper side or the lower side of the operation receiving unit are linked, an effect that can attract the player's interest more strongly is provided. Can be enjoyed, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the operation surface (front surface) of the operation receiving portion may be formed in a three-dimensional shape bulging outward. Thus, the surface of the operation receiving portion is three-dimensionally bulged outward, so that the space on the rear side of the operation receiving portion can be widened. Therefore, when the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis on the rear side of the operation receiving portion, each of the decorative surface portions can be made hard to contact the inner surface of the operation receiving portion, and the plurality of decorative surface portions can be prevented. Can be satisfactorily rotated. Also, in this case, since the space on the rear side of the operation receiving portion can be widened, it is possible to make each decoration surface portion larger, so that the large decoration surface portion can be made more conspicuous from the player side, The interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the decorative surface portion (operation receiving portion).

  Further, it is desirable to provide a decorative surface portion light emitting means for emitting and decorating a plurality of decorative surface portions, and thereby, while the rotation by the first rotating means and the second rotating means is stopped, around the first axis, and the second axis. During the rotation of the surroundings, the decorative surface portion can be illuminated and decorated by the decorative surface portion light emitting means in a state such as during rotation, so that the decorative surface portion is illuminated and decorated, so that the decorativeness of the decorative surface portion can be further enhanced, and the The appearance can be improved and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. In addition, the decorative surface portion can be made to stand out by the luminous decoration, and the player's interest can be directed to the decorative surface portion and the operation receiving portion. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the player participation type operation of operating the operation receiving portion. In this way, it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type effects and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, at the rear side of the operation receiving portion, while being rotatably supported around the first axis, a plurality of decorative surface portions and connecting decorative portions are provided, and are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means. A rotating body may be further provided. Thereby, when the rotating body is rotated by the first rotating means, it is possible to connect the plurality of decorative surface portions and rotate the decorative portion around the first axis, thereby reliably embodying the gaming machine having the above-described operational effects. Can be.

  Furthermore, at least one of the plurality of decorative surface portions may include a rotating decorative portion that rotates around the second axis and a fixed decorative portion that does not rotate around the second axis. Thereby, in the decorative surface portion provided with the rotating decorative portion and the fixed decorative portion, when the second rotating means rotates around the second axis, only the rotating decorative portion rotates, and the fixed decorative portion does not rotate. This makes it possible to give a different impression from the decorative surface portion (decorative surface portion consisting only of the rotating decorative portion), so that a variety of effects can be shown and enjoyed by the player. In this case, among the plurality of decorative surface portions, the decorative surface portion including the rotating decorative portion and the fixed decorative portion can give a different impression from the decorative surface portion including only the rotating decorative portion. To give a premium feeling.

  Further, all the decorative surfaces may be rotated around each second axis by one actuator (for example, a motor, a rotary solenoid, a solenoid, etc.), and each of the decorative surfaces is provided with an actuator. In comparison with the case, since only one space for providing the actuator is required, the space for disposing the operation receiving portion, the decorative surface portion, or other members, etc. can be relatively widened, The operation receiving portion, the decorative surface portion, and the like can be made larger to stand out.

Means 2: In the structure of the means 1,
"The connecting decorative part is
Rotated about the first axis by the first rotating means. "

  By the way, when the connecting decorative portion is not rotated around the first axis, the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, and the decorative surface portions are connected to each other through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion. When the space between the decorative surfaces is moved from the direction of the first axis, the position of the connecting decorative portion seen from between the decorative surfaces changes. Become. Therefore, the portion of the connecting decorative portion that is visible from between the decorative surface portions changes according to the rotational position of the plurality of decorative surface portions around the first axis, and the decoration of the connecting decorative portion may be difficult to understand from the player side. is there.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the connecting decorative portion can be rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means.

  Thereby, since the joint decoration part rotates around the first axis together with the plurality of decoration surface parts by the first rotating means, regardless of the rotational position of the plurality of decoration surface parts around the first axis, between the decoration surface parts. The position of the connecting decorative part that is visible does not change, and the same part (decoration) can always be shown. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the decoration of the connecting decorative portion, and it is possible to reliably exert the decorative effect of the connecting decorative portion.

Means 3: In the structure of the means 1 or 2,
The present invention is characterized in that it further comprises a connecting decorative portion light emitting means for causing the connecting decorative portion to emit light.

  Here, the “connecting decorative portion light emitting means” includes “LED (single color LED, full color LED, high brightness LED, etc.)”, “organic EL”, “incandescent lamp”, “neon lamp”, “cold cathode tube” And the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, the game machine is provided with a joint decoration portion light emitting means for emitting decoration of the joint decoration portion.

  Thereby, since the connecting decorative part can be illuminated and decorated by the connecting decorative part light emitting means, the plurality of decorative surface parts are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, and are arranged between the decorative surface parts. When the connecting decorative part is moved to a position that can be seen from the player side through the transparent part of the operation receiving part and the connecting decorative part is illuminated by the connecting decorative part light emitting means, the connecting decorative part can be seen more beautifully. The decorative effect of the connecting decorative portion can be reliably exhibited.

  In addition, since the connection decoration unit is made to emit light by the connection decoration unit light emitting means, the connection decoration unit can be made to stand out in the operation receiving unit, so that the player's interest can be directed to the operation reception unit. It is possible to encourage participation in the player participation type effect that operates the receiving unit, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the connecting decorative portion is illuminated and decorated by the connecting decorative portion light emitting means in a state where the decorative surface portion is located immediately after the operation receiving portion, the outer periphery of the decorative surface portion becomes bright, so that the player can receive the operation receiving portion. The attention can be given to the inside of the club, and it can be made to think that there is something good for the game, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. Further, in this state, since the connecting decorative portion which cannot be seen through the operation receiving portion is illuminated and decorated, when the connecting decorative portion becomes visible, an opportunity for an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage is generated. Therefore, the player can be determined by whether or not the plurality of decorative surface portions are positioned right behind the operation receiving portion so that the plurality of decorative surface portions rotate around the first axis and the luminous decorative joint portion can be seen. It is possible to excite and excite the player, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

Means 4: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 3,
"The first axis is
It is characterized by extending horizontally.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, the first axis extends in the horizontal direction.

  Thus, when the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion seen through the operation receiving portion moves the connecting decorative portion in the up and down direction and switches to the next decorative surface portion. Therefore, it is possible to show the player such an effect that the connecting decorative portion and the next decorative surface portion to be switched appear from above or below. Therefore, for example, when the next decorative surface portion is made to appear from above and is switched, since the next decorative surface portion appears to come down from above, a revelation is given to the player from above. It is possible to give a good impression, and to raise the expectation for the game by assuming that there is something good. On the other hand, if the next decorative surface is made to appear from below and is switched, it is possible to give the player the impression that the rising momentum will be higher by the next decorative surface rising from below. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by making it seem that a chance has arrived.

  Also, when the plurality of decorative surfaces are rotated around the first axis, the plurality of decorative surfaces and the connecting decorative portion are switched so as to move in the vertical direction, so that the player's line of sight can be moved in the vertical direction. The player's line of sight can be directed from above or below the operation receiving section into the operation receiving section, or from inside the operation receiving section to above or below the operation receiving section. Therefore, since it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation receiving unit and another effect device provided on the upper side or the lower side of the operation receiving unit are linked, an effect that can attract the player's interest more strongly is provided. Can be enjoyed, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 5: In any one of the structures from the means 1 to the means 4,
"The operation receiving section is
The operation surface is formed in a three-dimensional shape bulging outward. "

  Here, examples of the “three-dimensional shape bulging outward” include a “hemispherical shape”, a “bombshell shape”, a “spindle shape”, a “polyhedral shape”, and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, the operation surface (front surface) of the operation receiving portion is formed in a three-dimensional shape bulging outward.

  Thus, the surface of the operation receiving portion is three-dimensionally bulged outward, so that the space on the rear side of the operation receiving portion can be widened. Therefore, when the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis on the rear side of the operation receiving portion, each of the decorative surface portions can be made hard to contact the inner surface of the operation receiving portion, and the plurality of decorative surface portions can be prevented. Can be satisfactorily rotated.

  Also, since the space on the rear side of the operation receiving portion can be widened, each decorative surface portion can be made larger, so that the large decorative surface portion can be made more conspicuous from the player side, and Interest can be strongly attracted to the decorative surface portion (operation receiving portion).

Means 6: In any one of the structures from the means 1 to the means 5,
It is characterized in that it further comprises a decorative surface light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the plurality of decorative surface portions.

  Here, as the “decorative surface light emitting means”, “LED (single color LED, full color LED, high brightness LED, etc.)”, “organic EL”, “incandescent lamp”, “neon lamp”, “cold cathode tube”, And the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the gaming machine is provided with a decorative surface light emitting means for illuminating and decorating a plurality of decorative surface portions.

  Thus, the decoration surface portion can be illuminated by the decoration surface light emitting portion while the rotation by the first rotation device and the second rotation device is stopped, or during rotation around the first axis and around the second axis. Since the decorative surface can be illuminated and decorated, the decorativeness of the decorative surface can be further enhanced, and the appearance of the game can be improved and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. In addition, the decorative surface portion can be made to stand out by the luminous decoration, and the player's interest can be directed to the decorative surface portion and the operation receiving portion. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the player participation type operation of operating the operation receiving portion. In this way, it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type effects and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the decorative surface portion not located directly behind the operation receiving portion is illuminated and decorated, the light makes the outer periphery of the decorative surface portion located immediately behind the operation receiving portion bright, so that the player can operate the decorative surface portion. It can be noticed in the receiving part. And, since the decorative surface that cannot be seen through the operation receiving portion is illuminated, it is assumed that when the decorative surface becomes visible, it means that there is a chance that an advantageous gaming state occurs in which the player has an advantage. It is possible to excite the player depending on whether or not the plurality of decorative surface portions are positioned directly behind the operation receiving portion so that the decorative surface portion that is illuminated and decorated is rotated around the first axis and can be seen. In addition, it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 7: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 6,
"Along the back side of the operation receiving portion, supported rotatably around the first axis, a plurality of decorative surface portions and the connecting decorative portion are provided, and the first axis is provided by the first rotating means. It further comprises a rotating body that can be rotated around. "

  Here, as the "rotating body", "a disk-shaped member having a predetermined thickness", "a spherical member", and a "rotating member" are formed in a cylindrical shape with the first axis as a center. , And those formed in a polygonal column shape with the first axis as the center.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the gaming machine is supported rotatably around the first axis on the rear side of the operation receiving portion, and is provided with a plurality of decorative surface portions and a connecting decorative portion. And a rotating body that is rotated about the first axis.

  Thereby, when the rotating body is rotated by the first rotating means, it is possible to connect the plurality of decorative surface portions and rotate the decorative portion around the first axis, thereby reliably embodying the gaming machine having the above-described operational effects. Can be.

  In addition, it is desirable that the rotating body is provided with the second rotating means, thereby, compared with the case where the second rotating means is provided at a different position from the rotating body, from the second rotating means The mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the decorative surface portion to the second axis to rotate the decorative surface portion can be simplified. Further, in this case, it is not necessary to secure a space for disposing the second rotating means outside the rotating body, and accordingly, the operation receiving portion is securely arranged outside the rotating body, and other decorative members Can be arranged, and it is possible to easily realize a gaming machine that reliably achieves the above-described effects.

Means 8: In the gaming machine,
"The operation surface is formed in a three-dimensional shape that swells outward, and an operation receiving portion that can be operated by a player having a transparent portion,
A rotating body which is supported on the rear side of the operation receiving portion so as to be rotatable around a first axis extending in parallel with a surface of the operation receiving portion and extending horizontally;
Each of the rotating bodies is rotatably supported around a second axis orthogonal to the first axis, and is arranged at intervals in a circumferential direction around the first axis. A plurality of decorative surfaces that are different from each other,
A connecting decorative portion provided on the rotating body so as to connect between the plurality of decorative surface portions, and a predetermined decoration is formed on an outer surface;
A connecting decorative portion light emitting means for causing the connecting decorative portion to emit light,
Decorative surface portion light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the plurality of decorative surface portions,
First rotating means for rotating the rotating body about the first axis, such that the decorative surface portion that becomes visible through a transparent portion of the operation receiving portion changes,
And a second rotating means for rotating the decorative surface portion around the second axis. "

  According to the configuration of the means 8, the operation surface is formed in the game machine in a three-dimensional shape bulging outward, the operation receiving portion having a transparent portion that can be operated by the player, and the rear side of the operation receiving portion. A rotating body that extends parallel to the surface of the operation receiving portion and that is supported rotatably about a first axis that extends horizontally, and that the rotating body rotates about a second axis that is orthogonal to the first axis. It is supported so as to be possible, and is arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction around the first axis, and a plurality of decorative surface portions each having a different decoration from each other, and between the plurality of decorative surface portions. A connecting decorative portion provided on the rotating body so as to be connected to the outer surface and having a predetermined decoration formed thereon; a connecting decorative portion light emitting means for emitting and decorating the connecting decorative portion; and a decorative surface portion for emitting and decorating a plurality of decorative surface portions. Visual approval through light emitting means and transparent part of operation receiving part A first rotating means for rotating the rotating body about the first axis, and a second rotating means for rotating the decorative surface about the second axis so that the decorative surface portion changes. .

  Thereby, when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, one of the plurality of decorative surface portions is visible through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion, and the decoration of the decorative surface portion enhances the appearance of the operation receiving portion. It's getting better. The decorative surface portion that can be seen through the operation receiving portion is spaced apart in the circumferential direction about the first axis on a rotating body that is supported rotatably around a first axis that extends parallel to the surface of the operation receiving portion and extends horizontally. Multiple rows are provided. In this state, when the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion located immediately behind the operation receiving portion moves from the position immediately behind the operation receiving portion, and in the circumferential direction. The next decorative surface portion arranged in a row at an interval moves right behind the operation receiving portion. Therefore, when the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decoration surface portion seen through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion can be switched to another decoration surface portion, and the decoration seen through the operation receiving portion is changed. be able to. When rotating the rotating body about the first axis and switching the decorative surface portions that can be seen through the operation receiving portion, since the decorative portions are connected between the decorative surface portions that are spaced apart from each other, the decorative surface portions are connected to each other. Since the space is decorated, it is possible to prevent the appearance in the operation receiving portion from being deteriorated, and to improve the appearance in the operation receiving portion. Then, by the rotation of the rotating body about the first axis by the first rotating means, the decoration surface portion moved right behind the operation receiving portion, the second axis extends perpendicularly to the surface of the operation receiving portion. Has become. In this state, when the decorative surface portion that is visible through the operation receiving portion is rotated by the second rotating means, the decorative surface portion rotates in a round state while being visible through the operation receiving portion, and the At the back of the operation receiving part, the decoration surface part which rotates with the wobble can be shown. Alternatively, in a state where the plurality of decorative surface portions are respectively rotated around the second axis by the second rotating means, the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, and the rotation around the first axis is performed. When the space between the decorative surfaces moves to a position visible from the player side through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion, the rotating decorative surface portion and the non-rotating connecting decorative portion pass through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion. And can be shown at the same time. In this way, by rotating the rotating body about the first axis by the first rotating means, it is possible to show the decoration that changes to a different decoration through the operation receiving portion, and the decoration surface portion is moved to the second axis by the second rotating means. By rotating it around, it is possible to show the decoration rotating with the round through the operation receiving part, and while rotating the decoration surface part around the second axis by the second rotating means, the rotating body is rotated by the first rotating means. By rotating around the one axis, the rotating decorative surface portion and the non-rotating connecting decorative portion can be simultaneously shown through the operation receiving portion, so that various decorations can be shown to the player in the operation receiving portion. This makes it possible to enhance the decorativeness of the operation receiving section operated by the player, thereby making the player entertain and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, when the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decoration surface portion that was first seen moves in the rotation direction, and the next decoration surface portion is seen after the connecting decoration portion is seen ( The appearance of the next decorative surface can be delayed by the connecting decorative portion, so that the player can imagine what kind of decorative surface the next decorative surface is. Time can be given, and depending on whether or not the next decorative surface portion is the imagined desired decorative surface portion, the expectation of the player can be increased, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Also, when the decoration surface portion is rotated around the second axis by the second rotating means, it becomes difficult for the player to clearly recognize the decoration of the decoration surface portion. While rotating around the two axes, the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, and the connecting decorative portion is positioned immediately after the operation receiving portion. The decoration of the stationary decorative part can be seen clearly between the two decorative surfaces that look unclear due to the movement, which can attract the player's interest and strongly attract the decorative part. The player's interest can be directed to the operation receiving section. Thereafter, the rotating body is rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis by the first rotating means, and the specific decorative surface portion is positioned immediately after the operation receiving portion, and then the second axis by the second rotating means. By stopping the rotation around the player, the player can see an effect in which a specific decorative surface portion can be seen through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion. With this configuration, by positioning the connecting decorative portion immediately after the operation receiving portion, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation receiving portion, and any one of the decorative surface portions moving on both sides of the connecting decorative portion can be used. Depending on whether or not the decoration surface part moves immediately after the operation receiving part and the decoration becomes clearly visible, it can be excited and excited by raising the expectation, delighting the player and reducing the interest Can be suppressed.

  Further, since a plurality of decorative surface portions are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a connecting decorative portion is arranged between the decorative surface portions, two decorative surface portions adjacent by the connecting decorative portion are connected. Can be clearly separated. Therefore, when the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means and the decorative surface portion viewed through the operation receiving portion is switched, the decorative surface portion is visible on the way, so that the decorative surface portion is cut off to the player. The change can be clearly recognized, and the change of the decoration in the operation receiving portion can be surely enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the rotating body that rotates about the first axis has the plurality of decorative surfaces and the connecting decorative portion, the connecting decorative portion is rotated around the first axis together with the plurality of decorative surfaces by the first rotating means. Therefore, regardless of the rotational positions of the plurality of decorative surface portions around the first axis, the positions of the connecting decorative portions visible between the decorative surface portions do not change, and the same portion (decoration) can always be shown. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the decoration of the connecting decorative portion, and it is possible to reliably exert the decorative effect of the connecting decorative portion.

  In addition, since the connecting decorative portion can be illuminated and decorated by the connecting decorative portion light emitting means, the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, and the connecting decorative portion disposed between the decorative surface portions is provided. Is moved to a position visible from the player side through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion, and the connecting decorative portion is made to emit light by the connecting decorative portion light emitting means, so that the connecting decorative portion can be more clearly seen, The decorative effect by the decorative portion can be reliably exhibited. In addition, since the connection decoration portion can be made to stand out in the operation receiving portion by illuminating the connection decoration portion, the interest of the player can be directed to the operation reception portion, and the game for operating the operation reception portion can be performed. It is possible to encourage participation in the player-participation-type production, and it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type production, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the connecting decorative portion is illuminated and decorated by the connecting decorative portion light emitting means in a state where one decorative surface portion is located immediately after the operation receiving portion, the outer periphery of the decorative surface portion becomes brighter, so that the player It is possible to draw attention to the inside of the operation receiving section, and it is possible to make the user think that there is something good for the game, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. Further, in this state, since the connecting decorative portion which cannot be seen through the operation receiving portion is illuminated and decorated, when the connecting decorative portion becomes visible, a chance of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage is generated. The player can be excited by whether or not the rotating body rotates around the first axis and is positioned immediately behind the operation receiving portion so that the connecting decorative portion decorated with light emission can be seen. It is possible to make the player flutter and entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the decoration seen through the operation receiving portion can be changed by switching the decoration surface portion or showing the connecting decoration portion by rotating the rotating body around the first axis by the first rotating device, and by the second rotating device. Since it can be rotated around the second axis, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation receiving portion. Therefore, at the time of execution of the player participation type operation of operating the operation receiving unit, by changing the decoration visible through the operation receiving unit, the interest of the player is attracted to the operation receiving unit and the operation of the operation receiving unit is prompted. It is possible to ensure that the player participates in the player-participation-type effect, to entertain the player-participation-type effect, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, while the rotating body is rotated about the first axis by the first rotating means, and the decorative surface portion is rotated about the second axis by the second rotating means, first, the first axis by the first rotating means. When the rotation around is stopped and the predetermined decorative surface portion is positioned immediately behind the operation receiving portion, the decorative surface portion that can be seen through the operation receiving portion around the second axis line despite the rotation around the first axis is stopped. , The decoration of the decorative surface cannot be clearly recognized. After that, when the rotation of the decorative surface around the second axis by the second rotating means is stopped, the decoration visible through the operation receiving portion. The decoration of the surface can be clearly recognized. Thus, the decoration cannot be recognized due to the rotation around the first axis and the second axis, but the rotation around the first axis and the rotation around the second axis are sequentially stopped, so that the operation is not received. Since the player can be presented with an effect in which the decoration seen through the part can be gradually recognized, the change in the decoration seen through the operation receiving part can be enjoyed, and the expectation for the decoration of the decoration surface part that is stopped rotating. Can be increased.

  In addition, since a plurality of decorative surfaces with different decorations are provided, when decorations with a different premium feeling are employed as decorations of the decorative surface, rotation around the first axis by the first rotating means immediately behind the operation receiving portion. By the decoration of the stopped decorative surface portion, the rate and reliability at which an advantageous game state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous to the player, or the type of the advantageous game state (for example, , “Number of rounds”). Therefore, by rotating the rotating body around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion (decorative surface portion with a high premium feeling) provided with the desired decoration for the player is positioned directly behind the operation receiving portion. Depending on whether or not the game is stopped immediately, it is possible to make the player feel excited and excited, to delight the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the first axis extends in the horizontal direction, when the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion seen through the operation receiving portion connects the connecting decorative portion therebetween. Because it moves up and down and appears to switch to the next decorative surface, it is possible for the player to show the effect that the connecting decorative part and the next decorative surface to be switched appear from above or below. it can. Therefore, for example, when the next decorative surface portion is made to appear from above and is switched, since the next decorative surface portion appears to come down from above, a revelation is given to the player from above. It is possible to give a good impression, and to raise the expectation for the game by assuming that there is something good. On the other hand, if the next decorative surface is made to appear from below and is switched, it is possible to give the player the impression that the rising momentum will be higher by the next decorative surface rising from below. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by making it seem that a chance has arrived.

  In addition, since the first axis extends in the horizontal direction, when the rotating body is rotated around the first axis, the plurality of decorative surface portions and the connecting decorative portion are switched so as to move vertically. It is possible to move the player's line of sight up and down, and to direct the player's line of sight from above or below the operation receiving unit to inside the operation receiving unit, or from above the operation receiving unit to above or below the operation receiving unit. Or can be directed to. Therefore, since it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation receiving unit and another effect device provided on the upper side or the lower side of the operation receiving unit are linked, an effect that can attract the player's interest more strongly is provided. Can be enjoyed, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the operation surface (front surface) of the operation receiving portion is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the space on the rear side of the operation receiving portion can be widened. Therefore, when the rotating body is rotated around the first axis on the rear side of the operation receiving portion, the plurality of decorative surfaces and the connecting decorative portions provided on the rotating body come into contact with the inner surface of the operation receiving portion, respectively. This makes it difficult to rotate the rotator. Also, in this case, since the space on the rear side of the operation receiving portion can be widened, it is possible to make each decoration surface portion larger, so that the large decoration surface portion can be made more conspicuous from the player side, The interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the decorative surface portion (operation receiving portion).

  In addition, since the decorative surface portion light emitting means for emitting and decorating a plurality of decorative surface portions, during the rotation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means is stopped, during rotation around the first axis and around the second axis, In such a state, since the decorative surface portion can be illuminated and decorated by the decorative surface portion light emitting means, by decorating the decorative surface portion with light emission, the decorativeness of the decorative surface portion can be further enhanced, and the appearance of the game can be improved. The appeal to the player can be enhanced. In addition, the decorative surface portion can be made to stand out by the luminous decoration, and the player's interest can be directed to the decorative surface portion and the operation receiving portion. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the player participation type operation of operating the operation receiving portion. In this way, it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type effects and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 9: In any one of the gaming machines of means 1 to 8,
It is a pachinko machine.

  Here, the pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which a player inserts a medium into the gaming machine and a gaming medium that is a medium used in a substantial game played by the player. Is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball inserted. Specifically, "a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operating handle, and a number of suitable devices such as nails, accessories, display means, etc. are incorporated. , A pass area, a game area provided with an appropriate ball entrance where a game ball such as an arrival port enters, a rail for guiding the game ball from the launch device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area. And a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to a ball entering a ball opening or according to a mode of entering a game ball into a plurality of ball entrances. "

  Note that there are various types of pachinko machines, and a "ball entry state detecting means (game state detection means) for detecting a ball entry state into a ball entry port represented by a" digipachi machine "is generally used. And a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when an incoming ball is detected by the incoming ball state detecting means, and a special symbol for changing the special symbol and stopping the change according to the lottery result of the lottery means. With a symbol display means "and" Additionally, during the change of the special symbol, the symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol row, characters and various articles etc. That further comprises an effect display means for performing an appropriate effect display by, for example, rendering the display object and operating the display object "; and Of game balls in the game A game having lottery means for performing a lottery ”, a game generally performed by a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 game balls, represented by an“ arepachi machine ”, and a plurality of game balls One in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to the manner in which the game balls enter the ball opening ".

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the operation and effect of any of the means described above can be achieved in the pachinko machine.

Means 10: In any one of the gaming machines from means 1 to means 8,
It is a pachislot machine.

  Here, the pachislot machine means that a medal, which is an insertion medium, is inserted, and after the medal is inserted, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn are rotated by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Then, a symbol row constituted by each reel or the like is variably displayed, and thereafter, the game such as stopping the variability display of each symbol row in response to an operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) is performed by the player. Is what is done. In other words, it can be regarded as a slot machine with a stop operation function. If the stop operation means is not operated after the lapse of the predetermined time, the variable display of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the lapse of the predetermined time. Then, when the variation display of each symbol row is stopped, a specific symbol displayed is a specific symbol, or a combination of symbols displayed in each symbol row is a specific combination. When the condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied condition, or a special advantageous state advantageous to a player who can obtain a large amount of medals is generated.

  According to the configuration of the means 10, in the pachislot machine, the operation and effect of any of the above-described means can be obtained.

Means 11: In any one of the gaming machines from means 1 to means 8,
It is characterized by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Here, the "game machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine" means that a plurality of (for example, five) game balls are used as one unit of a medium, the medium is inserted, and the starting operation means is started. A symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed according to an operation of an operation lever (for example, an operation lever), and thereafter, the fluctuation of the symbol row is stopped according to an operation of a stop operation means (eg, a stop button). If the stop operation means is not operated after the lapse of the predetermined time, the variable display of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the lapse of the predetermined time. Then, when the variation display of each symbol row is stopped, a specific symbol displayed is a specific symbol, or a combination of symbols displayed in each symbol row is a specific combination. When the condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied condition, or a special advantageous state advantageous to a player who can obtain a large amount of medals is generated.

  According to the configuration of the means 11, in a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, it is possible to exhibit any of the effects of the means described above.

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game by increasing the decorativeness of an operation receiving portion operated by a player.

[Moveable button effect in pre-reading and suggestive effects]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 to 204, effects using the above-described third effect operation unit 400B (see FIGS. 78 to 92) will be described. Here, the button movable body effect according to the special lottery result is executed by the rotation operation mode of the decorative rotating body unit 530 (button movable body) arranged in the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B. Effect control will be described.

  As described above, the main control board 1310 executes a special lottery when a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the peripheral control board 1510 performs control based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. Execute the suggestion (suggestion effect) of the special lottery result. At this time, the time that suggests the special lottery result (the time until the confirmed image is displayed after the special symbol row fluctuates) and the content of the suggestion effect are determined by a plurality of fluctuations provided in advance based on the game state and the special lottery result. It is selected and set from patterns. The peripheral control board 1510 holds the start of the suggestion of the subsequent special lottery result while the suggestion of the previously selected special lottery result is executed. During this time, the peripheral control board 1510 corresponds to the special lottery result in the suspended state. The effect can be executed as a notice effect (look-ahead effect) before the suggestion of the special lottery result starts. The pre-reading effect can be executed from when the target special lottery result is found to when suggestion is started, and is selected and set based on the gaming state and the target special lottery result. The look-ahead effect can increase the player's sense of expectation from the suspended state, and can enhance the interest of the game.

  Hereinafter, the prefetching effect and the suggesting effect using the decoration rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described.

  FIG. 199 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special figure prefetch effect control processing according to the present embodiment. This process is one of processes executed by the peripheral control board 1510 when a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and is a special lottery executed by the main control board 1310. The necessary setting for executing the special figure prefetching effect is performed based on the lottery result and the prefetching determination. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the main control board 1310 can execute a prefetch effect, and if the prefetch effect can be executed, it is determined whether the peripheral control board 1510 executes a prefetch effect. Or set the production content.

  First, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set to ON (step S1001). The special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set to ON when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-reading effect command from the main control board 1310. If the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is not set to ON (the result of step S1001 is “No”), the special figure prefetch effect control process ends because the prefetch effect is not executed.

  The prefetch effect command is a command generated by the main control board 1310. In the main control board 1310, when a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a special lottery is executed, and a prefetch effect is executed according to the special lottery result and the game state of the special lottery. A pre-read determination is made as to whether or not it is possible. In the pre-reading determination, it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not in a state where the pre-reading effect can be executed when the result of the special lottery corresponds to the pre-reading prohibition condition. The read-ahead prohibition condition refers to a case where the special lottery result is derived by accepting a game ball in the first starting port 2002 during the time reduction, and can be set according to the game property. In addition, you may make it the peripheral control board 1510 determine whether it is in the state which can perform a prefetch effect.

  If the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set to ON (the result of step S1001 is “Yes”), the peripheral control board 1510 suggests the special lottery result being executed (suggesting effect) or It is determined whether or not the button movable body effect is performed in the pending prefetch effect (step S1002). Here, it is determined whether or not an effect using the button movable body effect is possible in the pre-reading effect based on the result of the special lottery. When the button movable body effect is performed in the pre-reading effect, the button pre-reading flag is set to ON as described later, so whether or not the button movable body effect is to be performed in the previously held pre-reading effect is determined by the button. What is necessary is just to determine whether the prefetch flag is set. Also, the determination as to whether or not the button movable body effect is performed in the running suggestion effect is made by determining whether or not the suggestion effect including the button movable body effect is performed based on the variation pattern number or the setting information during the execution. Just fine.

  Then, when there is no plan to perform the button movable body effect (“No” in step S1002), the peripheral control board 1510 sets a look-ahead effect table based on the special lottery result (step S1003), and performs the look-ahead. The prefetch effect contents are selected based on the effect table and the contents of the prefetch effect command (step S1004). The content of the pre-reading effect is determined using, for example, an element (random number) used for deriving a special lottery result or determining a variation pattern in a special lottery.

  The peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the current special lottery result is the target of the button movable body effect, that is, determines whether or not the selected prefetching effect content includes the button movable body effect (step S1005). . Here, the button movable body effect occurs in a specific change pattern (a change pattern that will be a reach effect described later).

  Then, when the button movable body effect is executed (“Yes” in step S1005), the peripheral control board 1510 sets a prefetch effect including the button movable body effect of the decorative rotator unit 530 (step S1006). . In a normal look-ahead effect, the display color of the hold display displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 is changed from the initial color, a sound effect is output at the timing of the change, a lamp is turned on, and the accessory is displayed. The effect of making it move is performed. In the button movable body effect, an effect of changing a mode in which the decorative rotator unit 530 can be visually recognized by the player is separately performed. Note that details of the button movable body effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the button prefetch flag to ON (step S1007). The button look-ahead flag is set to OFF in the initial state, and by being set to ON, the look-ahead effect related to another special lottery result until the button movable body effect set in the process of step S1006 is completed. In addition, it is possible to disable the effect in which the button movable body is used in the suggestion effect.

  Next, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the special figure prefetch effect execution flag to OFF (step S1008), and ends the special figure prefetch effect control process. By setting the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag to OFF, it is possible to prevent a plurality of look-ahead effects from being executed for one special lottery result.

  On the other hand, when the button movable body effect is not executed (“No” in step S1005), the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not to execute the gas movable button movable object effect that resembles the button movable object effect. (Step S1011). The gaseous button movable body effect may be executed at a predetermined probability with respect to a variation pattern satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, a specific reach effect is present), or may be executed according to a special lottery result. You may do so.

  Then, if the button movable body effect of the gasket is to be executed (“Yes” in step S1011), the peripheral control board 1510 sets a look-ahead effect to which the button movable body effect of the gasket of the decorative rotator unit 530 is added. (Step S1012). The details of the gas movable button effect are described later with reference to FIG. 200. However, the best mode of the button movable object effect (see FIGS. 200 (C) and (D)) does not appear in the gas movable button effect.

  After that, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the button look-ahead flag to ON (step S1007), and performs the look-ahead effect related to another special lottery result until the button movable body effect of the gusset set in the process of the above-described step S1012 ends. And rendering an effect in which the button movable body is used in the suggestion effect is not executable. Next, the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set to off (step S1008), and the special figure prefetching effect control process ends.

  When the button movable body effect of the gasket is not executed (“No” in step S1011), the peripheral control board 1510 sets a look-ahead effect that does not include the button movable body effect (step S1023), and the special figure look-ahead effect. After the execution flag is set to off (step S1008), the special figure pre-reading effect control process ends.

  Also, when it is determined that the button movable body effect is to be performed in the suggestion (suggested effect) of the special lottery result being executed in the process of step S1002 or the preceding look-ahead effect of the suspension (“Yes” in step S1002). The peripheral control board 1510 sets a look-ahead effect table made up of a look-ahead effect pattern excluding a look-ahead effect pattern including a button movable body effect (step S1021) based on the contents of the look-ahead effect table and the look-ahead effect command. Then, the contents of the pre-reading effect are selected (step S1022). Thereafter, a prefetch effect (not including the button movable body effect) is set (step S1023), and the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set to off (step S1008), and the special figure prefetch effect control process ends.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 200, a description will be given of a button movable body effect as a prefetch effect that can be set in the processes of steps S1006 and S1012 of the above-described special figure prefetch effect control process (FIG. 199). FIG. 200 is a diagram illustrating an example of the button movable body effect in the prefetch effect.

  In the pre-reading effect of the present embodiment, a pre-reading effect in the hold display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and a pre-reading effect in the decorative rotator unit 530 are provided. The prefetch effect in the former hold display is set by the processing of steps S1006, S1012, and S1023 of the above-described special figure prefetch effect control process (FIG. 199). The latter look-ahead effect in the decorative rotator unit 530 is set in the processing of steps S1006 and S1012 of the aforementioned special figure look-ahead effect control process (FIG. 199).

  Here, the screen display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is generated after a variable display area in which a symbol row variable display game is performed as a suggested effect suggesting a special lottery result, and a special lottery result during execution of the suggestive effect. And a hold display area for displaying a special lottery result for which the start of suggestion is held as a hold display up to a hold upper limit number (here, four for each starting port). The peripheral control board 1510 sets the hold display corresponding to the special lottery result of the production target to another mode (for example, a ball that blinks red) different from the initial mode (for example, a ball of white color), so that the state of the hold state is changed. , A special look-ahead effect that indicates to the player the degree of expectation that the special lottery result becomes a special result (generates an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player) is executed. In the present embodiment, there is a pattern in which a button movable body effect is executed as a prefetch effect in the decorative rotating unit 530 in addition to the pre-read effect of the hold display. It should be noted that the pre-reading effect of either the hold display and the decorative rotator unit 530 may be executed, or these pre-reading effects, the light emitting of the decorative member on the game board, the movable member being movable, the sound effect from the speaker, etc. It may be executed as a pre-reading effect by combining output and the like. Hereinafter, the hold display and the prefetch effect of the decorative rotator unit 530 will be described.

  FIG. 200 (A) is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect when the result of a hold special lottery (a look-ahead hold) for a look-ahead effect occurs as a hold fourth. In the prefetching hold, a prefetching effect including a button movable body effect is set in the process of step S1006 of the above-described special figure prefetching effect control process (FIG. 199). In the screen display area of the game board effect display device 1600, the variable display game is displayed in the variable display area, and the fourth hold display in the hold display area is displayed in a look-ahead mode (red blinking state) different from the initial mode. . On the other hand, the decorative rotator unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B maintains a state (normal state, normal state) in which the first decorative surface portion 532 faces forward and can be easily viewed by the player.

  FIG. 200 (B) is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect when the variable display game that has been executed when the pre-reading suspension occurs ends and a new variable display game is started. In the screen display area of the game board effect display device 1600, a new variable display game is started in the variable display area, and suggestion of a special lottery result of the oldest hold display is started, so that the hold displayed in the hold display area is started. The display position moves to the left by one, and the pre-reading hold is displayed in the third pre-reading mode. Here, the decoration rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B is rotated by 90 degrees around the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528, and then is rotated by a predetermined angle (90 degrees) around the rotation angle. (Less than) range. Further, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are illuminated and decorated by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536. Note that the best mode of the decorative rotator unit 530 refers to a state in which it is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal mode, and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward and can be easily viewed from the player.

  Therefore, in the suggestion mode, the first decorative surface portion 532 side and the second decorative surface portion 533 side are often seen across the rotating body base unit 531 (the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f). Whether the player returns to the one decorative surface portion 532 (normal mode) or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward (best mode), the player can be excited and excited, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a monotonous effect. it can. Further, in the above-described example, the look-ahead effect (the hold display effect) in the hold display area is executed at the timing when the look-ahead effect is set (that is, when a special lottery result occurs) (FIG. 200 (A)). The look-ahead effect (movable button effect) of the decorative rotator unit 530 is performed according to the start timing of the suggestion of the special lottery result to be executed after the look-ahead effect is set (FIG. 200 (B)). That is, since the start of the look-ahead effect of the hold display in the hold display area and the start of the look-ahead effect of the decorative rotator unit 530 are different, the player does not know which special lottery result corresponds to the movable body effect, and Expectations for all the special lottery results. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player entertained for a long period of time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. In addition, the look-ahead mode of the hold display in the hold display area in FIG. 200 (A) described above allows the player to know that the look-ahead effect of the decorative rotator unit 530 is executed in relation to the hold display. Good. As a result, the player can have a stable and high expectation for a specific special lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game in which the state of the game can be easily recognized, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the game. The pre-reading effect of the hold display in the hold display area may be started simultaneously with the pre-reading effect of the decorative rotator unit 530. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game in which the player can easily grasp the situation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the game due to a complicated effect configuration.

  Next, FIG. 200 (C) is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect when the game progresses and the variable display game for the special lottery result immediately before the look-ahead suspension is started. In the screen display area of the gaming board-side effect display device 1600, a new variable display game is started in the variable display area, and in the hold display area, a pre-reading hold is displayed at the hold display position (left end) where the next look-ahead hold is executed next. The hold display mode of the look-ahead hold continues the look-ahead mode. Then, the decoration rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the second decoration surface portion 533 facing forward from the suggestion mode at the timing when the variable display game for the special lottery result immediately before the pre-reading reservation is started is favorable from the player. This is the best mode that can be visually recognized. At this time, the third effect operation unit 400B includes the second decoration surface portion 533 with the second decoration surface portion decoration substrate 536 and the decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame of the frame unit 415 by the decoration substrate unit 420. The side lens 417 is decorated with light emission.

  FIG. 200 (D) is a diagram illustrating a button movable body effect as an effect corresponding to the variable display game when the variable display game (target variable display game) for the special lottery result of the prefetch effect is started. The decorative rotator unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B determines that the set look-ahead effect pattern is a pattern that continues to take over the look-ahead effect mode in the target variable display game (the button effect start process (FIG. 201) described later). In the case of “Yes” in the process of step S2013), the best mode of FIG. 200C is continued even if the target variable display game is started.

  Also, in the pre-reading effect pattern, the so-called gaseous button movable body effect that does not become the best mode even if the decorative rotator unit 530 is in the suggested mode (the process of step S1012 of the above-described special figure pre-reading effect control process (FIG. 199)) ) Is also provided. FIG. 200 (E) is a diagram showing the button movable body effect of the gasket at the timings of FIGS. 200 (C) and (D) described above.

  In the case of the gaseous button movable body effect, the decorative rotator unit 530 follows the same transition until FIGS. 200 (A) and (B), but continues the suggestion mode even at the timing of FIG. 200 (C). Then, at the start of the target variable display game in FIG. 200 (D), the third effect operation unit 400B finally turns the first decorative surface portion 532 forward from the suggestion mode so that the player can visually recognize the first decorative surface portion 532 well, that is, the normal state. It becomes an aspect. The setting of the normal mode is set in the process of step S2015 of the button effect start process (FIG. 201) described later. In addition, as a final mode in the case of gas, not only the above-described normal mode, but also a modified normal mode in which the normal mode is provided with light emission decoration more or less than the best mode is provided. The light emission decoration in the modified normal mode weakens its luminous intensity over time and returns to the normal mode after a predetermined time.

  As described above, in the button movable body effect by the decorative rotator unit 530, the look-ahead effect includes the best mode (the mode recognized as the most changed from the normal mode in the player's eyes) in the movable mode effect. Before the corresponding variable display game is executed, the state is changed to the best mode and maintained even if the variable display game is started. Specifically, in the embodiment, the time (variation time) in which the variable display game is executed once from when the variable display game is put on hold immediately before execution of another button movable body effect in the variable display game is executed. For a long time, the best mode is provided to be visible to the player. Thereby, there is a concern in the conventional production (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-90780, etc.), that is, the best mode in the production is limited production (when an operation is detected during button production in the last production of a series of production button productions). ), It is provided only for a short time even if it is executed, so that it is possible to improve the point of poor contribution and interest in the production effect of the best mode. The player can obtain an opportunity to continuously view the best mode from the suspension before the execution of the target variable display game as the mode of the look-ahead effect, so that the player has a high degree of expectation. Hold and change display games can be enjoyed. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority in the progress of the game while the best mode is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of contribution to the effect in the best mode and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, in the button movable body effect, the normal mode is changed to the best mode via the suggestion mode. The suggestion mode is a mode in which the normal mode and the best mode are repeatedly operated, and the player can be excitedly excited whether the mode finally changes to the best mode or returns to the normal mode. In this way, by providing the suggestion mode that makes the player feel the possibility of changing to the best mode on hold, the player expects that a good thing ("big hit" occurrence) will occur in the variable display game. While playing games. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In addition, the button movable body effect does not require the operation of the player, the operation button itself performs an independent effect as a directing role, and sufficient time is provided for visually recognizing the best mode, so the operation button as an operation means It is possible to give a novelty and surprise to a player who is tired of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the game.

  In FIG. 200, in the button movable body effect of the look-ahead effect, the best mode is continuously provided so as to be visually recognizable during the variable display game executed while being held and during the corresponding variable display game. Absent. It is sufficient that a predetermined time is maintained for maintaining the best mode by the start of the movable body effect in the variable display game set at the start of the variable display game to be changed or by the end of the variable display game. Specifically, it is only necessary that the state has changed to the best mode before the reach effect or the pass / fail decision effect. Therefore, for example, the suggestion mode may be continued during the hold, and the mode pattern may be the best mode after the start of the variable display game corresponding to the pre-reading effect. When the timing of the best mode is various, the interest and expectation of the player can be continued, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Furthermore, as the effect pattern of the button movable body effect, the speed of the repetitive rotation in the suggestion mode may be adjusted, or the suggestion mode may change to the best mode via the normal mode, or without the suggestion mode. The mode may be switched from the normal mode to the best mode. In addition, a pre-reading effect may be obtained by combining the moving object effect with other effect elements such as light emission decoration and sound output. With various patterns, the player can play the game while expecting the change in the mode, and is not tired of the game, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, since not only the button movable body effect that finally becomes the best mode, but also the button movable body effect of the gasket that does not become the best mode is provided, the player simply operates simply because the independent operation of the button movable body is started. I can't rejoice. Therefore, the player's interest in the button movable body effect can be further increased, and a thrilling feeling as to whether or not the best mode can be given can be given, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the button movable body effect of the gusset, not only the normal mode but also a modified normal mode in which the same mode as the best mode or a modest light emitting decoration is applied based on the normal mode can be applied as the final mode of the button. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the difference between the expectations so far and the disappointment in which the best mode has not occurred. In addition, the buttons are arranged so as to protrude forward of the gaming machine, and effects such as luminous decorations that are easily visible can be noticeable. The party feels embarrassing as it was recognized as a gag production. After the production of the movable button of the gasket, the effect (light emission decoration) conspicuous from the deformed normal mode is gradually weakened and returned to the normal mode, thereby not giving shame to the player, and performing a remedy for not being in the best mode. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Further, once the mode is returned to the normal mode, the luminous decoration may be executed to change the mode to the normal mode.

  The suggestion mode and the best mode in the button movable body effect described above can be executed not only in the prefetch effect but in any effect. For example, as an effect during the big hit game, the best mode may be maintained and provided to the player so as to be visible until the big hit game ends. Also, in combination with the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, there is a special lottery result that generates the next big hit in the hold by changing from the suggested mode to the best mode during the big hit game or maintaining the best mode at the end of the big hit game. May be provided as an on-premise rendezvous effect. In the case where the winning area includes a specific area (V zone), the best mode may be adopted if the game ball passes through the specific area. In the game situation where a player can expect an advantageous gaming state or in a game scene where the player wants to give a sense of excitement or expectation, the staging mode or the best mode of the present embodiment is used to enhance the production effect and enhance the interest of the game. Can be enhanced.

  Further, in the above-mentioned button movable body effect of the look-ahead effect, a change from the suggestion mode to the best mode or the normal mode may be made executable by an operation input of the operation button 410 by the player. When the player operates the operation button 410 in accordance with the effect of instructing the operation input, the mode is changed to one of the modes based on the content of the button movable body effect. In particular, when the game is changed to the best mode, a further sense of achievement can be given, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 201 to FIG. 204, a button movable body effect as a suggestion effect of the special lottery result (effect of a variable display game) will be described. The button movable body in the present embodiment is the decorative rotator unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B.

  FIG. 201 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the button effect setting process according to the present embodiment. This process is a process executed by the peripheral control board 1510 at the start of the suggestion effect (variable display game).

  The peripheral control board 1510 first determines whether or not the button prefetch flag is set to ON (step S2001). When the button movable body effect is set in the prefetch effect in the above-described special figure prefetch effect control process (FIG. 199), the button prefetch flag is set to ON in the process of step S1007.

  When the button prefetch flag is not set to ON (“No” in step S2001), the peripheral control board 1510 directs the button movable body effect that accompanies the operation of the decorative rotator unit 530 in the variable display game to be started. Is determined, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variation display game is a pattern for performing a button movable body effect (step S2002). Here, the variation pattern targeted for the button movable body effect is a variation pattern for performing the reach effect. In addition, all the variable display games corresponding to the pre-reading effect including the button movable body effect may be the target of the button movable body effect in the variable display game.

  On the other hand, when the button look-ahead flag is set to ON (“Yes” in step S2001), the peripheral control board 1510 displays a variable display in which a look-ahead effect that triggered the setting of the button look-ahead flag to ON is started. It is determined whether or not the game corresponds to the game (step S2011). If it is not the prefetch effect corresponding to the variable display game, that is, if the button movable effect of the prefetch effect is continued ("No" in step S2011), the button movable effect corresponding to the variable display game is performed. Cannot be executed, the button effect setting process ends.

  Then, in the case of a prefetch effect corresponding to the variable display game to be started (“Yes” in step S2011), the peripheral control board 1510 first sets the button prefetch flag to off (step S2012), and In the display game, it is determined whether or not the mode of the decorative rotator unit 530 does not return to the normal mode and the look-ahead effect mode is continued (step S2013). Here, the determination may be made based on the look-ahead effect pattern set in the special figure look-ahead effect control process (FIG. 199). More specifically, the process continues when set in the process of step S1006, but does not continue when set in the process of step S1012.

  The peripheral control board 1510 sets the continuation flag to ON if the look-ahead effect is continued in the variable display game, that is, if a genuine button movable body effect is being performed (“Yes” in step S2013). (Step S2014). Then, in the variable display game, when the pre-reading effect mode is finished, that is, when the button movable body effect is performed (“No” in step S2013), the above-described modified normal mode (FIG. 200 (E) )) Or a normal mode is set (step S2015). Then, after performing the processing of step S2014 or the processing of step S2015, the peripheral control board 1510 proceeds to the processing of step S2002 described above.

  In the process of step S2002, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the variation display game is a pattern for performing a button movable body effect (“Yes”), the peripheral control board 1510 sets the continuation flag to ON. It is determined whether or not there is (Step S2003). The continuation flag is set to ON in the process of step S2014 when a genuine button movable body effect has been performed in the look-ahead effect corresponding to the variable display game.

  Then, when the continuation flag is set to OFF (“No” in step S2003), the peripheral control board 1510 starts the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern and activates the decorative rotator unit 530 by operating the decorative rotator unit 530. It is set (step S2004). Here, the flirt effect is a movable body effect that moves the decorative rotator unit 530 by combining rotation around the first axis CL1 and rotation around the second axis CL2. Further, based on the fluctuation pattern, a button movable body effect capable of operating the decoration rotating body unit 530 by an operation input to the operation button 410 by the player is set in the latter half of the reach effect (step 2005). Here, settings such as an operation effective period for receiving an operation of the operation button 410 and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the game board effect display device 1600 are performed. Then, the button effect setting process ends.

  On the other hand, when the continuation flag is set to ON (“Yes” in step S2003), the peripheral control board 1510 does not execute the swaying effect because the prefetching effect mode is continued even in the variable display game, Only the button movable body effect by the operation input of the operation button 410 is set based on the variation pattern (step S2021). Further, the setting relating to the valid operation period A in the set button movable body effect is deleted (step S2022). In the button movable body effect set here, the operation valid period for receiving the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is configured by a continuous period of the valid period A and the valid period B. Therefore, when the look-ahead effect mode is continued in the variable display game, only the button movable object effect for the valid period B can be executed. Note that details of the button movable effect in the variable display game will be described later with reference to FIGS. Thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the continuation flag to off (step S2023), and ends the button effect setting processing.

  In the process of step S2002, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the variation display game is not a pattern for performing the button movable body effect (“No”), the peripheral control board 1510 sets the continuation flag to off. Then (step S2023), the button effect setting process ends. The case where “No” is determined in the process of step S2002 and the continuation flag is switched from on to off in the process of step S2023 is in a variable display game in which a genuine button movable body effect is performed in a look-ahead effect. In this case, the button movable effect is not executed.

  Note that, in the button effect setting process, in the variable display game in which the genuine button movable body effect is performed in the look-ahead effect, the button movable body effect involving the operation of the operation button 410 by the player may be executed. In this case, after the process of step S2014 is performed, the process of step S2021 is performed.

  In the above-described button effect setting process, first, the process related to the button movable body effect in the pre-reading effect (the process of step S2001, steps S2011 to S2015) is executed, but is not limited thereto. First, it is determined whether or not the button movable body effect is to be executed in the variable display game based on the variable pattern of the variable display game that starts to change (the processing content of step S2002). The process of determining whether or not to inherit the mode (the process in steps S2001 and S2011 to S2015) may be performed.

  Next, FIG. 202 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the button operation effect process according to the present embodiment. This process is a process executed by the peripheral control board 1510 during the execution of the suggestion effect (variable display game).

  First, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the valid period A of the operation valid period of the button movable body effect is present (step S2101). If it is the validity period A ("Yes" in step S2101), it is determined whether or not the operation input of the operation button 410 by the player has been detected (step S2102).

  If the operation input of the operation button 410 has not been detected (“No” in step S2102), the peripheral control board 1510 returns to the processing in step S2101, and ends the valid period A or operates in the valid period A. Until an input is detected, “Yes” in the process of step S2101 → “No” in the process of step S2102 are repeated.

  If the peripheral control board 1510 detects the operation input of the operation button 410 during the validity period A (“Yes” in step S2102), the result of the variable display game (special lottery result) is a result that is advantageous to the player ( For example, a degree-of-expectation effect that suggests the degree of expectation of “big hit” in the form of the decoration rotating unit 530 is executed (step S2103). Details of the expected degree effect will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the button operation effect processing ends.

  In the validity period A, the operation input of the operation button 410 can be detected until the time set in advance in the process of step S2005 of the button effect setting process (FIG. 201) described above elapses. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the expectation effect is executed by one operation input. However, the expectation effect may be executed when a plurality of operation inputs are detected. The expectation effect may be executed stepwise according to the number of operation inputs. By giving the execution conditions of the degree of expectation effect a variety, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1510 is not the valid period A of the operation valid period of the button movable body effect (“No” in step S2101), it is the valid period B of the operation valid period of the button movable body effect. It is determined whether or not (step S2111). If it is the validity period B ("Yes" in step S2111), it is determined whether or not the operation input of the operation button 410 by the player has been detected (step S2112).

  When the operation input of the operation button 410 is not detected in the valid period B (“No” in step S2112), the peripheral control board 1510 indicates that the operation input is not detected in the valid period B. The non-detection flag is set to ON (step S2113), and the process returns to step S2111. Until the validity period B ends or an operation input is detected in the validity period B, “Yes” in the process of step S2111 → “No” in the process of step S2112 → the process of step S2113 is repeated.

  Here, the undetected flag is a flag necessary to execute a process of returning the decorative rotator unit 530 to the initial mode (normal mode) after the end of the button movable body effect. As described later, when an operation input is detected during the validity period B, a process of returning the decorative rotator unit 530 to the initial mode (normal mode) after the result notification effect is executed in conjunction with the result notification effect ( Steps S2123 and S2124 described later). However, when the operation input is not detected during the validity period B, there is no chance to return the decorative rotator unit 530 changed to the best mode in the look-ahead effect or the expectation effect effect. By setting an undetected flag to ON when an operation input is not detected during the valid period B, the mode of the decorative rotator unit 530 is confirmed at a preset return timing after the symbol of the variable display game is stopped, and the initial mode The processing for returning to the (normal mode) can be executed (the processing of steps S2131 to S2134 described later).

  Next, when the peripheral control board 1510 detects an operation input of the operation button 410 during the valid period B (“Yes” in step S2112), the process proceeds to steps S2121 to S2125.

  The peripheral control board 1510 first displays the result notification effect of changing the mode of the decorative rotator unit 530 according to the result of the variable display game (special lottery result) and the result display of the variable display game on the game board side effect display device 1600. Execute (step S2121). The details of the result notification effect will be described later with reference to FIG. In the result display on the game board effect display device 1600, symbols that are changing are stopped and displayed according to the result, and effects and the like corresponding to the result are displayed.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the end of the validity period B (Step S2122). In the valid period A described above, an operation input can be detected a plurality of times in a preset period. However, in the valid period B, when the operation input is detected once, the period ends.

  Thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the current decorative rotator unit 530 is in the best mode with the second decorative surface 533 facing forward (step S2123). If it is the best mode ("Yes" in step S2123), the decorative rotator unit 530 is reversed around the first axis CL1 to return to the normal mode (step S2124). On the other hand, if it is not the best mode (“No” in step S2123), the processing in step S2124 is unnecessary. Thereafter, the non-detection flag is set to off (step S2125), and the button operation effect processing ends.

  Next, if the operation period of the button movable body effect is not currently the valid period B, that is, if it is not the operation effective period of the button movable body effect (“No” in step S2111), the peripheral control board 1510 It is determined whether the undetected flag is set to ON (step S2131). If the undetected flag is set to ON (“Yes” in step S2131), it is determined that the operation input to the operation button 410 has not been performed during the operation valid period B of the button movable body effect. That is, since the process of returning the decorative rotator unit 530 to the normal mode has not been performed when the operation input is performed, the process is performed here.

  The peripheral control board 1510 determines whether it is time to return the movable body to return the decorative rotator unit 530 to the initial position (step S2132). The movable body return timing is set in advance in the processing of steps S2005 and S2021 of the button effect setting processing (FIG. 201) described above. If it is not the movable body return timing (“No” in step S2132), the process returns to step S2131, and “Yes” in the process in step S2131 until “movable body return timing” → “in step S2132”. No "is repeated.

  When it is the movable body return timing (“Yes” in step S2132), the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the current decorative rotator unit 530 is in the best mode with the second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward. Is determined (step S2133). If it is the best mode ("Yes" in step S2133), the decorative rotator unit 530 is turned around the first axis CL1 to return to the normal mode (step S2134). On the other hand, if it is not the best mode (“No” in step S2133), the processing in step S2134 is unnecessary. Thereafter, the non-detection flag is set to off (step S2135), and the process proceeds to the normal button operation effect processing (step S2141). The normal button operation effect processing is processing for setting an effect corresponding to the operation input to the operation button 410 other than the button movable body effect. After that, the button operation effect processing ends.

  When the non-detection flag is set to OFF (“No” in step S2131), the peripheral control board 1510 performs an operation input to the operation button 410 during the operation valid period B of the button movable body effect. Since the process of returning the decorative rotator unit 530 to the normal mode (the processes of steps S2123 and S2124) has been performed, the normal button operation effect process is directly executed (step S2141). After that, the button operation effect processing ends.

  In the button operation effect processing of the present embodiment, if the valid period A and the valid period B are set in the above-described button effect setting process (FIG. 201), the lapse of both periods is always counted. Not exclusively. When a predetermined number of operation inputs are detected in the valid period A, the setting of the valid period B may be deleted at that time. For a player who does not want to know the result quickly by the operation, he can concentrate on the reach effect and enjoy the remaining fluctuation time without being distracted by the operation button 410.

  In the button operation effect process of the present embodiment, whether the decorative rotator unit 530 returns to the initial mode (normal mode) after the end of the operation period of the button movable element effect using the undetected flag in the process of step S2131. (Steps S2132 to S2135), but the present invention is not limited to this. Since the rotation detection sensor for detecting the rotation position of the decoration rotating body unit 530 is provided on the third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400B, the rotation of the decoration rotating body unit 530 is performed based on the detection by the rotation detection sensor. It may be determined whether the mode needs to be returned to the initial mode (normal mode). If the decorative rotator unit 530 is not in the initial state, it is sufficient to reverse the decorative rotator unit 530 and return to the initial state when it is time to return the movable body (“Yes” in the processing of step S2132) (step S2134). ). When the mode can be determined based on one rotation detection sensor as in the present embodiment, the processing can be simplified. The undetected flag is effective when it is necessary to determine the mode based on elements such as a plurality of sensors.

  In the button operation effect process of the present embodiment, the button operation is performed during the effective period (effective period A and effective period B) of the button movable body effect that requires the player to operate the operation button 410 in the variable display game. A normal button operation effect process (step S2141) for accepting an operation corresponding to a button effect other than the body effect can be executed. The player can operate the operation button 410 in the best mode in which the genuine look-ahead effect has been performed in an effect scene unrelated to the button movable object effect, so that the player can enjoy the game while feeling superiority, satisfaction, and expectation. Can be. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 203, a description will be given of a mode (button movable body effect) of the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B as a suggestive effect of the special lottery result (effect of a variable display game). FIG. 203 is a diagram for describing a button movable body effect by a player's operation input.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (A), the operation valid period in which the player's operation input can be accepted in the button movable body effect operated by the player's operation input includes a valid period A and a valid period B. The valid period A and the valid period B are one continuous period. In the validity period A, an expectation effect indicating the expectation that the result of the variable display game is “hit” can be executed by an operation input to the operation button 410, and in the validity period B, the operation input to the operation button 410 can be performed. An effect of notifying the result of the variable display game can be executed. In the present embodiment, the valid period A and the valid period B are set to the same period.

  FIG. 203 (A) shows the information of the button movable body effect set in the processing of step S2005 and step 2021 of the button effect setting processing (FIG. 201) described above, and the game board side during the operation validity period. It is an example of the information displayed on the effect display device 1600. Such an information display allows the player to know that the operation input during the valid period A can be expected, and that the operation input during the valid period B can know the result. As a result, the player can obtain information that he or she wants to know by operating the operation button 410 during the validity period corresponding to one or both of the degree of expectation and the result according to his / her preference.

  FIG. 203 (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of the expected degree effect in the effective period A. The expected degree effect is provided in two modes according to the expected degree of the variable display game, and is executed in the process of step S2103 of the button operation effect process (FIG. 202) described above. When the degree of expectation is low, the decorative rotating body 530 is set to the first expected degree mode, and when the expected degree is high, the decorative rotating body 530 is set to the second expected degree mode. Here, the first expectation degree mode is a normal mode (initial mode) in which the first decorative surface portion 532 is located forward so as to be satisfactorily visible to the player. Further, the second expectation degree mode is a best mode in which the second decorative surface portion 533 is located forward so that the player can view the second decoration surface portion 533 well.

  In the present embodiment, since the first expectation mode in the expectation effect is the best mode, the execution of the expectation effect for the validity period A is performed in the step S2005 of the button effect setting process (FIG. 201) described above. Is limited to the case where the button movable body effect is set, that is, the case where the genuine look-ahead effect is not executed. This is because, in the case where the button movable body effect by the genuine look-ahead effect is being performed in the variable display game, the decorative rotator unit 530 is already in the best mode, and even if the expectation degree effect is subsequently performed, the effect is not effected. This is because they cannot be obtained.

  FIG. 203 (C) is a diagram illustrating an example of the result notification effect in the effective period B. The result notification effect is provided in two modes according to the case where the variable display game is “out of play” and the case of “hit” (big hit, small hit). The above-described button operation effect processing (FIG. 202) Is executed in the process of step S2121. In the case of “missing”, the decorative rotator unit 530 is set as the first result mode, and in the case of “hit”, the decorative rotator unit 530 is set as the second result mode. Here, the first decoration surface portion 532 and the second decoration surface portion 533 of the decoration rotating body unit 530 are rotated around the second axis CL2 orthogonal to the first axis CL1 by the rendering operation unit second drive motor 534. This constitutes a result mode. Hereinafter, a description will be given as an example of a result mode in a state where the first decoration surface portion 532 of the decoration rotating body unit 530 faces forward and is visible to the player.

  The first result mode executed in the case of "losing" includes a first rotation executed during a symbol change and a second rotation started to be executed at a symbol stop timing. In the first rotation, the decoration rotation unit 530 is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees as viewed from the player and temporarily stopped. Thereafter, in the second rotation, the decoration rotation unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the player, and returns to the position at the start of the first rotation.

  Similarly to the first result mode, the second result mode executed in the case of "hit" is configured by the first rotation executed during the symbol change and the second rotation started to be executed at the symbol stop timing. You. Then, in the first rotation, similarly to the first result mode, the decoration rotation unit 530 is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees as viewed from the player and temporarily stopped. Thereafter, in the second rotation, the decorative rotation unit 530 is further rotated clockwise 270 degrees as viewed from the player, and returns to the position at the start of the first rotation. In the second rotation, the first decoration surface portion 532, the first button decoration portion 411a, and the frame side lens 417 are subjected to light emission decoration.

  In addition, the result mode in the state where the second decorative surface unit 533 of the decorative rotator unit 530 faces forward and can be visually recognized by the player also includes the first rotation and the second rotation about the second axis CL2 in the same manner as described above. .

  Thus, the first result mode and the second result mode have the same operation in the first rotation. Then, as described later, at the start of the second rotation, the effect display indicating the symbol stop and the result of the variable display game is started in the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the player can start the result notification effect even if the result notification effect starts. At the stage of one rotation, the "rotation" or "losing" is the same rotation operation and cannot be discriminated, so that the player is not distracted and can excite the player.

  In the present embodiment, both the expectation effect effect and the result notification effect are effected by the decorative rotator unit 530 in the operation button 410. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the expectation degree effect (one effective period) is an effect by the game board effect display device 1600 (panel-side effect device), and the result notification effect (the other effective period) is the rotating body unit 530 (frame-side effect device). ). Also, the effect on the frame side is more conspicuous between the panel side and the frame side, so if the information is advantageous for the player, the effect will be made by the effect device on the frame side, and if the information is not advantageous for the player, the effect on the panel side will be The production may be performed by a device. By expanding the variety of the effect devices, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and surprise, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, the operation inputs of the expected degree effect and the result notification effect may not be distinguished by the effective period A and the effective period B, but may be distinguished by the number of operation inputs within the operation effective time of the button movable effect. For example, the first operation input may be an expectation effect effect, and the second operation input may be a result notification effect. By expanding the variety of production occasions, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and surprise, and to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, since more definite information is obtained as the number of operation inputs increases, the player's willingness to operate can be increased, and the interest in the game can be increased.

  FIG. 204 is a view for explaining the changing state of the button movable body effect and the button movable body (decorative rotator unit 530) during the change. In the present embodiment, in the process of step S2002 of the button effect setting process (FIG. 201) described above, the button movable body effect is not set for the subsequent prefetching effect, and the fluctuation of the fluctuation display game that starts to fluctuate. If the pattern includes a button movable body effect (“Yes” in the processing of step S2002), the button movable body effect is executed. Here, the button effect using the rotation of the decorative rotator unit 530 during the change of the present embodiment includes a fanning effect of rotating the decorative rotator unit 530 in a mode other than the best mode at the start of the reach effect, and a reach effect. An expectation effect that can be executed when an operation input of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the effective period A in the operation effective period provided at the end, and the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display game is “big hit” is obtained. Similarly, when the operation input of the operation button 410 by the player is detected in the valid period B in the valid operation period, the operation can be executed, and the result notification that notifies the result (“miss” or “hit”) of the variable display game is provided. Direction and are provided. Then, these fanning effects, expectation effects, and result notification effects are based on the presence / absence of a genuine button movable body effect in the pre-reading effect of the variable display game that starts to fluctuate, and the presence / absence of an operation input to the player's operation button 410 during the operation validity period. It is set to be executable accordingly. Hereinafter, a change in the mode (button mode) of the decorative rotator unit 530 in the button effect according to the game progress will be described.

  FIG. 204 (A) shows that the genuine button movable body effect (genuine look-ahead effect) is not executed in the look-ahead effect of the change display game in which the change starts, and the player's operation input to the operation button 410 during the operation effective period is also not performed. It is a figure which shows the button aspect in the said variable display game when it is not detected.

  Specifically, when the button look-ahead flag is OFF in the process of step S2001 of the above-described button effect setting process (FIG. 201), that is, when there is no prefetch effect of the button movable body effect (in the process of step S2001). “No”), or when a gaseous button movable body look-ahead effect (gasse look-ahead effect) has been executed in the variable display game (“Yes” in the process of step S2001 → “Yes” in the process of step S2001) → Process of step S2012 → “No” in process of step S2013 → process of step S2015). In this case, a fluttering effect is set as a button effect in the variable display game, and an expectation effect and a result notification effect are set to be executable by a player's operation input to the operation button 410 (in the process of step S2002, “ Yes ”→“ No ”in the processing of step S2003 → the processing of step S2004 → the processing of step S2005).

  At this time, the button mode before the reach effect entry in the variable display game is the normal mode (FIG. 200 (E)). Then, in the flirting effect that is executed at the same time as the start of the reach effect, the mode changes to a fluttering mode such as rotating the decoration rotating body unit 530, and returns to the normal mode when the flurry effect ends. Thereafter, when the operation button 410 is operated at the end of the reach effect, the player does not operate during the operation valid period in which the expectation effect and the result notification effect relating to the result of the variable display game can be executed. The variable display game ends without executing the result notification effect and maintaining the normal mode.

  Specifically, in the above-described button operation effect processing (FIG. 202), “No” in the processing in step S2101 → “No” in the processing in step S2111 until the validity period A in which the degree of expectation effect can be reached → In the process of step 2131, “No” → the process of S2141 is repeated. Then, when the valid period A is reached, there is no operation by the player, so “Yes” in the processing of step S2101 → “No” in the processing of step S2102 are repeated until the end of the period. Then, when the valid period A ends and the valid period B is reached, there is no operation by the player in the same way, so the processing of step S2111 is “Yes” → the processing of step S2112 is “No” → the processing of S2113 is repeated. It is. When the validity period B ends, the decorative rotator unit 530 is in the normal mode, and in the process immediately after the validity period B ends, the movable body return timing previously set at the time of setting the button movable body effect (the decorative rotator 530 is initialized) Until the timing of returning to the mode), “No” in the process of step S2101 → “No” in the process of step S2111 → “Yes” in the process of step S2131 → “No” in the process of step S2132 However, once the movable body is returned, “Yes” in the processing of step S2131 → “Yes” in the processing of step S2132 → “No” in the processing of step S2133 → processing of step S2135 → processing of step S2141 Is executed, then “No” in the processing of step S2131 → step S2 Processing 41 is executed.

  FIGS. 204 (B) and (C) show that the genuine button movable body effect (genuine prefetching effect) is not executed in the prefetching effect of the fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation starts, and the player in the validity period A of the operation validity period. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a button mode during the variable display game when an operation input to the operation button 410 is detected, but no operation input is detected during the validity period B. FIG. 204 (B) shows a normal expectation mode in which the degree of expectation is low in the effective period A, and FIG. 204 (C) shows a second expectation mode in which the expectation is high in the effective period A. The case where the best mode is set is shown.

  Here, the processing in the above-described button effect setting process (FIG. 201) is the same as that in FIG. 204 (A) described above, and the flirting effect is executed in the reach effect of the variable display game, and the expected degree effect and the result notification effect are possible. Operation validity period is provided. It differs from FIG. 204 (A) described above in that there is an operation input by the player during the effective period A of the operation effective period. Therefore, hereinafter, the valid period A and thereafter will be described.

  The decorative rotator unit 530 reaches an operation valid period in which the button movable body effect is executed in accordance with the operation input to the operation button 410 by the player at the end of the reach effect while maintaining the normal mode. Here, during the effective period A, the player operates the operation button 410, and an expectation effect corresponding to the expectation (high or low) at which the variable display game becomes “big hit” is performed.

  Then, in FIG. 204 (B), the normal mode of the first degree of expectation mode having a low degree of expectation is obtained. Since the player does not operate in the validity period B, the variable display game ends while maintaining the normal mode. On the other hand, in FIG. 204 (C), the state changes to the best state of the second expectation degree mode having a high degree of expectation, and the player does not operate in the validity period B. After the game symbol stop (result display) timing is reached and the game is returned to the initial mode (normal mode), the variable display game ends.

  Specifically, in the above-described button operation effect processing (FIG. 202), since there is an operation by the player during the validity period A, “Yes” in the processing of step S2101 → “Yes” in the processing of step S2102 → step The process of S2103 is executed, and an expectation effect is executed.

  Here, in the first expectation degree mode in which the degree of expectation is low as shown in FIG. 204 (B), the decorative rotator unit 530 maintains the normal aspect. Then, in the valid period B after the valid period A ends, there is no operation by the player, so the processing of “Yes” in the processing of step S2111 → “No” in the processing of step S2112 → the processing of S2113 is repeated. When the validity period B ends, the decorative rotator unit 530 is in the normal mode, and in the process immediately after the validity period B ends, the movable body return timing (the decorative rotator 530 is set to the initial mode) set in advance when setting the button movable body effect setting Until “return timing”, “No” in the processing of step S2101 → “No” in the processing of step S2111 → “Yes” in the processing of step S2131 → “No” in the processing of step S2132 Once the movable body return timing comes, "Yes" in the processing of step S2131 → "Yes" in the processing of step S2132 → "No" in the processing of step S2133 → processing of step S2135 → processing of step S2141 is executed Then, “No” in the process of step S2131 → the process of step S2141 Management is performed.

  On the other hand, in the second expectation degree mode in which the degree of expectation is high as shown in FIG. 204 (C), the decorative rotator unit 530 changes to the best aspect. Then, in the valid period B after the valid period A ends, there is no operation by the player, so the process of “Yes” in the process of step S2111 → “No” in the process of step S2112 is repeated in the process of S2113. This is the same as FIGS. 204 (A) and (B) described above. However, when the validity period B ends, the decorative rotator unit 530 is in the best mode. Therefore, in the process immediately after the end of the validity period B, “No” in the process of step S2101 until the movable body return timing (timing for returning the decorative rotating body 530 to the initial state) set in advance when setting the button movable body effect is set. → “No” in the processing of step S2111 → “Yes” in the processing of step S2131 → “No” in the processing of step S2132, and when the movable body return timing comes (“Yes” in the processing of step S2132) ), "Yes" in the process of step S2133 → the process of S2134 → the process of step S2135 → the process of step S2141 are executed, and the decorative rotator unit 530 is reversed from the best mode and returned to the normal mode. After that, “No” in the process of step S2131 → the process of step S2141 is executed.

  Next, FIG. 204 (D) shows that a genuine button movable body effect (genuine pre-reading effect) is not executed in the pre-reading effect of the fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation starts, and the operation in the valid period A and the valid period B of the operation valid period is not performed. It is a figure which shows the button aspect in the said variable display game, when the operation input to the operation button 410 by a player is detected. Here, a case is shown in which the second expectation degree mode (best mode) in which the expectation degree is high in the effective period A is high.

  Here, the processing in the above-described button effect setting processing (FIG. 201) is the same as in the above-described FIGS. 204 (A) to 204 (C), and the flirting effect is executed in the reach effect of the variable display game, and the expected degree effect and An operation effective period in which a result notification effect can be provided is provided. It differs from FIG. 204 (C) described above in that an operation input is performed by the player during the effective period B of the operation effective period. Therefore, hereinafter, the validity period B and thereafter will be described.

  The decorative rotator unit 530 changes from the normal mode to the best mode by an operation input to the operation button 410 during the valid period A. Then, the valid period B is reached while maintaining the best mode. During the validity period B, there is an operation input to the operation button 410, and the result notification effect (FIG. 203 (C)) of the first result mode or the second result mode is further executed on the decorative rotator unit 530 of the best mode. . Then, the symbol of the variable display game is stopped at the timing when the second rotation is started in the result notification effect composed of the first rotation and the second rotation. Further, in the effect displayed on the screen, an effect display is performed. The validity period B ends with the end of the result notification effect, that is, the end of the second rotation when there is an operation input, and the decorative rotator unit 530 changes from the best mode of the expected degree effect to the initial mode (normal mode). After the return, the variable display game ends.

  Specifically, in the above-described button operation effect processing (FIG. 202), since there is an operation by the player during the validity period A, “Yes” in the processing of step S2101 → “Yes” in the processing of step S2102 → step The process of S2103 is executed, and an expectation effect is executed. In this case, the decorative rotator unit 530 changes to the best mode because of the second high degree of expectation. Until the valid period A ends and the valid period B is reached and the operation input by the player is detected, “Yes” in the processing of step S2111 → “No” in the processing of step S2112 → the processing of S2113 are repeated. However, when an operation input by the player is detected, “Yes” in the process of step S2111 → “Yes” in the process of step S2112 → the process of step S2121 → the process of step S2122 → “Yes” in the process of step S2123 "→ the process of step S2124 → the process of step S2125 is executed. The validity period B ends because of the operation input by the player, and thereafter, “No” in the process of step S2101 → “No” in the process of step S2111 → “No” in the process of step S2131 → The processing of step S2141 is executed.

  Next, FIG. 204 (E) shows that a genuine button movable body effect (genuine look-ahead effect) is being executed in the pre-reading effect of the fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation starts, and the operation button by the player during the valid period B of the operation valid period. It is a figure which shows the button aspect in the said variable display game when operation input to 410 is detected.

  Specifically, when the button look-ahead flag is turned on in the process of step S2001 of the above-described button effect setting process (FIG. 201), and the change display game to start changing is a target of the true look-ahead effect (step S2001). “Yes” in the processing → “Yes” in the processing in step S2001 → the processing in step S2012 → “Yes” in the processing in step S2013 → the processing in step S2014). In this case, the result notification effect is set to be executable by the player's operation input to the operation button 410 as the button effect in the variable display game (“Yes” in the process of step S2002 → “the process of step S2003”). Yes "→ the processing in step S2021 → the processing in step S2022 → the processing in step S2023).

  At this time, the button mode before the reach effect entry in the variable display game is the best mode (FIG. 200 (D)). If the look-ahead effect is in the best mode, the fanning effect and the expectation effect cannot be executed. The decoration rotator unit 530 reaches the validity period B while maintaining the best mode. During the validity period B, there is an operation input to the operation button 410, and the result notification effect (FIG. 203 (C)) of the first result mode or the second result mode is further executed on the decorative rotator unit 530 of the best mode. . Subsequent steps are the same as in FIG. 204 (D) described above.

  Specifically, the processing in the above-described button operation effect processing (FIG. 202) differs from the above-described FIG. 204 (D) in that the processing related to the validity period A (the processing in steps S2101 to S2103) is not performed. Until the validity period B is reached, “No” in the process of step S2101 → “No” in the process of step S2111 → “No” in the process of step S2131 → the process of step S2141. Processing after the validity period B is the same as that in FIG. 204 (D) described above.

  In this way, in the button movable body effect that can be executed by an operation input to the operation button 410 by the player, the variable display game can execute an expectation effect that indicates a big hit expectation at which the variable display game becomes a “big hit” by the operation input. There is provided one operation effective period including a period A and an effective period B in which a result notification effect in which a result of the variable display game is notified by an operation input can be executed (FIG. 203 (A)). One operation effective period is functionally distinguished into an effect indicating the degree of expectation and an effect indicating the winning result, and the player can select a function according to the elapse of the effective period. Therefore, since the conventional operation input effect, which tends to be monotonous with one effect function corresponding to the operation input during one operation valid period, can be multifunctional and reflect the player's taste, It is possible to increase the player's willingness to operate. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since the valid period A and the valid period B are set to the same length (FIG. 203 (A)), the selection can be provided to the player equally. Therefore, the player can make a selection without being affected by the effect of the effect, and can enjoy the effect according to his preference. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the result notification effect that can be executed by the operation input to the operation button 410 during the validity period B, the first result mode indicating “out” and the second result mode indicating “hit” (different from the first result mode) Aspect) is provided (FIG. 203 (C)). The first result mode and the second result mode are different modes from the normal mode. As described above, even in the case of “losing”, there is a mode change that is the first result mode that can specify the “losing”, so in the case of “losing”, there is no mode change and it is difficult to grasp the result. The player can more easily grasp the winning result than that. In addition, the player can reliably obtain the game information (result / non-permission result) from the effect mode of the operation button 410 regardless of whether the game is “losing” or “hit”. You will acquire a sense of obtaining information and will participate more actively in operation production. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the effect of the operation button 410 itself and draw attention. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the first result mode indicating "out of contact" and the second result mode indicating "hit" are respectively composed of a first rotation and a second rotation (FIG. 203 (C)). The first rotation of the first result mode and the first rotation of the second result mode have the same operation, and the operation of temporarily stopping the movable body (decorative rotating unit 530) in a state of being rotated by 90 degrees is performed. . After that, in the case of the first result mode, it is rotated by 90 degrees in the opposite direction in the second rotation and returns to the original state, whereas in the case of the second result mode, it is further rotated by 270 degrees in the second rotation and the original state is obtained. Return to In this way, by making the first mode (the first rotation) the same in the first result mode and the second result mode, even if it is "out" immediately after the result notification effect, it looks like "hit". Therefore, even if the player operates the operation button 410, the player cannot immediately judge the hit. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation immediately after the operation, instead of the conventional operation input effect that tended to be a tasteless and plain effect immediately after the operation, and an interesting and entertaining production Can be provided. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Then, when the result notification effect of the first result mode or the second result mode is executed by the movable body (decorative rotator unit 530), the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the winning result in the final display (design stop and symbol stop). The result display effect) is executed not at the time of the first rotation but at the timing of the second rotation start (FIG. 203 (C), FIG. 204 (D)). Thereby, the effect of making the first mode (the first rotation) the same between the first result mode and the second result mode can be more reliably obtained.

  In addition, when the operation input to the operation button 410 by the player is not detected during the operation validity period, neither the expected degree effect nor the result notification effect is performed, and the movable body (decorative rotating body unit 530) is not operated. The mode maintains the mode immediately before the operation validity period. In this way, by not intentionally changing the mode of the movable body during the operation valid period that requires the player's operation input, it is possible to give the player an impression that the effect period reflects his or her intention. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the operation input to the operation button 410 by the player is not detected, the movable body is not changed during the operation valid period, but after the operation valid period, the movable body is limited to “hit” and the second result is obtained. Alternatively, the movable body may be set to the first result mode only for the "losing". In addition, the rotation operation of the movable body in the expected degree effect and the result notification effect may be performed in a stepwise manner according to the number of operation inputs (continuous hitting pattern) during the corresponding valid period. In the second mode that is “hit” in the result notification effect, the same operation is performed up to the first rotation (right 90 degrees) and the second rotation (left 90 degrees) of the first mode of “losing”, and the “losing” is performed. It is also possible to provide a resurrection mode in which a 360-degree rotation is performed after imitating the pattern. By maintaining the effects of the present invention and diversifying the effects, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  When the movable body is in the best mode (an aspect different from the normal mode) at the start of the valid period B, and the operation input to the operation button 410 by the player is not detected in the valid period B, the movable body Before the timing of returning to the normal mode from the best mode, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs the final display of the winning result (symbol stop and result display effect). Thereby, the result is not grasped by the player by the operation of the movable body prior to the display of the result of the variable display game on the display device. Therefore, if the player does not perform an operation input during the validity period B in order to enjoy the predetermined variable display game to the end, the result is determined in advance from the operation of the movable body before displaying the result of the variable display game. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game that has been invited.

  When the movable body is in the best mode (different mode from the normal mode) at the start of the valid period B, and when an operation input to the operation button 410 by the player is detected in the valid period B, the result notification effect is being produced. At the timing when the second rotation of the first result mode or the second result mode is started, the winning display is confirmed (symbol stop and result display effect) on the game board effect display device 1600, and is effective upon completion of the result notification effect. After the end of the period B, the movable body is returned from the best mode to the normal mode. At this time, the valid period B ends at the end of the result notification effect even if the preset period has not elapsed, so that unnecessary operation input during the valid period B can be prevented. Also, since the player has grasped the result of the variable display game, the validity period B is ended and the mode of the operation buttons 410 is initialized to give the player an impression of preparing for the next game, Since the smooth progress of the game is provided, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Further, since the movable body is returned from the best mode to the normal mode in connection with the end of the result notification effect, it can be set as a series of operations at once (steps S211 to S211 of the button operation effect process (FIG. 202) described above). Processing of S2124). Therefore, the processing control load can be reduced.

  Note that the pre-reading effect and the changing effect in FIGS. 199 to 204 described above are based on the decorative rotator unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B, but are not limited thereto. The effect display device 460 on the door frame side of the above-described effect operation unit 400 (see FIGS. 48 to 63) may be used, or the second effect operation unit 400A (see FIGS. 64 to 77) may be used. The second effect display device 460A may be used. If the effect image is presented in the operation button 410 so as to change the decoration mode in the operation button 410 according to the game state, the same effect as the decoration rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B can be obtained. Furthermore, in the case of the effect image, since the degree of freedom of the effect is higher than that of the decorative structural member, for example, it is possible to display the final mode as the same as the best mode when performing the gaseous look-ahead effect. Can be enhanced.

  In addition, the pre-reading effect and the changing effect in FIGS. 199 to 204 described above are not limited to the decorative rotator unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B, but may be any effect device provided on the door frame 3 side. For example, in the present embodiment, any effect device may be used as long as it is provided in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, the left side unit 540 of the door frame, the right side unit 550 of the door frame, the top unit 570 of the door frame, and the like. The effect device provided on the frame side is closer to the player side than the accessory attached to the game panel 1100 side, and can provide a three-dimensional aspect. Therefore, the decorative rotating body of the third effect operation unit 400B. An effect similar to that of the unit 530 can be obtained.

  In addition, the production by the production device on the frame side attracts the attention of the surrounding players, and the player can feel a sense of superiority. It becomes a sober production and the player becomes embarrassing. Therefore, it may be possible to set which of the effect devices on the frame side and the panel side to receive the effect provision according to the game result and the preference of the player. It is possible to provide a game in which the taste and emotion of the player are taken into consideration, and to enhance the interest of the game.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame base unit (door frame)
110 Door frame base 111 Through hole (window)
320 Plate unit 400B Third production operation unit 410 Operation buttons (operation receiving unit, operation means)
411 button lens 415 frame unit 420 decorative substrate unit 520 third base unit 521 unit base 521g left shaft 521h right bearing 528 staging operation unit first drive motor (first rotating means)
529 First transmission gear 530 Decorative rotator unit 531 Rotator base unit (rotator)
531a Rotating body gear 531b Rotating body side left bearing 531c Rotating body side right shaft 531f Peripheral surface decoration (joint decoration)
532 First decorative surface (decorative surface)
532d shaft member 533 second decorative surface (decorative surface)
533a Rotating decoration part 533b Fixed decoration part 534 Production operation unit second drive motor (second rotation means)
534a second drive gear 534b decorative surface gear 535 first decorative surface decorative substrate (decorative surface light emitting means)
536 Second decorative surface decorative substrate (decorative surface light emitting means)
1310 Main control board (special lottery means)
1510 Peripheral control board (effect executing means, mode changing means, effective period setting means)

The present invention provides, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game using a game medium, a special lottery means capable of executing a special lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and an effect capable of executing an effect based on a lottery result of the special lottery. includes a demonstration execution means, an operation means that is capable of accepting an operation input by the player, the presentation execution unit, when said operating means is capable of accepting, the operation by operating the operation means If the mode of the means is changed to a specific mode different from the normal mode, and if the operation input is not performed by the player while the operating means is changed to the specific mode by the mode changing means, is changed to the normal mode of the operation means at a timing after the effect indicating the lottery result of the special lottery by the display device is performed from the specific embodiment, the steering by the form changing means If the unit operation input by the player among which are in the specific embodiments have been made, and wherein Rukoto said operation means is changed to the normal mode from the specific embodiments immediately after the operation input has been performed.

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can execute a game using a game medium,
Special lottery means capable of executing a special lottery based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the lottery result of the special lottery,
Operating means capable of accepting operation input by the player,
The effect executing means,
When the operation means becomes receivable, having a mode changing means for changing the mode of the operation means to a specific mode different from the normal mode,
When the lottery result of the special lottery is a specific result, when an operation input is received by the mode changing unit to the operation unit set to the specific mode, the operation unit is set to the first operation mode. While changing to the normal mode, if the lottery result of the special lottery is not a specific result, the first input is performed when an operation input is received by the mode changing unit to the operation unit in the specific mode. The operating means is changed to the normal mode by a second operation mode different from the operation mode,
A gaming machine, wherein the first operation mode and the second operation mode each include a common operation mode in which the operation means performs a common operation.